Home

3 - Schneider Electric

1. Phase Current Inputs 1A or 5A CT Input impedance lt 0 02 Q Burden lt 0 02 VA 1A CT lt 0 5 VA 5A CT Continuous thermal withstand 4 In 1 second overload 100 In Voltage Inputs Phase Residual Input impedance gt 100 kQ gt 100 kQ Burden lt 0 015 VA 100 V VT lt 0 015 VA 100 V VT Continuous thermal withstand 240 V 240 V 1 second overload 480 V 480 V Isolation of inputs from other Enhanced Enhanced isolated groups Control Relay Outputs O1 to O4 and Ox01 DI Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive load 8A 4A 0 7 A 0 3 A Load L R lt 20 ms 6A 2A 0 5 0 2 A Load L R lt 40 ms 4A 1A 0 2A 0 1A Resistive load 8A Load p f 0 3 5A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced isolated groups Annunciation Relay Outputs O5 and Ox02 to Ox06 Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity L R load 20 ms 2A 1A 0 5 A 0 15 Load p f gt 0 3 1A Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced isolated groups Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 20 96 10 Maximum burden lt 16W Inrush current lt 10A 10 ms Acceptable ripple content 12 Acceptable momentary outages 100 ms Format 1 2 AA lithium 3 6 V Service life 10 years Sepam energized 8 years Sepam not energized 1 Relay outputs
2. S nuo IA XX 8 A N N ee ee ee T d epy emm 80TH D Se ep pas m SC a lt zou Dy xc wedos gt pg rd D gt Eoo dos j T edunlapn a pesn a g 1 VI 2 D 7 y amp 7 CT aia GT 1 SE amp R oo pe d Lm fey pen sydu duy l wu oy Jeu OL er 08 oues I son A wis 0 7 1 oT Tay i A e e d indino ai 00 at a l a dns SLNdNI mai 2 EF UL L i l zom OTH vm 20TH y md H I 1NOD XP Y 350D SM i 9 Te Wi er u ES E wn UT tao TE w INANI eum 28 m uv w p t LG G G aha o c Ho fegu ues RIDES CES UE NET A LINOHD di HDI LIDuD i weda d X Soup DUO AXX EM ouUOD IV EE 08 LES AVES 195 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Switchgear Control Functions Typical Breaker amp Contactor Diagrams Motor AC Contactor 1 Line Motor AC Contactor 1 Line AC MOTOR BUS amp ACMOTOR BUS jm s CR MT 89 FU lt P Li f t In Qs EET PAS S ge f nea SES ole B 4 t et TI uam ry ja Y Ja ds aM C ji e s i a R i HI Pan i AUTO N B Fee e 1 TRANSF
3. Operating time high set point lt 45 ms at 2 Id Operating time percentage based curve lt 45 ms at 2 Id Reset time lt 45 ms at 2 Id Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P87T 1 101 Li LI Protection blocking P87T 1 113 Li Restraint on closing P87T_1_118 D D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Protection output P87T_1_3 Li Protection blocked P87T_1_16 Li z High set point P87T 1 33 Li a Percentage based threshold P87T_1_34 LI CT loss P87T_1_39 D 7 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Test mode P87T_1_41 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 169 amp Electric DE52177 Protection Functions VuN1 20 kV IN1 116A A S 4MVA Dyni1 KE bon 5 n1 d Van 1 kV IN2 2 3 kA 170 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Transformer Differential ANSI Code 87T Example 1 4 MVA Dyn11 20 kV 1 kV transformer the peak closing current is linr 5IN The transformer operates normally at its rated load but will tolerate operation at up to 120 of its rated power Sensor selection The rated current of the windings is The CTs can support an overload of 12096 IN gt 116 A x 1 2 139 2 A and I n gt 2 3 kA x 1 2 2 76 kA The main currents of the CTs must also meet the following requirements S WE u 3VuuN1 y In y 2 5 and 0 y ln y2 5 S 1 S S 3VuuN1 3VuuN2 3VLLN2 So f
4. Setting Data Format Unit 1t03 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Group A direction 0 line1 bus 6 Group A characteristic angle 3 30 4 45 5 60 7 Group A tripping logic 0 1 31 2 3 8 Group A tripping curve 9 Group A Is threshold current 0 1A 10 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 11 Group A timer hold curve 12 Group A timer hold 10 ms 13 Group B direction 0 line1 bus 14 Group B characteristic angle 3 30 4 45 5 60 15 Group B tripping logic 0 1 31 2 3 16 Group B tripping curve 17 Group B Is threshold current 0 1 A 18 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 19 Group B timer hold curve 20 Group B timer hold 10 ms Schneider 269 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 Appendix 270 63230 216 230B1 Function Settings Protection Settings ANSI 67N 67NC Directional Ground Fault Function number 50xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Access 0 projection 1 directional 6 Group A direction 0 line1 bus 7 Group A characteristic angle 0 45 1 0 2 15 3 30 4 45 5 60 6 90 8 Group A sector 2 sector 763 sector 83 4 sector 86 9 Group A tripping curve 10 Group A Isr threshold current 0 1 A 11 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms
5. Group 1 Group 1 50 51 50 51 50 51 50N 51N 50N 51N 50N 51N T 0 1s T 0 1s Motor substation direction of protection function detection A direction of blocking signal orders Schneider 63230 216 230B1 217 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Zone Selective Interlocking Functions Example Radial Network Based on a network coordination study the installation relay settings are as follows m main Sepam T81 relay A D bus fault thresholds 50 51 50N 51N T 0 1 s DT Zone selective Interlocking group 1 blocked by relays B and D blocking send 1 to high voltage relays H backup thresholds 50 51 50N 51N T 0 7 s DT Time based thresholds m feeder to motor substation Sepam S80 relay B D bus fault thresholds 50 51 50N 51N T 0 1 s DT Zone selective Interlocking group 1 blocked by relays C1 and C2 blocking send 1 to relay A D backup thresholds 50 51 50N 51N T 0 4 s DT Time based thresholds m motor feeders m motor 1 Sepam M81 relay C1 D motor fault thresholds 50 51 50N 51N T 0 1 s DT Zone selective Interlocking group 1 blocking send 1 to relay B m motor 2 Sepam M87 relay C2 D motor fault thresholds 50 51 50N 51N T 0 1 s DT Zone selective Interlocking group 1 blocking send 1 to relay B Measurement origin la Ib Ic 50 51 self balancing differential scheme T 0s DT Time based threshold Measurem
6. MB 185 19 19 200 220 240 260 280 3 00 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 4 60 Es 50 0 1579 0 1491 0 1410 0 1335 0 1090 0 0908 0 0768 0 0659 0 0572 0 0501 0 0442 0 0393 0 0352 0 0317 0 0288 0 0262 0 0239 55 0 1752 0 1653 0 1562 0 1479 0 1206 0 1004 0 0849 0 0727 0 0631 0 0552 0 0487 0 0434 0 0388 0 0350 0 0317 0 0288 0 0263 60 0 1927 0 1818 0 1717 0 1625 0 1324 0 1100 0 0929 0 0796 0 069 0 0604 0 0533 0 0474 0 0424 0 0382 0 0346 0 0315 0 0288 65 0 2106 0 1985 0 1875 0 1773 0 1442 0 1197 0 1011 0 0865 0 075 0 0656 0 0579 0 0515 0 0461 0 0415 0 0375 0 0342 0 0312 70 0 2288 0 2156 0 2035 0 1924 0 1562 0 1296 0 1093 0 0935 0 081 0 0708 0 0625 0 0555 0 0497 0 0447 0 0405 0 0368 0 0336 75 0 2474 0 2329 0 2197 0 2076 0 1684 0 1395 0 1176 0 1006 0 087 0 0761 0 0671 0 0596 0 0533 0 0480 0 0434 0 0395 0 0361 80 0 2662 0 2505 0 2362 0 2231 0 1807 0 1495 0 1260 0 1076 0 0931 0 0813 0 0717 0 0637 0 0570 0 0513 0 0464 0 0422 0 0385 85 0 2855 0 2685 0 2530 0 2389 0 1931 0 1597 0 1344 0 1148 0 0992 0 0867 0 0764 0 0678 0 0607 0 0546 0 0494 0 0449 0 0410 90 0 3051 0 2868 0 2701 0 2549 0 2057 0 1699 0 1429 0 1219 0 1054 0 092 0 0811 0 0720 0 0644 0 0579 0 0524 0 0476 0 0435 9 0 3251 0 3054 0 2875 0 2712 0 2185 0 1802 0 1514 0 1292 0 1116 0 0974 0 0858 0 0761 0 0681 0 0612 0 0554 0 0503 0 0459 100 0 3456 0 3244 0 3051 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 105 0 3664 0 3437 0 3231 0 3045 0 2445 0 2012 0 1688
7. 1 According to application Characteristics Settings Activity Setting range On Off Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Zone selective Interlocking trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP D m0 Blocking send 1 V LOGDSC BL1 Blocking send 2 V_LOGDSC_BL2 D D Zone selective Interlocking on V_LOGDSC_ON D 1 Only if switchgear control is not in service 216 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50814 Zone Selective Interlocking Example Radial Network When a fault occurs in a radial network the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault The protection units upstream from the fault are triggered The protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered Only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip Example of Setting A 20 kV installation supplied by a transformer comprises the main bus which in turn supply a feeder to a motor substation and a long feeder to a distant MV LV transformer The installation is grounded via a resistor at the incoming transformer neutral point which limits the current to about 10 Amps 50 51 50 51 T81 50N 51N 50N 51N T 01s T 07s UI A d Le Group 1 cL 50 51 S80 50 51 50N 51N 67N T 04s T 0 4s BSIG1 order cable
8. Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 2 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 27 Gn 11 ms Jolts IEC 60255 21 2 2 20 Gn 16 ms In Operation Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ad 25 C 13 F Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Bd 70 C 158 F Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 78 Cab 10 days 93 RH 40 C 104 F Salt mist IEC 60068 2 52 Kb 2 6 days Influence of corrosion Gas test 2 IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 25 C 77 F 0 5 ppm H S 1 ppm SO Influence of corrosion Gas test 4 IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 25 C 77 F 0 01 ppm H S 0 2 ppm SO 8 0 2 ppm NO 0 01 ppm Cl In Storage amp Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068 2 14 Nb 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F 5 C min Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ab 25 C 13 F Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Bb 70 C 158 F Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 78 Cab 56 days 93 RH 40 C 104 F IEC 60068 2 30 Db 6 days 95 RH 55 C 131 F Enclosure Safety Tests Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels IP20 NEMA Type 12 Fire withstand IEC 60695 2 11 650 C 1200 F with glow wire Electrical Safety Tests 1 2 50 us impulse wave IEC 60255 5 5 kV 0 Power frequency dielectric withstand ANSI C37 90 1 KV 1 min indication output 1 5 kV 1 min control output IEC 60255 5 2 kV 1 min 2 ce EN 50263 harmonized standard European directives m 89
9. inhibit thermal overload logic input Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS User Information The following information is available for the user m heatrise m time before tripping with constant current Characteristics Settings Alarm Current lalarm Setting range 1 05 to 1 70 IB Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1A Tripping Current Itrip Setting range 1 05 to 1 70 IB Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1A Setting Current Is Setting range 1 02 Itrip to 2 IB Accuracy 1 2 Resolution Setting Time Ts Setting range 1A 1 to 2000 minutes range varies depending on the tripping and setting currents Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time accuracy 1 mn 2 OF 28 amp Electric Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P49RMS 1 101 m LI Protection blocking P49RMS 1 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Delayed output P49RMS _1_3 LI Alarm P49RMS 1 10 m LI Block closing P49RMS 1 11 m LI Protection blocked P49RMS 1 16 m LI Hot state P49RMS 1 18 m 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 101 Protection Functions SFT2041 Sepam series 80 Condensateur C66 Flo Edt Operation Sepa
10. a Tmax Tambiant where T max is the equipment maximum temperature according to insulation class T ambient is the measured temperature Table of Insulation Classes Class Y A E B F H 200 220 250 Tmax 90 C 105 C 120 C 130 C 155 C 180 C 200 C 220 C 250 C Tmax 194 F 221 F 248 F 266 F 311 F 356 F 392 F 428 F 482 F Reference IEC 60085 1984 Adaptation of the Protection to Motor Thermal Withstand Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer To fully comply with these experimental curves additional parameters must be set W initial heat rise EsO is used to reduce the cold tripping time 2 Kal Es0 modified cold curve INE where In natural logarithm T es _Es IB m a second group of parameters time constants and set points is used for thermal withstand with locked rotors This second set of parameters applies when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is Taking the Negative Sequence Component into Account For motors with wound rotors the presence of a negative sequence component increases the heat rise in the motor The current s negative sequence component is addressed in the protection function by the equation leq 4lph Kx12 where Iph is the largest phase current I2 is the negative sequence current component K is a adjustable coefficient K may have the following values 0 2 25 4 5 9 For an asynchronous mo
11. Characteristics Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix TC switchgear position V_TC CBDISCREP D discrepancy Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Disturbance Recording Trigger Operation Recording analog and logic signals can be triggered by different events according to control matrix parameter setting or by manual action m triggering by the grouping of all pick up signals of the protection functions in service triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions triggering by selected logic inputs triggering by selected outputs Vx logic equations manual triggering by a remote control command TC20 manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool manual triggering by Logipam Disturbance recording can be m blocked by SFT2841 software remote control command TC18 or Logipam m validated by SFT2841 software remote control command TC19 or by Logipam Block Diagram Disturbance recording trigger 4 according to protection functions 8 configured in matrix delayed outputs 8 Pick up Disturbance recording trigger by selected logic inputs Disturbance recording trigger by selected outputs Vx logic equations Manual SFT2841 F SE disturbance recording trigger g ing Disturbance recordi
12. Characteristics Measurement Range 0 02 to 20 I N Unit A Resolution 0 1A Accuracy 5 Refresh Interval 1 second typical 50 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Metering Functions Operation The Voltage Transformer VT supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase and residual voltage measurement chain m voltage transformers m VT connection to Sepam m Sepam voltage analog inputs There are two units for the function one for supervision of the main voltage channel VTs and the other for supervision of the additional voltage channel VTs The function processes the following failures m partial loss of phase voltages detected by o presence of negative sequence voltage D and absence of negative sequence current m loss of all phase voltages detected by D presence of current on one of the three phases D and absence of all measured voltages m tripping of the phase VT and or residual VT protection relay detected by the acquisition on a logic input of the fuse blown contact or auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker protecting the VTs m other types of failures may be processed using the logic equation editor The Phase voltage fault and Residual voltage fault information disappear automatically when m thecause of the fault disappears m all measured voltages are present Using of Circuit
13. Hot State Set Point When the function is used to protect a motor this fixed set point is designed for detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function The value of the fixed set point is 50 Heat rise and cooling time constants E E 8 1 0 36 gt 0 i T2 t Heat rise time constant Cooling time constant For self ventilated rotating machines cooling is more effective when the machine is running than when it is stopped Running and stopping of the equipment are calculated based on the value of the current m running if 0 1 IB m Stopped if 0 1 IB Two time constants may be set m T1 heatrise time constant concerns equipment that is running m T2 cooling time constant concerns equipment that is stopped Taking into account harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current which takes into account 13th level harmonics 108 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Considering Ambient Temperature Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 104 F 40 C The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor option to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 104 F 40 C Tmax 40 C Increase factor faz 2
14. Reactive power Q Qa Qb Qc Apparent power S Sa Sb Sc Peak demand power Pmax Qmax Power factor pf Calculated active and reactive energy Wh VARh Phase current l a l b l c RMS Calculated residual current I rx Neutral point voltage V nt Network and Machine Diagnosis Tripping current Tripla Triplb Triple Unbalance ratio negative sequence current I2 Harmonic distortion THD current Ithd Harmonic distortion THD voltage Vthd Phase displacement gr q r pr amp Phase displacement qa qb qc Thermal capacity used D Unbalance ratio negative sequence current l 2 Differential current Idiffa Idiffb Idiffc Through current Ita Itb Itc Angle between currents and Starting current Third harmonic voltage neutral point or residual VntH3 Switchgear Diagnosis ANSI Code CT VT supervision 60 60FL Cumulative breaking current m standard n according to instrument transformers connected 16 63230 216 230B1 Spear 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering Functions Processing Measured Signals Values Used by the Protection Functions 3l 10 3V Vo Protections ANSI Code RMS H1 ZH1 RMS H1 Phase overcurrent 50 51 D Ground fault 50N 51N n Sensitive ground fault 50G 51G Breaker failure 50BF Negative sequence current
15. Vbc or Vbn gt Vus or Vins Vca or Vcn gt Vus or Vin Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Voltage Mode Setting range Vas or Vins Set Point Setting range delayed output Vab or Van delayed output Vbc or Vbn delayed output Vca or Vcn delayed output pick up signal instantaneous output Vab or Van instantaneous output Vbc or Vbn instantaneous output Vca or Vcn Main channels Vit Additional channels Vii Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage 50 of Vu p or Vinp to 150 of Vu p or Vinp Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 Time Delay T Setting range 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms from 0 9 Vis Vins to 1 1 Vis Vins typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms from 0 9 Vus Vins to 1 1 ViLs Vins amp Electric Reset time lt 50 ms from 1 1 Vus Vins to 0 9 Viis Vins Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P59 x 101 m D Protection blocking P59 x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P59_x_1 D D Delayed output P59_x_3 D D D Fault phase a 2 P59 x 7 Fault phase D I P59_x_8 Fault phase c P59 x 9 Protection blo
16. flow direction DE50770 1 Choice made in the general settings Schneider 63230 216 230B1 amp Electric 27 Metering Functions Active Power Active Reactive and Apparent Power Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the a PC with SFT2841 software D m communication link L key an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Reactive Power Apparent Power P Pa Pb Pc Q Qa Ob Qc S Sa Sb Sc Measurement Range 0 8 Sn at 999 MW 1 0 8 Sn at 999 MVAR 1 0 8 Sn at 999 MVA 1 Units KW MW kVAR MVARr kVA MVA Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar 0 1 kVA Accuracy 1 from 0 3 to 1 5 Sn 1 96 from 0 3 to 1 5 Sn 9 1 from 0 3 to 1 5 Sn x3 from 0 1 to 0 3 Sn 2 3 from 0 1 to 0 3 Sn 9 x3 from 0 1 to 0 3 Sn Display Format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 second typical 1 second typical 1 Sn v3V p In 2 Cos gt 0 8 under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Cos lt 0 6 under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 28 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MT10257 MT10258 Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Peak Demand Active and Reactive Power Power Factor pf Peak Demand Active and Reactive Power Operatio
17. 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Demand Current Peak Demand Currents Operation Demand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the three phase currents la Ib and Ic m demand current is calculated over an adjustable period usually 5 to 60 minutes m peak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current drawn by peak loads Peak demand current values can be cleared They are saved in the event of power loss Readout Access the measurements by any of the following m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Resetting to Zero The user can access zero reset m via the clear button on the Sepam display if a peak demand is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control command TC4 Characteristics Measurement range 0 02 to 40 IN Units A or kA Resolution 0 1A Accuracy 0 5 96 typical 2 1 from 0 3 to 1 5 IN 2 from 0 1 to 0 3 IN Display format 3 significant digits Integration period 5 10 15 30 60 min 1 IN rated current set in the general settings 2 At IN under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 ig amp Electric Metering Functions Ve DE50334 Vac Vbc Vb a b c network phase to neutral and phase to phase voltages Vb DE50333 Vab Vac Ve a c b network phase t
18. Block Diagram Logic Thresholds cc e St St e Ze SE Ke d Ed Get Zeg es St E Ste es EE ces BSIG1 T o T 0 Ke T 200 ms output 0102 1 inhibit blocking send blocking send 1 if fault not cleared Blocking Overcurrent reception 1 unit 1 de unit 2 de Ground unit 1 de unit 2 de Directional Ground Fault unit 1 de Time based thresholds ayed ayed Fault ayed ayed ayed Overcurrent unit 3 de unit 4 de unit 5 de unit 6 de unit 7 de unit 8 de Ground unit 3 de unit 4 de unit 5 de unit 6 de unit 7 de unit 8 de Directional Ground Fault unit 2 de ayed ayed ayed ayed ayed ayed Fault ayed ayed ayed ayed ayed ayed ayed 214 63230 216 230B1 Schneider D Electric Zone sequence interlocking trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE52318 Control and Monitoring Functions Zone Selective Interlocking S82 S84 T82 T87 G82 G87 and G88 Applications Block Diagram Logic thresholds Blocking send 1 and 2 Overcurrent unit 1 pickup unit 2 pickup Ground Fault unit 1 pickup unit 2 pickup Directional Overcurrent unit 1 pickup 0 8 Is Directional Ground Fault unit 1 pickup 0 8 Is Overcurrent unit 5 pickup unit 6 pickup Ground Fault unit 5 pickup unit 6 pickup Directional Overcurrent unit 2 pickup 0 8 Is Directi
19. Example Generator shutdown and normal starting gt t setting use breaker position Ic tripping output 50 27 ready van Vbn Ven an Vbn Ven 3 Shutdown len Characteristics Bus EN Settings Current Set Point gt Setting range 0 5 to 4 IN Max Accuracy 1 5 or 0 02 IN la Ib 18 Resolution 1A I Drop out pick up ratio 95 5 or 0 015 IN Voltage Set Point Is l l Setting range 10 to 100 of Vit l A Accuracy 2 or 0 005 V p 50 27 l Resolution 1 ready il Drop out pick up ratio 103 x Advanced Settings IT EE E Use of Breaker Position _ m Setting range Used not used gt t T1 Time Tripping Setting range 0to 10s 50 27 Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms i Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit i T2 Time Example Generator shutdown and inadvertent starting 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Setting range Oto 10s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution Characteristic times 1 Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit lt 40 ms at 2 Is typically 30 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P50 27 1 101 m Protection blocking P50 27_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Tripping output P50 27_1_3 D Protection blocked P50 27 1 16 m D Protection ready P50 27 135 m 1 Under reference conditions
20. 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Characteristics Setting Activity Setting range On Off Voltage Return Time Setting range 0 to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Normal Tie Position Setting range No tie Normally open Normally closed Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Transfer command on fault V_TRANS_ON_FLT m Transfer off command V_TRANS_STOP L D Voltage OK upstream of the V TRANS V EN D incoming circuit breaker Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Automatic transfer on V_TRANSF_ON D Tripping by 2 3 or 1 2 logic V_2 3_TRIPPING D D Tripping by automatic V_AT_TRIPPING D D transfer NO circuit breaker closing V_CLOSE_NO_ORD D Breaker closing ready V_CLOSE_EN D D Tie tripping V_TIE_OPENING Tie closing ready V_TIE_CLOSE_EN D D Tie closing V_TIE_CLOSING D D Tie closing with sync check V_TIESYNCFAIL D D failed 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 247 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Local Indication Functions ANSI Code 30 Operation Events may be displayed locally on the front panel of Sepam by m a message on the display m switching on of one of the 9 yellow LEDs Message Type Indication Predefined Messages All messages connected to the standard Sepam funct
21. 5 gg E E zs amp 238 een INTSTART an EE OFF ri cH ge pd SPD i GER LL START pou cont 45 Lol oL Loi L3 MR rt G MAN i i CONT ON N STAUN 1 CURR TRANST i LEVEL ou SS m I RUN CONT _42R INCOMPL s IR Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 197 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Switchgear Control Functions ANSI Code 94 69 Characteristics Settings Switchgear Control Setting range On Off Type of Device Setting range Circuit breaker Contactor Tripping Pulse Duration Output O1 Setting range 200 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Closing with Sync Check Setting range On Off Close Request Time Delay Tdf Setting range 0 to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Sync Confirmation Time Delay Tcs Setting range Oto 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Tripping opening V_TRIPCB D L Block closing V BLOCKCLOSE D L Closing V CLOSECB Closing without sync check V CLOSE NOCTRL m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Switchgear control on V SWCTRL ON L Tripping opening V TRIPPED D L L Block closing V BLOCK CLOSE D L D Closing V_CLOSED Contactor control V_CONTACTOR L L Sync check o
22. Equation s x or y or z DE50675 DE50676 AND x y z Equation s x and y and z DE50677 exclusive OR XOR x y z gt s 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 s 1ifxoryorz 1 DE50678 Complement These functions may use the complement of one or more input values E e Equation s x s 1 if x 0 Delay Timers There are two types of delay timers x DE50679 DE50680 m on delay timer used to delay the appearance of a signal by a time T T 0 E T m oft delay timer used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T 0 T S a T 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50681 DE50682 DE50683 Schneider LP Electric Definition of Symbols Pulse Mode Operation The on pulse used to create a short duration pulse 200 ms each time a signal appears m off pulse used to create a short duration pulse 200 ms each time a signal disappears Note the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure Bistable Functions Bistable functions may be used to store values S 1 b mens Equation B S RxB 63230 216 230B1 183 Control and Monitoring Functions Tripping contactor control Logic Input Output Assignment Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions
23. If the close enable is not received the message SYNC FAILURE is displayed When possible and if the MCS025 remote module is connected by the CCA785 cord to the Sepam to which the close request has been made an additional message indicates the type of synchronization failure m SYNC FAILED dU for too high a voltage difference m SYNC FAILED DF for too high a frequency difference m SYNC FAILED dPhi for too high a phase difference An additional delay is used to confirm the close enable to guarantee that the closing conditions last long enough Block Diagram Synch confirmation DE52273 i Close enable by MCS025 Ix Closing with Synchro checked synchro check OK close request Internal trip order V_TRIPPED Synchro checked close request in process V_SYNC_INPROC Internal close inhibit V CLOSE INHIBITED Close request Tdf 0 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 191 lectric PE50454 PE50455 Control and Monitoring Functions Sepam hardware General characteristics CT VT sensors CTAVT Supervisi Predefined control logic Switchgear control Iv On Circuit breaker C Contactor M Closing with synchro check Closing request time 200 ms Synchro confirmation time 0 ms Logic discrimination VW On SFT2841 parameter setting of Switchgear control Sepam hardware General characteristi
24. amp Electric Protection Functions x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 144 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Directional Ground Fault Type 2 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Characteristic Angle 0 Setting range Ir Pr Ir sum of the main phase channels 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 1 Tripping Curve Setting range Isr Setting Definite time setting range 2 See previous page 0 01 INr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A in amperes Sum of CTs 0 01 IN lt Isr lt 15 In min 0 1 A With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 1 to 30 A 20 A rating 0 2 to 300 A CT 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A IDMT setting range 0 01 INr lt Isr lt Inr min 0 1 A in amperes Sum of
25. Control and Monitoring Capacitor Bank Functions Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Block Diagram Open capacitor step x by remote control Remote control inhibit Step x open order Ix Manual capacitor step control Ix Capacitor step x VAR control Ix Automatic capacitor step control Ix External capacitor step control inhibit Ix ini i nternal capacitor x step trip order 0 Timp V_STPX_TRIPPING Open pulse Capacitor step x external trip Ix Trip by protection 51C step x Unit 1 51C step x Unit 2 V_TRIPSTPX Capacitor step x opening stagger time Capacitor step x discharge time Internal voluntary capacitor step open order Capacitor step x open Ix D Techx Internal capacitor step trip on fault order Internal capacitor x step close order Trip by protection 51C step x Unit 1 V_STPX_CLOSING 51C step x Unit 2 Internal trip order V TRIPPED Close capacitor step x by remote control Remote control inhibit Step x close order Ix Manual capacitor step control Ix Capacitor step x VAR control Ix Automatic capacitor step control Ix V CLOSE STPX External capacitor step control inhibit Ix Breaker closed 1101 Step x open Ix Capacitor step x Step x closed Ix matching fault V STP CTRLFLTX 204 63230 216 230B1 gr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric C
26. Detection of no remnant Voltage set point 90 Vi Np Delay 3 sec Setting information Voltage set point 30 V Np ANSI 27R voltage on the bus to which the Delay 100 msec Unit 1 motors are connected 236 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric PE50459 Control and Monitoring Functions SETIBAT Sepan series BO Sous station 47 o02u S 55g g 7 0 begun Namen Grecs CTT serum CTT Seven Geng Lage Os Logic input output assignment de Jua de Ts SFT2841 standard assignment of the inputs required for the AT function 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Automatic Transfer Main Main Implementation Logic Input Assignment The logic inputs required for the AT function are assigned in the SFT2841 Logic I Os screen The Standard assignments button suggests an assignment of the main inputs required for the AT function The other inputs are assigned manually Logic Output Assignment in the Control Matrix The assignment of the logic outputs required for the AT function takes place in two steps 1 declaring the required logic outputs Used indicating the control mode of each output in the SFT2841 Logic I Os screen 2 assigning each predefined output associated with the AT function to a Sepam logic output in the SFT2841 Control matrix screen The predefined outputs associated with the AT function are as follows P
27. Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 Tripping Curve TimerHhold Definite time DT Definite time Standard inverse time SIT Definite time Very inverse time VIT or LTI Definite time Extremely inverse time EIT Definite time Ultra inverse time UIT Definite time RI curve Definite time IEC inverse time SIT A Definite time or IDMT IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B Definite time or IDMT IEC extremely inverse time EIT C Definite time or IDMT IEEE moderately inverse IEC D Definite time or IDMT IEEE very inverse IEC E Definite time or IDMT IEEE extremely inverse IEC F Definite time or IDMT IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT Customized Definite time Characteristics Settings Characteristic Angle 0 Setting range 30 45 60 Accuracy 1 2 Tripping Curve Setting range Is Set Point See list above Setting range definite time 0 1 IN Is 24 IN in amperes IDMT 0 1 IN Is 2 4 IN in amperes Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 IN Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 IN Is x 100 Setting range definite time Inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS 2 Accuracy 1 definite time 4 2 or fr
28. Function number 45xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to4 Common settings 5 Tripping curve 6 Threshold current IB 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 K setting 1 to 100 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Appendix 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Function Settings Protection Settings ANSI 47 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function number 40xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to4 Common settings 5 Threshold voltage Vu p 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 48 51LR Locked Rotor Excessive Starting Time Function number 4401 Setting Data Format Unit 1t03 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Threshold current IB 6 ST excessive starting time 10 ms 7 LT locked rotor time 10 ms 8 LTS locked on start time 10 ms ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload for Cables and Machines Function number 4301 Setting Data Format Unit 1to4 Common settings 5 Negative sequence factor K 0 none 0 1 low 2 25 2 medium 4 5 3 high 9 6 Is set point shift group 1 group 2 IB 7 Ambient temperature taken into account 0 no 1 yes 8 Maximum equipment temperature C 9 Additional settings taken into account group 2 0 no 1 yes 10 Learnt cooling time constant T2 learnt taken into 0 no account 1 yes 11 Group 1
29. Functions m OR logic OR EEE V_TRIPPED V MMIC GUT Va VL3 OR 1103 Va is assigned state 1 if VL3 or 1103 are in state 1 Output variables K ES Ces QUT m AND logic AND Vv HI V MI nn VMMCOULI VMMC OUT VV3 VL2 AND VVa VV3 is assigned state 1 if VL2 and VV1 are in state 1 Local variables not memorized Mc OUT V MMMIC QUT m XOR exclusive OR V MIMICOUT 4 V MIMIC o V3 VL1 XOR VL2 V3 is assigned state 1 if only one of the variables VL1 NEMMIC OUTS V MMECLOCA or VL2 is in state 1 RCMMI OUIS VMMICLTEST This is equivalent to V3 Va AND NOT Vb OR Vb AND NOT Va m A commentary A The characters on the right are not processed m the operations may be grouped between brackets to indicate the order in EE which they are carried out LE V1 VL3 OR VL2 AND 1213 ano on xor wor Al SFT2841 data input assistance tool 256 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric PE50160 Control and Monitoring Functions x TOF y t Time delays Gesell Delete Ser SFT2841 timer editor 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Logic Equations Functions m x SR y 2 bistable with priority to Set xis set to 1 when y is equal to 1 xis set to 0 when z is equal to 1 and y is equal to 0 otherwise x is not changed V1 SR I04 1105 1104 sets V1 to 1 1105 sets V1 to O m LATCH x y latching of variables x y The va
30. Overshoot time lt 50 ms at 2 Vs2 Reset time lt 50 ms at 2 Vs2 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P47_x_101 m Protection blocking P47 x 113 m Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P47_x 1 L D Delayed output P47x3 m D D Protection blocked P47 x 16 m x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 63230 216 230B1 91 Protection Functions Detection of excessive starting time and locked rotors for motor protection DE50826 0 05 IB Excessive starting time Locked rotor DE50827 0 05 IB Excessive starting time Locked rotor Rotor rotation Case of excessive starting time g Starting g finished 8 0 05 IB Tie Excessive pg 7 starting time M Tt l L Locked rotor 1 Ll after starting i Rotor rotation Cd PER Case of jammed or stalled rotor l i 8 Is 0 05 IB Excessive starting time Locked rotor after start Rotor rotation Ile Case of locked rotor at start 92 63230 216 230B1 DE50829 Schneider amp Electric Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor ANSI Code 48 51LR Operation This function is three phase 1 Excessive starting time ST During start sequence the protection enables when one of the three phase currents is greater than the set point Is due to overloads e g conveyor or insufficient supply voltage 2 Locked rotor LT
31. Prz H with detection of an external fault the protection function is insensitive to saturation of the CTs but its operation is not blocked Iro 2x PE 3 Ir The function picks up H the differential residual current is greater than the operating set point The set point is defined by m the minimum set point IsO m atripping characteristic with a slope of 1 05 differential residual current vs restrained current Block Diagram Ir input or l r Ido rx ir irz or l rx r r Iro 2 ir Iro IG 134 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric detection external fault IdO Tr Ido gt tripping Pas output Iro 3 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Restricted Ground Fault Differential ANSI Code 6AREF Sizing Current Transformers The primary currents of the current transformers used must comply with the following rule 0 1 IN lt INr lt 2 IN with IN primary current of phase CTs and INr primary current of the neutral point CT The current transformer should be defined by which equation produces the highest knee point voltage a Vk gt RCT Rw x 20 IN b Vk gt RCT Rw 1 6 I3P IN x IN c Vk gt RCT Rw 2 4 HP IN x IN The equations apply to the phase current transformers and the neutral point current tr
32. display via the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Range 0 to 65535 Units hours Starting Current and Starting Time Operation The starting time is the time between the moment at which one of the three phase currents exceeds 1 2 IB and the moment at which the three currents drop back below 1 2 IB The maximum phase current obtained during this period is the starting current The two values are saved in case auxiliary power fails Readout Measurements are accessed via m the Sepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Starting Time Measurement Range 0 to 300s Units sorms Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Refresh Interval 1 second typical Starting Current Measurement Range 1 2 IB at 24 In Units A or kA Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 Or 65 5 kA Schneider 63230 216 230B1 43 amp Electric Metering Functions 44 63230 216 230B1 Machine Operation Assistance Number of Starts Before Block Start Block Time Number of Starts Before Block Operation Blocking is defined as preventing the set number of starts hot cold total starts from being exceeded The normally closed N C contacts of O2 open to prevent starting The number of starts allowed before block is
33. m assigned to a logic output directly or via the control matrix assigned to a LED or message via the control matrix transmitted by the communication link as a new remote indication used by the predefined control and monitoring functions used to block or reset a protection function 260 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Appendix Contents Ground Fault Current 262 Function Settings 264 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 261 amp Electric Appendix Ground Fault Current Measurement Method Summary without Neutral Residual Method Measurement e Zero Setting Range Connections Current Remark Number Method Sequence CT A Setting 1A Internal Phase DT 0 1 to 15 Inr None 31 Sum Sepam Series 80 applies Current IDMT 0 1 to Inr Considers Inr IN forLPCT Summation also Sepam Series 80 2A Specific CSH Zero DT 0 2 Ato 30A CSH 120 2 A Rated Sepam Series 80 Sequence CT On2 DMT 0 2 Ato2A CSH 200 CSH 2A Considers INr 2 A A Input Rating Core Bal CT 3A Specific CSH Zero DT 0 5A to 75A CSH 120 sch g 5 A Rated Ino 5A Sequence CT on 5 DMT 0 5A to CSH 200 CSH 5 A zero A Input Rating 7 5A sequence CT 4A Specific CSH Zero DT 2 A to 300 A CSH 120 Eeer 20 A Rated Sepam Series 80 Sequence CT On DMT 2 A to 20 A CSH
34. 0 34 to 42 08 Drop out P50N 51N x 4 D D m JAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 Protection blocked P50N 51N_x_16 m JAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 15 A set point output P50N 51N x 56 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 127 amp Electric DE50746 Protection Functions Generator protection against close short circuits l s is 1 0 2 Vi ViLN 0 2 Set point adjustment 128 63230 216 230B1 0 8 Voltage Restrained Overcurrent ANSI Code 50V 51V Description The voltage restrained overcurrent protection function is used to protect generators The operation set point is adjusted according to the voltage to take into account cases of faults close to the generator which cause voltage dips and short circuit current m the protection function is three phase and has a definite or IDMT time delay m the customized curve defined point by point may be used with this protection function m an adjustable timer hold definite time or IDMT can be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults m the set point is adjusted according to the lowest of the phase to phase voltages measured The equation adjusted set point Is is defined by the following m SetIDMT Trip Curves by Time delay T at I Iset 10 or TMS Factor like Time Dial Setting refe
35. 12 Group A Vsr threshold current Vu p 13 Group A timer hold curve 3 14 Group A timer hold 10 ms 15 Group A memory time 10 ms 16 Group A memory voltage Vu p 17 Group B direction 0 line1 bus 18 Group B angle Same as group A 19 Group B sector Same as group A 20 Group B tripping curve DO 21 Group B Isr threshold current 0 1A 22 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 23 Group B Ver threshold current Vp 24 Group B timer hold curve 25 Group B timer hold 10 ms 26 Group B memory time 10 ms 27 Group B memory voltage Vp ANSI 78PS Pole Slip Function number 7601 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Access 0 equal area criterion 1 power swing criterion 2 both criteria 6 Tarea 10 ms 7 Max number of power swings 1 to 30 8 Max time between power swings 10 ms ANSI 81H Overfrequency Function number 57xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Frequency threshold 0 1 Hz 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms 7 Reserved 8 Vs set point Vp ANSI 81L Underfrequency Function number 56xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1to4 Common settings 5 Frequency threshold 0 1 Hz 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms 7 Restraint 0 no 1 yes 8 Vs set point Vip 9 BLOCK set point for frequency variation Hz s Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Appendix 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights R
36. 125 0 0114 0 0105 0 0086 0 0072 0 0061 0 0052 0 0045 0 0040 0 0035 0 0031 0 0028 0 0025 0 0016 0 0011 0 0008 0 0006 130 0 0137 0 0126 0 0103 0 0086 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0048 0 0042 0 0038 0 0034 0 0030 0 0019 0 0013 0 0010 0 0008 135 0 0160 0 0147 0 0120 0 0101 0 0085 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0049 0 0044 0 0039 0 0035 0 0023 0 0016 0 0011 0 0009 140 0 0183 0 0168 0 0138 0 0115 0 0097 0 0084 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0050 0 0045 0 0040 0 0026 0 0018 0 0013 0 0010 145 0 0206 0 0189 0 0155 0 0129 0 0110 0 0094 0 0082 0 0072 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0046 0 0029 0 0020 0 0015 0 0011 150 0 0229 0 0211 0 0172 0 0144 0 0122 0 0105 0 0091 0 0080 0 0070 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 155 0 0253 0 0232 0 0190 0 0158 0 0134 0 0115 0 0100 0 0088 0 0077 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0035 0 0025 0 0018 0 0014 160 0 0276 0 0253 0 0207 0 0173 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0096 0 0085 0 0075 0 0067 0 0061 0 0039 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 165 0 0299 0 0275 0 0225 0 0187 0 0159 0 0136 0 0118 0 0104 0 0092 0 0082 0 0073 0 0066 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 170 0 0323 0 0296 0 0242 0 0202 0 0171 0 0147 0 0128 0 0112 0 0099 0 0088 0 0079 0 0071 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 175 0 0346 0 0317 0 0260 0 0217 0 0183 0 0157 0 0137 0 0120 0 0106 0 0094 0 0084 0 0076 0 0048 0 0034 0 0025 0 0019 180 0 0370 0 0339 0 0277 0 0231 0 0196 0 0168 0 0146 0 0128 0 0113 0 0101 0 0090 0 0081 0 0052 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 185 0 0393 0 0361 0 0295 0 0246 0
37. 185 0 0837 0 0769 0 0631 0 0528 0 0448 0 0385 0 0334 0 0293 0 0259 0 0231 0 0207 0 0187 0 0119 0 0083 0 0061 0 0046 190 0 0861 0 0790 0 0649 0 0542 0 0460 0 0395 0 0344 0 0301 0 0266 0 0237 0 0213 0 0192 0 0122 0 0085 0 0062 0 0048 195 0 0884 0 0812 0 0666 0 0557 0 0473 0 0406 0 0353 0 0309 0 0274 0 0244 0 0218 0 0197 0 0126 0 0087 0 0064 0 0049 200 0 0908 0 0834 0 0684 0 0572 0 0485 0 0417 0 0362 0 0317 0 0281 0 0250 0 0224 0 0202 0 0129 0 0089 0 0066 0 0050 116 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Hot Curves MB 100 1 05 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 1 80 Es 105 0 6690 0 2719 0 1685 0 1206 0 0931 0 0752 0 0627 0 0535 0 0464 0 0408 0 0363 0 0326 0 0295 0 0268 0 0245 0 0226 110 3 7136 0 6466 0 3712 0 2578 0 1957 0 1566 0 1296 0 1100 0 0951 0 0834 0 0740 0 0662 0 0598 0 0544 0 0497 0 0457 115 1 2528 0 6257 0 4169 0 3102 0 2451 0 2013 0 1699 0 1462 0 1278 0 1131 0 1011 0 0911 0 0827 0 0755 0 0693 120 3 0445 0 9680 0 6061 0 4394 0 3423 0 2786 0 2336 0 2002 0 1744 0 1539 0 1372 0 1234 0 1118 0 1020 0 0935 125 1 4925 0 8398 0 5878 0 4499 0 3623 0 3017 0 2572 0 2231 0 1963 0 1747 0 1568 0 1419 0 1292 0 1183 130 2 6626 1 1451 0 7621 0 5705 0 4537 0 3747 0 3176 0 2744 0
38. A generator is often protected with two tripping set points m an IDMT set point set to 1 05 Gn with a long delay Example type B curve Gs1 1 05 and T12 8s m adefinite time DT set point set to approximately 1 2 Gn with a tripping time of approximately ten seconds For example DT Gs2 1 2 and T2 5 s Example 2 Transformer A transformer is generally protected by an IDMT set point set to 1 05 Gn with a long delay For example type C curve Gs 1 05 and T 4 s Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE80143 Protection Functions This protection function checks the synchronization of the electrical networks upstream and downstream from a circuit breaker and allows closing when the differences in voltage frequency or phase are within authorized limits Visynci H Vu sync2 Vusynce2 lt Vitsioy 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved es Ap 360 Af Ta lt dPhis Be co lAVul lt dVus Live1 AND Dead2 Sync Check ANSI Code 25 Operation The sync check function is designed to allow circuit breaker closing without any risk of dangerous closing between two voltages ViLsynci and Vu sync2 The voltages compared may be two phase to phase voltages or two phase to neutral voltages Vin The function enables when there is a phase frequency or amplitude difference within set limits between the voltages that are compared The f
39. Accuracy D 2 or from 1 O ms to 25 ms Resolution Control of Capacitor Banks Setting range 10 ms or 1 digit On Off Staggered Capacitor Step Opening Time Delay Techx 1 delay per step Setting range 0 to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digi Capacitor Step Discharge Time Delay Tdx 1 delay per step Setting range Oto 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digi Capacitor Step Open and Close Control Pulse Duration Timp Setting range Oto 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digi Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Tripping opening V_TRIPCB n D Block closing V_BLOCKCLOSE D D Closing V_CLOSECB a D Capacitor step 1 tripping V_TRIP_STP1 D Capacitor step 2 tripping V_TRIP_STP2 Capacitor step 3 tripping V_TRIP_STP3 D Capacitor step 4 tripping V_TRIP_STP4 Capacitor step 1 closing V_CLOSE_STP1 Capacitor step 2 closing V_CLOSE_STP2 Capacitor step 3 closing V_CLOSE_STP3 Capacitor step 4 closing V_CLOSE_STP4 Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Switchgear control on V_SWCTRL_ON Tripping opening V TRIPPED n D Block closing V_BLOCK_CLOSE D D Closing V_CLOSED D D D Contactor control V_CONTACTOR D D Capacitor bank control on V_BANK_ON Tripping of capacitor step 1 V_S
40. Current total harmonic distortion is used to assess the quality of the current It is calculated based on phase la calculating up to the 13th harmonic Ithd is calculated over 50 periods using the following formula AUS Ithd 100 H1 with RMS RMS value of current la up to the 13th harmonic H1 value of the fundamental of current la Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 100 Units Resolution 0 1 Accuracy 1 1 at IN for Ithd gt 2 Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Vthd Operation Voltage total harmonic distortion is used to assess the quality of the voltage It is calculated based on the measurement of Vab or Va according to the configuration calculating for 13th level harmonics Vthd is calculated over 50 periods using the following formula NS Vthd 100 H1 1 with RMS RMS value of voltage Vab or Van up to the 13th harmonic H1 value of the fundamental of voltage Vab or Van Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the e icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 10
41. Function number 53xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Access 0 reverse power 1 overpower 6 Ps set point 100 W 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 32Q Directional Reactive Overpower Function number 5401 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Access 0 reverse power 1 overpower 6 Qs set point 100 var 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 37 Phase Undercurrent Function number 2201 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Threshold current 0 1A 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 37P Directional Active Underpower Function number 55xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Access 0 drawn 1 supplied 6 Ps set point 100 W 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 38 49T Temperature Monitoring Function number 46xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 16 xx 16 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Ts1 alarm set point C 6 Ts2 alarm set point C ANSI 40 Field Loss Underimpedance Function number 7001 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Xa resistance 1mo 6 Xb resistance 1mo 7 Xc resistance 1mo 8 Tripping time delay circle 1 10 ms 9 Tripping time delay circle Xd 10 ms ANSI 46 Negative Sequence Unbalance
42. IEC 60255 6 Schneider Gf Electric 63230 216 230B1 121 Protection Functions 122 63230 216 230B1 Inadvertent Energization ANSI Code 50 27 Example Synchronous generator data m S 3 15 MVA ViLN1 6 3 kV Xd 233 X d 21 X d 15 the generator is connected to a network with a Psc 10 MVA the maximum admissible duration of a voltage sag is 2 5 seconds To set the protection function it is necessary to calculate the rated generator impedance m IB S 3 Vunt 289A m ZN VuNI V3 IB 12 59 Q The network impedance is Zpsc VitN1 2 Psc 3 97 Q The Istart starting current is approximately istart eG BP A JB Zpsc xd x Zn The current set point is set between 20 and 50 of the starting current Is 0 5 xIstart 311 A The voltage set point is often set between 80 and 85 of VLLN In this example the selected set point is Vus 85 The T1 time is set longer than the maximum admissible duration of a voltage sag e g T1 4 sec T2 is set to detect the appearance of a current during starting For example T2 250 ms Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Protection against overcurrents and overloads 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 Description Protection against overcurrents and overloads m the protection function is thre
43. In this case the shape of P as a function of the internal angle is different The same is true when the voltage across the machine terminals does not drop to zero or when there is a change in the load due to load shedding when the fault is cleared The situation for synchronous motors is identical to that of synchronous generators except that instead of supplying power they draw power The network voltage leads the electromotive force In this case the above relationships must be inverted 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Recloser with 1 to 4 shots to clear transients or semi permanent faults on overhead lines Definition Reclaim Time The reclaim time is activated by a circuit breaker closing command given by the recloser If no faults are detected before the end of the reclaim time the initial fault is considered to be cleared Otherwise a new reclosing step is initiated The delay must be longer than the longest reclosing step activation condition Safety Time until Ready The safety time is activated by a manual circuit breaker closing command The recloser is blocked for the duration of the time If a fault occurs during this time no reclosing steps are initiated and the circuit breaker remains permanently open Dead Time Step n dead time is launched by breaking device tripping command given by the recloser during step n The breaking device remains open throug
44. TC received via the communication link 2 actual processing of the control and monitoring function 3 utilization of the processing results m activation of output relays to control a device m information sent to the facility manager D by message and or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software D by remote indication TS via the communication link D by real time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram Logic Inputs and Outputs The number of Sepam inputs outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used The five outputs included in the Sepam Series 80 base unit may be extended by adding one two or three MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays each After the number of MES120 modules needed for an application is set the logic inputs are assigned to functions The functions are chosen from a list that covers the whole range of possible uses The functions are adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation A default input output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions This page gives the meaning ofthe symbols used in the block diagrams illustrating the different control and monitoring functions in this chapter Logic Functions OR x H s z
45. UIT RI IAC amp Electric IEC Curves Curve Type Coefficient Values k a B Standard inverse A 0 14 0 02 2 97 Very inverse B 13 5 1 1 50 Long time inverse B 120 1 13 33 Extremely inverse C 80 2 0 808 Ultra inverse 315 2 2 5 1 RI curve Equation Lili i x i p 1 3 1706 0 339 0 236 1 ls IEEE Curves Curve Type Coefficient Values A B p B Moderately inverse 0 010 0 023 0 02 0 241 Very inverse 3 922 0 098 2 0 138 Extremely inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 0 081 IAC Curves Curve Type Coefficient Values A B c D E B Inverse 0 208 0 863 0 800 0 418 0 195 0 297 Very inverse 0 090 0 795 0 100 1 288 7 958 0 165 Extremely inverse 0 004 0 638 0 620 1 787 0 246 0 092 Voltage IDMT Tripping Curves Equation for ANSI 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement T ty V pn CE Voltage Frequency Ratio IDMT Tripping Curves CurveType p A 0 5 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 173 174 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions ts IEC curve VIT DE51629 T 1 5 sec 10 IMs Example gt Is delayed output I 1 gt Is pick up signal j I 1 I DE51630 pi Li il PURE x E tripping l l l l l SE GE l l time delay counter i 1 l 1 L value of internal 1 l 1 MX 1 T1 I Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold DE
46. VT supervision 60 60FL D LI Li LI D D Trip circuit supervision 74 n n n n n n n a n n n n n n n n Auxiliary power supply monitoring D D D D D B D D D D D D Cumulative breaking current D D D Number of operations operating time charging time O n n n n n n n D n n n n n n n number of racking out operations 2 Measurement readout 5 Remote indication and time tagging of events 5 Remote control commands Remote protection setting Transfer of disturbance recording data m standard n options 2 According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input output modules 3 With optional MET1482 temperature input modules 4 With optional MCS025 sync check module 5 With ACE9492 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO communication interface nang er fe Ter ep qe booon nau Dboonon HEHEH Donon bonon nuu ef e Ma lea nano non boonono Dooon ngu nonu Note Modbus IEC60870 5 103 or DNP3 are available using ACE9492 ACE 959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved gend 63230 216 230B1 7 ectric Introduction Minimum weight base unit without MES120 Technical Characteristics Base Unit with Advanced UMI 5 29 Ib 2 4 kg Base Unit with Mimic Based UMI 6 61 Ib 3 0 kg Maximum weight base unit with 3 MES120 8 82 Ib 4 0 kg 10 1 Ib 4 6 kg
47. es sorties Nom Affectation 1102 1101 V MIMIC OPENCB V MIMIC CLOSECB V MIMIC REMOTE V MIMIC IN 1 OK Annuler SFT2841 example of the logic input output assignment of a symbol with two outputs Liste d tats Liste d entr es sorties Nom Aper u Nom Affectation 2 entr e n 1 actif 1101 actif sortie n 1 actif V_MIMIC_CLOSECB inactif d inhibition actif V MIMIC IN 1 inhibition inactif V MIMIC REMOTE Modifier Annuler SFT2841 example of the logic input output assignment of a symbol with one output 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Block Diagram The block diagrams below present the functions ensured by the controlled symbols based on two examples Voluntary user control commands selection of the device to be controlled in the mimic diagram and action on a control key are represented in the block diagrams by the following icons open command D close command Local Control using Symbols with Two Outputs 81102 a breaker open 1101 breaker closed V MIMIC REMOTE el H Input 1 Input 2 Open Close open closed Output 1 Se WEE V_MIMIC_OPENCB 1 T 300ms i d Close 0 T Output 2 V MIMIC IN 1 inhibit m Lese au mic CLOSECE r D T 300ms Local Control using a Symbol with One Output DE51592 V_MIMIC_REMOTE V_MIMIC_IN_1 Schneider amp Electric
48. m by logic equation or by Logipam to take into SS account all specific generator installation circuit breaker Gpon characteristics 12 Y de excitation m by delayed protection functions 21B a V_DE EXCIT_ORD The protection functions concerned are those that Se i detect internal faults in generators or transformers of generator transformer units They are divided into 2 320 J groups protection functions that contribute to de 40 Y excitation regardless of the circuit breaker position and 51V Y those whose contribution is dependent on the circuit 64REF Y breaker position 67 i W protection functions unrelated to circuit breaker 67N f position 12 21B 24 27TN 32Q 40 51V 59 64REF 67 67N 81L 87M 87T 81L i m protection functions dependent on circuit breaker 81R Y position 50 51 50N 51N 59N The delayed 87M Y unlatched outputs of these protection units 87T Y trigger de excitation only if the circuit breaker is open Participation in the function is to be set individually in the protection function setting tabs of the SFT2841 Characteristics software for each protection unit that can take part in de excitation Settings At the same time the function gives a tripping Activity command via switchgear control to disconnect the generator from the power network It must be associated with a logic output in the control matrix to initiate the de excitation command Setting range On Off Selection of Protection Functions Activating
49. 0 0550 0 0513 0 0398 0 0320 0 0264 0 0222 0 0189 0 0164 0 0143 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0082 0 0075 120 0 0862 0 0797 0 0740 0 0690 0 0535 0 0429 0 0353 0 0297 0 0253 0 0219 0 0191 0 0169 0 0150 0 0134 0 0121 0 0110 0 0100 125 0 1089 0 1007 0 0934 0 0870 0 0673 0 0540 0 0444 0 0372 0 0317 0 0274 0 0240 0 0211 0 0188 0 0168 0 0151 0 0137 0 0125 130 0 1322 0 1221 0 1132 0 1054 0 0813 0 0651 0 0535 0 0449 0 0382 0 0330 0 0288 0 0254 0 0226 0 0202 0 0182 0 0165 0 0150 135 0 1560 0 1440 0 1334 0 1241 0 0956 0 0764 0 0627 0 0525 0 0447 0 0386 0 0337 0 0297 0 0264 0 0236 0 0213 0 0192 0 0175 140 0 1805 0 1664 0 1540 0 1431 0 1100 0 0878 0 0720 0 0603 0 0513 0 0443 0 0386 0 0340 0 0302 0 0270 0 0243 0 0220 0 0200 145 0 2055 0 1892 0 1750 0 1625 0 1246 0 0993 0 0813 0 0681 0 0579 0 0499 0 0435 0 0384 0 0341 0 0305 0 0274 0 0248 0 0226 150 0 2312 0 2127 0 1965 0 1823 0 1395 0 1110 0 0908 0 0759 0 0645 0 0556 0 0485 0 0427 0 0379 0 0339 0 0305 0 0276 0 0251 155 0 2575 0 2366 0 2185 0 2025 0 1546 0 1228 0 1004 0 0838 0 0712 0 0614 0 0535 0 0471 0 0418 0 0374 0 0336 0 0304 0 0277 160 0 2846 0 2612 0 2409 0 2231 0 1699 0 1347 0 1100 0 0918 0 0780 0 0671 0 0585 0 0515 0 0457 0 0408 0 0367 0 0332 0 0302 165 0 3124 0 2864 0 2639 0 2442 0 1855 0 1468 0 1197 0 0999 0 0847 0 0729 0 0635 0 0559 0 0496 0 0443 0 0398 0 0360 0 0328 170 0 3410 0 3122 0 2874 0 2657 0 2012 0 1591 0 1296 0 1080 0 0916 0 0788 0 0686 0 0603 0 0535 0 0478 0 0430 0 0389 0 0353 175 0 3705 0 3388 0 3115 0 28
50. 1 15 0 7753 0 7242 0 6785 0 6372 0 5066 0 4141 0 3456 0 2933 0 2523 0 2195 0 1929 0 1709 0 1525 0 1370 1 20 0 5378 0 5013 0 4688 0 4396 0 3478 0 2834 0 2360 0 1999 0 1717 0 1493 0 1310 0 1160 0 1035 0 0929 1 25 0 3611 0 3358 0 3134 0 2933 0 2309 0 1874 0 1557 0 1316 0 1129 0 0981 0 0860 0 0761 0 0678 0 0609 Is 1 4 Ib Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 ltrip IBseq 1 05 21 4400 15 8850 12 8490 10 8300 9 3578 8 2251 7 3214 6 5815 5 9634 5 4391 4 9887 4 5976 4 2550 3 9525 3 6837 1 10 9 9827 7 4306 6 0317 5 0988 4 4171 3 8914 3 4710 3 1261 2 8375 2 5922 2 3811 2 1975 2 0364 1 8939 1 15 6 1214 4 5762 3 7270 3 1593 2 7435 2 4222 2 1647 1 9531 1 7757 1 6246 1 4944 1 3810 1 2813 1 20 4 1525 3 1170 2 5464 2 1642 1 8836 1 6664 1 4920 1 3483 1 2278 1 1249 1 0361 0 9587 1 25 2 9310 2 2085 1 8095 1 5416 1 3446 1 1918 1 0689 0 9676 0 8823 0 8095 0 7466 1 30 2 0665 1 5627 1 2839 1 0964 0 9582 0 8508 0 7643 0 6929 0 6327 0 5813 1 35 1 3673 1 0375 0 8546 0 7314 0 6404 0 5696 0 5125 0 4653 0 4254 Is 1 4 Ib Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 3 4434 3 2275 3 0325 2 8557 2 2894 1 8816 1 5768 1 3422 1 1573 1 0089 0 8877 0 7874 0 7034 0 6323 1 10 1 7672 1 6537 1 5516 1 4593 1 1654 0 9552 0 7989 0 6791 0 5849 0 5094 0 4479 0 3970 0 3545 0 3186 1 15 1 1931 1 1145 1 0440 0 9805 0 7796 0 6372 0 5318 0 4513 0 3882 0 3378 0 2968 0 2629 0 2346 0 2107 1 20 0 8906
51. 1757 0 1540 0 1362 0 1213 0 1088 0 0982 0 0891 0 0812 170 0 6866 0 6366 0 5925 0 5534 0 4327 0 3498 0 2897 0 2444 0 2094 0 1815 0 1591 0 1406 0 1253 0 1123 0 1013 0 0919 0 0838 175 0 7161 0 6631 0 6166 0 5754 0 4487 0 3621 0 2996 0 2526 0 2162 0 1874 0 1641 0 1451 0 1292 0 1158 0 1045 0 0947 0 0863 180 0 7464 0 6904 0 6413 0 5978 0 4651 0 3747 0 3096 0 2608 0 2231 0 1933 0 1693 0 1495 0 1331 0 1193 0 1076 0 0976 0 0889 185 0 7777 0 7184 0 6665 0 6208 0 4816 0 3874 0 3197 0 2691 0 2301 0 1993 0 1744 0 1540 0 1371 0 1229 0 1108 0 1004 0 0915 190 0 8100 0 7472 0 6925 0 6444 0 4985 0 4003 0 3300 0 2775 0 2371 0 2052 0 1796 0 1585 0 1411 0 1264 0 1140 0 1033 0 0941 195 0 8434 0 7769 0 7191 0 6685 0 5157 0 4133 0 3403 0 2860 0 2442 0 2113 0 1847 0 1631 0 1451 0 1300 0 1171 0 1062 0 0967 200 0 8780 0 8075 0 7465 0 6931 0 5331 0 4265 0 3508 0 2945 0 2513 0 2173 0 1900 0 1676 0 1491 0 1335 0 1203 0 1090 0 0993 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 115 amp Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Cold Curves for Es0 0 VIB 4 80 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 50 0 0219 0 0202 0 0167 0 0140 0 0119 0 0103 0 0089 0 0078 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0050 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 55 0 0242 0 0222 0 0183 0 0154 0 0131 0 0113 0 0098 0 0086 0 0076 0 0068 0 0061 0 0055 0 0035 0 0024 0 0018 0 0014 60 0
52. 200 CSH 20 A Considers INr 20 A 20 A Input Rating Core Bal CT DA Standard 1A or 5A DT 0 1 to 15 INr 1 A 5 ACT Zero 1ACT Primary Rated CT DMT 0 1 to Inr Sequence CT c CSH or 5 ACT Current 1 A to 6 25 Gi CSH 30 Aux CT Glas CSH KA INr IN n 2 Turns as interface Pi P1 S2 nl Sie 5A Standard 5A or 1A DT 0 1 to 15Inr 5 1ACTZer II A Series 80 5 ACT Primary Rated Sensitive CT DMT 0 1 to Inr Sequence CT R E P2 St 0508 CSH or 1A Current 1 A to 6 25 CSH 30 Aux CT E CT CSH KA INr IN 10 as interface Shield be sensitivity X10 6A External Sum of DT 0 1 to 15 INr CSH 30 Zero ABC ACT Set Sepam Series Phase CT DMT 0 1 to Inr Sequence CT as Lr CSH or 5A 80 For INr IN Secondaries 1 A Interface 4 CT CSH Primary Rated or 5 A Si Current 1 A to 6 25 4 kA 6A External Sum of DT 0 1 to 15 Inr CSH 30 Zero NES e Le 1 ACT CSH INr IN 10 Ipri 1 A to Sensitive Phase CT IDMT 0 1 to Inr Sequence CT as sacr H Ei Balana or 5 ACT 6 25 kA Secondaries 1 A Interface 7 NE wan 4 BS CSH or 5 A Seres 80 Sensitivity X10 5 ACT 4 Turns 1 ACT 2 Turns 15 18 7A Standard 1 ACT or DT 0 1 to 15Inr 1 A 5 A Zero 5 ACT ACE Inr kx N 5ACT IDMT 0 1 to Inr Sequence CT 1ACT ACE N CT turns 00578 ACE 990 Core bal lt K lt 26316 n turns Ea 51 m SHE eden jo am Dep See alternate CSH30 secondary connection in the Sepam Series 80 nstallation
53. 300 Accuracy 1 42 Resolution 1 Initial Heat Rise Set Point EsO Setting range 0 to 100 Accuracy 1 42 Resolution 1 Heat Rise Time Constant T1 Setting range 1 min to 600 min Resolution 1 min Cooling Time Constant T2 Setting range 5 min to 600 min Resolution 1 min Switching Set Point for Thermal Mode 2 Setting range 25 to 800 of IB Accuracy 1 45 Resolution 1 Base Current IB Mode 2 Setting range 0 2 to 2 6 IN or N Accuracy 1 45 Resolution 1A Characteristic Times 1 Operation time accuracy 2 or 1 s 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 8 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 111 amp Electric MT10860 Protection Functions Example 1 Motor The following data are available m time constants for on operation T1 and off operation T2 n T1 25min n T2 70 min m maximum steady state current D Imax IB 1 05 Setting the Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax IB 110 Nota If the motor draws a current of 1 05 IB continuously the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will reach 110 Setting Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 I IB 0 95 Knegative 4 5 usual value The other thermal overload parameters do not need to be set They are not considered by default Example 2 Motor The following data are available m motor thermal withstand in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constan
54. 35 ms Overshoot time lt 50msat2ls Reset time lt 50 ms at 2 Is for T1 0 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P50 51_x_101 Protection blocking P50 51_x_113 L L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P50 51 x 1 Delayed output P50 51_x_3 L L D Drop out P50 51_x_4 Phase a fault P50 51_x_7 L Phase b fault P50 51 x 8 Phase c fault P50 51_x_9 Li Li Protection blocked P50 51 x 16 x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode m Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 m EEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types Schneider D Electric 124 63230 216 230B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Protection against ground faults 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Description Ground fault protection based on mea
55. 49 RMS Settings Inputs Measurement Origin Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Setting range la Ib Ic l a l b l c Protection reset P49RMS_1 101 m D Considering the Negative Sequence Component K Protection blocking P49RMS 1 113 m Setting range 0 2 25 4 59 Outputs Considering Ambient Temperature Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Setting range Yes no Delayed output P49RMS 1 3 L D Using the Learned Cooling Time Constant T2 Alarm P49RMS 1 10 m Setting range Yes no Block closing P49RMS 1 11 a Maximum equipment temperature Tmax according to Protection blocked P49RMS 1 16 m insulation class Hot state P49RMS_1_18 Li Setting range 140 F to 392 F or 60 C to 200 C Block thermal overload P49RMS_1_32 L Resolution 1 F or 1 C Thermal Mode 1 Alarm Set Point Es1 Setting range 0 to 300 Accuracy 1 42 Resolution 1 Tripping Set Point Es2 Setting range 0 to 300 Accuracy 1 42 Resolution 1 Initial Heat Rise Set Point EsO Setting range 0 to 100 Accuracy 1 42 Resolution 1 Heat Rise Time Constant T1 Setting range 1 min to 600 min Resolution 1 min Cooling Time Constant T2 Setting range 5 min to 600 min Resolution 1 min Thermal Mode 2 Using Thermal Mode 2 Setting range Yes no Alarm Set Point Es1 Setting range 0 to 300 Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Tripping Set Point Es2 Setting range 0 to
56. 50V 51V Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT IEC SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Customized DT Is set point 0 5 to 24 IN Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 to 2 4 IN IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 20 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 300 s Measurement origin Main channels I or additional channels OU ANSI 51C Capacitor Bank Unbalance Is set point 0 05 A to 2 IN Definite time 0 1 to 300 s ANSI 59 Overvoltage L L or L N Set point and time delay 50 to 150 of Vip 0 05 to 300 s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Tripping curve Definite time IDMT Set point 2 to 80 of Vip Definite time 0 05 to 300 s 2 to 10 of Vip IDMT 0 1 to 100 s Measurement origin Main channels V additional channels V or neutral point voltage Vint ANSI 64REF Restricted Ground Fault Differential Isr set point 0 05 to 0 8 IB IB gt 20 A 0 1 to 0 8 IB IB lt 20 A Main channels I Ir or additional channels I lr Measurement origin ANSI 66 Starts per Hour Total number of starts 1 to 60 Period 1to6h Number of consecutive starts 1 to 60 IT time delay stop start b to 90 min 1
57. 55 0 6940 0 6302 0 4545 0 3491 0 2790 0 2295 0 1928 0 1646 0 1425 0 1247 0 1102 0 0982 0 0881 0 0795 0 0721 0 0657 1 60 0 8134 0 7340 0 5213 0 3971 0 3159 0 2589 0 2169 0 1849 0 1599 0 1398 0 1234 0 1098 0 0984 0 0888 0 0805 0 0734 1 65 0 9536 0 8537 0 5952 0 4492 0 3553 0 2901 0 2425 0 2063 0 1781 0 1555 0 1372 0 1220 0 1093 0 0985 0 0893 0 0814 1 70 1 1221 0 9943 0 6776 0 5059 0 3977 0 3234 0 2695 0 2288 0 1972 0 1720 0 1516 0 1347 0 1206 0 1086 0 0984 0 0897 Iph IB 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 la lB 1 10 0 0088 0 0072 0 0060 0 0051 0 0044 0 0038 0 0033 0 0030 0 0026 0 0024 0 0021 0 0014 0 0009 0 0007 0 0005 1 15 0 0135 0 0111 0 0093 0 0078 0 0067 0 0059 0 0051 0 0045 0 0040 0 0036 0 0033 0 0021 0 0014 0 0011 0 0008 1 20 0 0185 0 0152 0 0127 0 0107 0 0092 0 0080 0 0070 0 0062 0 0055 0 0049 0 0045 0 0028 0 0020 0 0014 0 0011 1 25 0 0237 0 0194 0 0162 0 0137 0 0118 0 0102 0 0090 0 0079 0 0071 0 0063 0 0057 0 0036 0 0025 0 0018 0 0014 1 30 0 0292 0 0239 0 0199 0 0169 0 0145 0 0126 0 0110 0 0097 0 0087 0 0078 0 0070 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0017 1 35 0 0349 0 0285 0 0238 0 0201 0 0173 0 0150 0 0131 0 0116 0 0103 0 0093 0 0083 0 0053 0 0037 0 0027 0 0021 1 40 0 0408 0 0334 0 0278 0 0235 0 0202 0 0175 0 0154 0 0136 0 0121 0 0108 0 0097 0 0062 0 0043 0 0031 0 0024 1 45 0 0470 0 0384 0 0320 0 0271 0 0232 0 0202 0 0177 0 0156 0 0139 0 0124 0 0112 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 1 50 0 0535 0 0437 0 03
58. 799 12 5 0 910 0 783 0 638 0 572 0 985 0 918 0 896 0 746 0 938 0 907 0 761 13 0 0 895 0 750 0 589 0 518 0 983 0 905 0 882 0 712 0 929 0 893 0 727 13 5 0 882 0 720 0 546 0 471 0 981 0 893 0 870 0 682 0 920 0 880 0 695 14 0 0 870 0 692 0 508 0 430 0 979 0 882 0 858 0 655 0 912 0 868 0 667 14 5 0 858 0 667 0 473 0 394 0 977 0 871 0 849 0 631 0 905 0 857 0 641 15 0 0 847 0 643 0 442 0 362 0 976 0 861 0 840 0 609 0 898 0 846 0 616 15 5 0 836 0 621 0 414 0 334 0 974 0 852 0 831 0 589 0 891 0 837 0 594 16 0 0 827 0 600 0 388 0 308 0 973 0 843 0 824 0 571 0 885 0 828 0 573 16 5 0 817 0 581 0 365 0 285 0 971 0 834 0 817 0 555 0 879 0 819 0 554 17 0 0 808 0 563 0 344 0 265 0 970 0 826 0 811 0 540 0 874 0 811 0 536 17 5 0 800 0 545 0 324 0 246 0 969 0 819 0 806 0 527 0 869 0 804 0 519 18 0 0 792 0 529 0 307 0 229 0 968 0 812 0 801 0 514 0 864 0 797 0 504 18 5 0 784 0 514 0 290 0 214 0 967 0 805 0 796 0 503 0 860 0 790 0 489 19 0 0 777 0 500 0 275 0 200 0 966 0 798 0 792 0 492 0 855 0 784 0 475 19 5 0 770 0 486 0 261 0 188 0 965 0 792 0 788 0 482 0 851 0 778 0 463 20 0 0 763 0 474 0 248 0 176 0 964 0 786 0 784 0 473 0 848 0 772 0 450 1 Values suitable only for IEC B and C curves 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved eed 63230 216 230B1 177 ectric DE50869 DE50869b Protection Functions Standard Inverse Time SIT Curve SIT SIT B 1000 OPERATE TIME S o A o o o o I Is RI Curve 100 OPERATE TI
59. 81L Underfrequency Set point and time delay 40 to 50 Hz or 50 t0 60 Hz 0 1 to 300s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI 81R Rate of Change of Frequency 0 1 to 10 Hz s 0 15 to 300s ANSI 87M Machine Differential Ids set point 0 05 to 0 5 IN IN 2 20 A 0 1 to 0 5 IN IN lt 20 A ANSI 87T Transformer Differential High set point Percentage Based Curve Ids set point 3 to 18 IN1 30 to 100 IN1 Slope Id It 15 to 50 Slope Id It2 Without 50 to 100 Slope change point 1to 18 IN1 Restraint on Energization Isinr set point 1 to 10 Delay 0 to 300 s Restraint on CT Loss Activity On Off Harmonic Restraints Conventional Self Adaptive Selection of restraint Conventional Self adaptive High set point On On Off Harmonic 2 percentage set point Off 5 to 40 Harmonic 2 restraint Phase specific Global Harmonic 5 percentage set point Off 5 to 40 Harmonic 5 restraint Phase specific Global 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 65 Protection Functions Detecting excessive machine speeds to protect generators and processes 66 63230 216 230B1 Overspeed ANSI Code 12 Description This function detects machine overspeed to identify synchronous generator racing due to loss of synchronism or process monitoring Rotation speed is calculated by measuring the time between
60. 81L 81H 27 59 78PS m genset shutdown for prime mover faults and internal faults D 50 51 87M 59N 40 W de excitation for internal faults o 50 51 87M 59N 40 Shutdown is total and not sequential The genset shutdown and de excitation time delays are zero Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE51498 DE51622 Control and Monitoring Functions Automatic transfer MAIN MAIN 2 B80 Open Close Automatic transfer MAIN TIE MAIN with sync check managed by Sepam Series 80 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Automatic Transfer Description The automatic transfer function is used to transfer bus supply from one source to another The function reduces bus supply interruptions thereby increasing the service continuity of the network supplied by the bus Automatic transfer performs m automatic transfer with interruption if there is a loss of voltage or a fault upstream m manual transfer and return to normal operation without interruption with or without sync check m control of the tie circuit breaker optional m selection of the normal operating mode m the necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence only one circuit breaker out of 2 or 2 out of 3 are closed
61. 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 0 3829 0 3548 0 3300 0 3079 0 2396 0 1928 0 1590 0 1337 0 1142 0 0988 0 0864 0 0762 0 0678 0 0607 1 10 0 3673 0 3398 0 3155 0 2940 0 2278 0 1828 0 1505 0 1263 0 1078 0 0931 0 0814 0 0718 0 0638 0 0571 1 15 0 3490 0 3222 0 2986 0 2778 0 2143 0 1714 0 1408 0 1180 0 1005 0 0868 0 0758 0 0668 0 0593 0 0531 1 20 0 3269 0 3011 0 2786 0 2587 0 1985 0 1582 0 1296 0 1085 0 0923 0 0796 0 0694 0 0611 0 0543 0 0486 1 25 0 2997 0 2753 0 2541 0 2355 0 1796 0 1426 0 1165 0 0973 0 0827 0 0712 0 0621 0 0546 0 0485 0 0433 1 30 0 2643 0 2420 0 2228 0 2060 0 1561 0 1235 0 1006 0 0838 0 0711 0 0612 0 0533 0 0468 0 0415 0 0371 1 35 0 2135 0 1948 0 1788 0 1649 0 1240 0 0976 0 0793 0 0659 0 0558 0 0480 0 0417 0 0367 0 0325 0 0290 106 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Curves for Initial Heat Rise 100 Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS Is 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 ltrip IBseq 1 05 19 2620 11 0020 7 6288 5 7866 4 6259 3 8286 3 2480 2 8069 2 4611 2 1831 1 9550 1 7648 1 6039 1 4663 1 3473 1 10 14 5120 8 9388 6 4398 5 0007 4 0622 3 4016 2 9118 2 5344 2 2351 1 9923 1 7915 1 6230 1 4797 1 3565 1 15 11 6100 7 4893 5 5392 4 3766 3 5996 3 0427 2 6238 2 2975 2 0364 1 8228 1 6451 1 4951
62. CTs 0 01 IN x Isr IN min 0 1 A With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 1to2A 20 A rating 0 2t020A CT 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt INr min 0 1 A Accuracy 1 5 or 0 004 InO Resolution 0 1 or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Isr 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 005 INr Isr x 100 Setting range definite time Inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS 2 Accuracy 1 definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution Advanced Settings Tripping Direction 10 ms or 1 digit Setting range Bus line Vsr Set Point Setting range 2 to 80 Vu p Accuracy 1 5 or 0 005 Vup Resolution 196 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 Timer Hold T1 Setting range definite time or gt 1 0 006 Vitp Vsr x 100 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT D 0 5 to 20s Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 Isr typically 25 ms Inst lt 55 ms at 2 Isr confirmed instantaneous typically 35 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms at 2 Isr Reset time lt 50 ms at 2 Isr for T1 0 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P67N_x_101 m L Protection blocking P67N x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Insta
63. D Li Phase difference P25 1 49 D D Frequency difference P25_1_50 D Li Voltage difference P25 1 51 D L No Vuisynci P25 1 52 D No Vitsync2 P25_1_53 D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Protection against phase to neutral or phase to phase undervoltages Description Undervoltage monitoring protects motors against the negative effects of low system voltages It also detects abnormally low network voltage in order to trigger automatic load shedding or source transfer m the protection function is single phase and operates with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage it includes a definite DT or IDMT time delay T in phase to neutral operation see tripping curve equation on page 173 it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Operation with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage depends on the connection selected for the voltage inputs Connection Conditions Type of connection Van Vbn Ven Vab Vbc Vab Vbc Vr Rene bes L L or L N ANSI Code 2 Block Diagram DE51374 Vab or Van VO Vbc or Vbn VO Vi Vca or Vcn 7 lt Vu or Vin Phase to neutral operation YES YES NO Characteristics Phase to phase operation YES NES YES Type of connection Vab 1 Va Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Phase to neut
64. DE50662 Protection Functions T s 10 000 1 000 100 10 1 S G as PU 1 11 12 13 14 15 1 61 7 1 81 9 2 Voltage frequency ratio Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT tripping curves ly 2 1 63230 216 230B1 70 Overexcitation V Hz ANSI Code 24 Characteristics Settings VT Configuration Setting range Tripping Curve Setting range Delta Wye Definite time IDMT type A type B type C Gs Set Point Setting range 1 08 to 2 0 pu Accuracy 1 42 Resolution 0 01 pu 2 Drop out pick up ratio 98 1 Time Delay T Operation Time at 2 pu Definite time Setting range 0 1 to 20000 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Setting range 0 1to 1250s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times 1 Operation time pick up 40 ms from 0 9 Gs to 1 1 Gs at fn Overshoot time 40 ms from 0 9 Gs to 1 1 Gs at fn Reset time 50 ms from 1 1 Gs to 0 9 Gs at fn Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P24 x 101 m Protection blocking P24 x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P24 x 1 L L Delayed output P24x3 m D D Protection blocked P24 x 16 m x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 1 pu represents 1 x Gn Example 1 Synchronous Generator
65. EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E EI F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Customized DT Isr set point 0 1 to 15 INr min 0 1 A Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 01 to 1 INr min 0 1 A IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Isr Vsr set point 2 to 80 of Vip Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5sto20s Measurement origin Ir input l r input or sum of phase currents IrX ANSI 67N 67NC Type 3 Directional Ground Fault According to Ir Vector Magnitude Directionalized on a Tripping Sector Tripping sector start angle 0 to 359 Tripping sector end angle 0 to 359 Isr set point CSH zero sequence CT 2A rating 0 1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst 0 05 to 300 s 1ACT 0 005 to 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT ACE990 range 1 0 01 to 15 Inr min 0 1 A Vsr set point Calculated Vr sum of 3 voltages 2 to 80 of Vip Measured Vr external VT 0 6 to 80 of Vip Measurement origin Ir input or l r input 1 Tripping from 1 2 Is 64 63230 216 230B1 gr ne 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Setting Ranges ANSI 78PS Pole Slip Time delay of the equal area criterion 0 1 to 300 s Maximum number of power swings 1 to 30 Time between two power swings ANSI 81H Overfrequency 1to 300s Set point and time delay 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz 0 1 to 300s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI
66. Functions Phase to phase short circuit protection with selective tripping according to fault current direction Description This function comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction line or bus is activated for at least one of the three phases or two of the three depending on the settings m the protection function is 3 phase and has a definite or IDMT time delay m each of the two units has two groups of settings Switching to setting group A or B can be carried out by a logic input or remote control command depending on the settings m the customized curve defined point by point may be used with this protection function m an adjustable timer hold definite time or IDMT can be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults m the alarm linked to the protection function indicates the faulty phase or phases Tripping Direction Current flow direction is determined by measuring the phase in relation to a polarization value Itis qualified as either bus or line direction as shown below bus direction Y line direction DE51557 NO Tripping can be set to occur in either zone The zone in which tripping does not occur is used for indication Polarization Value The polarization value is the phase to phase value in quadrature with the current for cos0 1 90 connection angl
67. IB cont 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 X cont 2 14 210 2 01 194 1 86 1 80 1 74 1 68 1 627 1 577 1 53 1 485 1 444 1 404 1 367 1 332 12 IB cont 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 2500 X cont 1 298 1 267 1 236 1 18 1 167 1 154 1 13 1 105 1 082 1 06 1 04 1 02 1 90 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Phase unbalance protection 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50779 Schneider Gf Electric Negative Sequence Overvoltage ANSI Code 47 Description This function provides protection against phase unbalance resulting from phase inversion unbalanced supply or distant fault Overvoltage is detected by measuring negative sequence voltage V2 It does not operate when Sepam uses only a single phase voltage It includes a definite time delay T Block Diagram Vab To V2 gt Vs2 delayed output Vbc pick up signal Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Vs2 Set Point Setting range Main channels Vit Additional channels Vu 1 to 50 of Viu Np Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 VLLNp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 or gt 1 0 006 ViLNp Vs2 x 100 Time Delay T Setting range 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 Vs2
68. Ix Thermostat trip Ix Ix Thermistor trip Ix Restart inhibit 49RMS Max number of restarts reached 66 Trip circuit fault V_TCS Equations or Logipam V_INHIBCLOSE Internal close inhibit S V_CLOSE_INHIBITED Close inhibit Ix Circuit breaker charged end of charging position Ix SF6 pressure fault Ix 9 T or AN close V_CLOSE_EN Internal a close order V_CLOSED Close by remote control TC2 Remote control inhibit Close order Ix Close by mimic based UMI V_MIMIC_CLOSECB Breaker closed 1101 Sync Close by Check recloser 79 restart V RESTARTING equations or Logipam V CLOSECB r Closing without synchro check External close order 1 Ix V CLOSE NOCTRL External close order 2 Ix Automatic close order Ix 190 63230 216 230B1 Spelar 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Switchgear Control Functions ANSI Code 94 69 Close Enable by the Sync Check Function Operation The close request made locally or remotely is maintained by Sepam during the close request delay and triggers the appearance of a SYNC IN PROCESS message It is deactivated when a tripping command or circuit breaker blocking command is received and triggers the STOP SYNC message The closing command is given if the close enable is received before the close request delay runs out When this is the case the message SYNC OK is displayed
69. Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switchgear Diagnosis Auxiliary Power Supply Monitoring Operation The auxiliary power supply is an important factor in cubicle operation This function monitors the supply by measuring the Sepam power supply voltage and comparing the measured value to low and high thresholds If the value is outside these limits an alarm is generated The related information is available in the matrix and in Logipam Block Diagram DE10418 Sepam power supply Vaux Readout high threshold Vaux gt high threshold alarm TS 218 V_VAUX_HIGH low threshold Vaux gt low threshold 9 alarm TS 217 V VAUX LOW The measurements can be accessed one of the following m the Sepam display via the amp icon m a PC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Measured Auxiliary Voltage Vaux Low Threshold Alarm High Threshold Alarm Measurement Range 20 t0 275 VDC Units V Resolution 0 1 V 1 V on display Accuracy 7 Refresh Interval Rated Auxiliary Voltage 1 second typical Setting 24 to 250 V DC Resolution 1V Low Threshold Setting 60 to 95 of rated V minimum 20 V Resolution 1V Accuracy 7 High Threshold Setting 105 to 150 of rated V maximum 275 V Resolution 1V Accuracy 7 Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Auxi
70. Overcurrent unit 1 delayed unit 2 delayed Ground Fault unit 1 delayed unit 2 delayed Directional Ground Fault unit 1 delayed Zone sequence interlocking trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP blocking rec logic input Overcurrent unit 3 delayed unit 4 delayed unit 5 delayed unit 6 delayed unit 7 delayed unit 8 delayed Ground Fault unit 3 delayed unit 4 delayed unit 5 delayed unit 6 delayed unit 7 delayed unit 8 delayed Directional Ground Fault unit 2 delayed 2 According to application 2007 Schneider Electr Schneider amp Electric ic All Rights Reserved 63230 216 230B1 213 DE51620 Control and Monitoring Functions Blocking Overcurrent send 1 unit 1 pi unit 2 pi Ground Fault unit 1 pi unit 2 pi Directional Ground Fault unit 1 pickup 0 8 Is icku kup ickup ickup Zone Selective Interlocking M81 M87 M88 and C86 Applications Threshold Assignment Type of Unit Number Protection Time Based Send Logic Reception Logic Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2 50 51 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 50N 51N 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 B 67N 2 1 Characteristics Settings Activity Setting range On Off Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Zone selective Interlocking trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP m0 Blocking send 1 V LOGDSC BL1 D D Zone selective Interlocking on V_LOGDSC_ON 1 Only if switchgear control is not in service
71. Pa Pb s Pam bla la la f us la gy sine 8 SE d ae 1 lc l bm ie 7 N c fom Poot 31N2 lc e Jsin2 Ib l b PeP l a Pa P Dem Lez ta Pom e J31N2 31N2 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 165 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE52028 DE52031 S DES2028 c DES2037 la l c l a A La V Pb l a Pb Ic Ib l a lc fam Pb Pa b c Ic Ib lb IN2 3IN IN2 3IN2 gt Pop 3 PROP am Pe Pb ien Poche a spe a OI la 5 lb amp Vain2 B B B B Pap gt Ge P l bm a le 9 A om Lez Pa Ic Ib J3In2 Jain lb Bee Ic Ib Ic Pa Pb Gem b la Cem a lb Po Paie 8 om P o See Pb Po IN2 SIN IN2 3IN2 la lc B la 3 l a Ib a a a y a Be PaP P PaaPha Ic Ib lb la fc la rb l Ic Lm e a b Po IN2 3IN2 Ib IN2 3IN2 Pa PasPb cm Da Pa Pb Pc IN2 SIN e IN2 3IN2 Pom La_la lb lce 10 IN 3IN2 bm _Pa Parlb Pc IN2 3IN2 Pb Paso IN 3IN2 Cem Pb Pa Pb Pc IN2 3IN2 NET Pap 8 3 Pam Lola al e Pam Pacts la 5 Ic 8 OI las gf la Vain2 B B 4 B Pap 3 BL E R wi i Wen B ech SC 3IN2 3IN2 Ic Ib l a Ic Ib r 3 23 3 3 c 5 b fom Pb Pe Pom Pe ET aus 166 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric Test Mode Two operating modes facilitate maintenance and startup operations m normal mode the protection function controls the tripping and indication outputs based on the se
72. Protection blocked P46_x_16 D D amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions DE50715 DE50716 It curve Schneider curve 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 Setting Example for L t curves A generator can handle a certain level of negative sequence current on a continuous basis The continuous level Is indicated by the manufacturer is generally between 5 and 10 of the base current IB Typical values are Type of Generator I2 permissible Ib Salient poles with amortisseur windings 10 without amortisseur windings 5 Cylindrical rotors Indirectly cooled 10 Sn lt 960 MVA 8 960 MVA Sn 1200 MVA 6 1200 MVA Sn 5 Reference IEEE C37 102 1987 When this current level is exceeded the generator can handle a negative sequence current I2 for a time td corresponding to the following equation K TIED ei IB The K value is an adjustable constant that depends on the type of generator generally between 1 and 40 Typical values of K are Type of Generator K Salient poles 40 Synchronous condenser 30 Cylindrical rotors Indirectly cooled 20 Sn lt 800 MVA 10 800 MVA lt Sn lt 1600 MVA 10 0 00625 MVA 800 Reference IEEE C37 102 1987 Schneider IDMT Curve For I2 gt Is the time delay depends on the value of I2 IB IB base current
73. SEPAM SERIES 80 prem goce uU ess SEH FE Le x H 1 11 EXT OTHER ul g Min maf y mwj y iL by AD GND i101 nm iTS Sa B is CONT CLOSE Hm ei H102 H105 I T Afi C SE INPUTS n 4222222222222 ATL a X Sepam e AB jer Series 80 o e DCR es por a TE Ae mo 5 JL C 38 A 7 B used J b Notejumperl MERE kon lt a OY T preferred SC H107 ui i V y jumper 2 gt 11 Series80 altemate H108 1103 1 Relay WEZ UE eee l a 2 A FU FU xx Vdc Control Voltage unum c d MM 1 i spam A y al HA y Blu d 10 77 05 T 0102 70 Tin A18 Mo H135 AU l BEE ea EEE EEE NEN E E E Er ee J Self test Alarm Output Block Upstream Fast Trip Indication Output Watchdog Zone Seq Intlk ifused lif used 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Breaker AC Control Typical Switchgear Conrtol Typical Breaker amp Contactor Diagrams Control and Monitoring Functions pany pasn4 pul bes au0z Gopuoxew 3ndno uoneorpul du 3524 weagdn polg ndNOULEY 3 5 i fe viv SETH ov stv mo 0 o GE i II Il IL 7 U un Tew Trem Tem uv l
74. Switch B open Li D D Li D D D D D D Free Closing coil monitoring D D L D D D D D D D D Free 184 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Functions Logic Input Output Assignment Assignment Table of Logic Inputs by Application Block recloser D D D Free Block thermal overload D D D D D Free Switching of thermal settings D D D D a a Free Blocking reception 1 D D D D D s D D Free Blocking reception 2 D D D Free Buchholz trip D Free Thermostat trip m D D Free Pressure trip E D D D Free Thermistor trip D D D Free Buchholz alarm D D a Free Thermostat alarm D D D Free Pressure alarm D D D Free Thermistor alarm D D D Free Rotor speed measurement D D D L la04 Rotor rotation detection D Free Motor re acceleration D D Free Load shedding request D Free Block undercurrent D Free Priority genset shutdown D Free De excitation D Free Close enable ANSI 25 D D D D D D D D Li D Free Block opposite side remote control local D D D D D D Free Block remote control tie breaker local D D D D Free Tie Breaker open D D D D D D D D Free Tie Breaker closed D D D D Free Opposite side open D D D D D D D s a D F
75. T Set according to Set according to Set according to coordination study coordination study coordination study Direction Line Line Line Vsr set point 2 of Vis 2 of Vs 2 of Vus Sector N A 86 86 Memory time TOmem 0 0 200 ms Memory voltage 0 0 0 VOmem Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50096 DE80141 Protection Functions Ground fault protection for impedant or solidly grounded systems Trip Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N 67NC type 2 protection function Directional Ground Fault Type 2 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Description The protection function operates like a ground fault protection function with an added direction criterion It is suitable for closed ring distribution networks with solidly grounded neutral It has all the characteristics of a ground fault protection function BON 51N and can therefore be easily coordinated with that function Residual current is the current measured at one of the Sepam Ir inputs or calculated using the sum of the main phase currents I according to the parameter setting The tripping direction may be set at the bus end or line end The protection function has a definite or IDMT time delay Each unit has two groups of settings Switching to setting group A or B is carried out by a logic input or a remote control command depending on the settings The customized curve defined point by point may be used with this protection function An adj
76. TOF SR or LATCH functions Timer values A timer editor is used to give a name and value to each timer The name may then be used in the TON and TOF functions The timer value may therefore be adjusted without changing the program content V1 TON VL1 start start set to 200 ms in the timer editor Maximum number of functions The number of time delays TON TOF and pulse commands PULSE is globalized and may not be more than 16 There is no limitation for the SR and LATCH functions Description of Variables m input variables come from the protection functions logic inputs or predefined control functions They may only appear on the right of the sign m output variables produced by the equation editor to generate actions in the matrix protection functions or predefined control functions m local variables intended for intermediary calculations and are not available outside the logic equation editor Schneider 63230 216 230B1 257 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions Input vVariables Logic Equations Type Syntax Example Meaning Logic inputs Ixxx 1101 input 1 of MES120 No 1 module 1312 input 12 of MES120 No 3 module Protection function outputs Pnnnn_x_y P50 51 2 1 Protection 50 51 unit 2 delayed output nnnn ANSI code The protection function output data numbers are given in the x unit characteristics of each function and may be accessed using the y data data input assistance tool Remote c
77. The protection includes a definite time delay T Block Diagram Vbc 1 Vab Vi v3 V1 Vs F HF gt Fs Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range a gt delayed output pick up signal Main channels Vit Additional channels Vu Fs Set Point Setting range 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz Accuracy 1 0 01 Hz Resolution 0 1 Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz Time Delay T Setting range 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings Vs Set Point Setting range 20 to 50 VLLN Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 90 ms from Fs 0 5 Hz to Fs 0 5 Hz Overshoot time lt 50 ms from Fs 0 5 Hz to Fs 0 5 Hz Reset time lt 55 ms from Fs 0 5 Hz to Fs 0 5 Hz Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P81H_x_101 m Li Protection blockingblock P81H x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P81H x 1 L L Delayed output P81H_x 3 m Li Protection blockblocked P81H x 16 m L x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df at 3 Hz s Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 155 Protection Functions Detecting abnormally low frequency for load shedding using a metric frequency criterion 156 63230 216 230B1 Un
78. Use Commissioning and Maintenance manual Note INr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase ct s and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence ct which measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So the port name INr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative or zero sequence depends on the type of CTs used 262 63230 216 230B1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Appendix Ground Fault Current Measurement Method Summary with Neutral Residual Method Measurement Zero Sequence Setting Range Connections Current Remark Number Method CT Setting 2B Specific CSH Zero DT 0 2 Ato 30 A CSH 120 2 A Rated Sepam Series 80 Sequence CT On2 IDMT 0 2 A to 2 A CSH 200 CSH 2 A Core Considers INr 2 A A Input Rating i Bal CT 1417 3B Specific CSH Zero DT 0 5A to 75A CSH 120 5 A Rated INr 5A Sequence CT on 5 IDMT 0 5A to CSH 200 Lies CSH 5 A zero A Input Rating 7 5A 8 sequence CT j d E 4B Specific CSH Zero DT 2 A to 300 A CSH 120 CSH Core Balance CT 20 A Rated Sepam Series 80 Sequence CT On CSH 200 CSH 20 A Considers INr 20 A IDMT 2 A to 20 A 20 A Input Rating Core Bal CT 5B Standard 1 ACT or DT 0 1 to 15 INr
79. a current of 140 IBseq 141 A and an initial heat rise of 0 the value of k in the tripping curve tables is k 2 164 The tripping time is t k x Ts 2 164 x 20 43 mn The table below summarizes the rated sequence current the tripping current and examples of tripping times for overload currents of 125 IB and 140 IB for initial heat rises of 0 and 100 Closed Step IBseq A Itrip 125 IBseq 140 IBseq Numbers A iph Tripping Iph Tripping A time mn A time mn MEME 0 100 0 100 mop 24 25 83 50 28 43 20 0 0 7243 xIB 20 m ua 73 83 50 8 las Tan 2 0 7 pr IB 61 102 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 97 101 88 Tan 113 43 T 2 2 5 xIB 81 m u 14242 ppor 121 126 83 so 141 43 120 1 2 2 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 103 Gf Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS Curves for Initial Heat Rise 0 Is 1 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 ltrip IBseq 1 05 9 1282 6 7632 5 4705 4 6108 3 9841 3 5018 3 1171 2 8020 2 5389 2 3157 2 1239 1 9574 1 8115 1 6828 1 5683 1 10 3 7989 2 8277 2 2954 1 9404 1 6809 1 48
80. and the machine hot cold curves the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate 2 It is possible to use the charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve or the equation of the curve which is given on page 108 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric MT10861 MT10862 Protection Functions In numerical values the following is obtained 4005 Es0 4e 955 4 _ 4 2 0 3035 31 By setting EsO 31 point 2 is moved downward to obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the motor thermal withstand when cold see Figure 3 Nota A setting EsO 100 means that the hot and cold curves are the same Figure 2 Hot cold curves incompatible with the motor thermal withstand A D d d Sepam cold curve o 513 ob motor cold curve 400 2 E motor hot curve 2 o e 9 100 Sepam hot curve o E L Kess Se lt starting at Vun starting at 0 9 Vun Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Using the Additional Setting Group When a motor rotor is locked or turning very slowly its thermal behavior differs from one with a rated load In such conditions the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator For high power motors rotor overheating is usually a limiting factor The thermal overload parameters selected to operate with a low overload are no longer valid In order to protect
81. by overspeed during shutdown Sepam enables these operating modes by combining m switchgear control for tripping of the generator circuit breaker W de excitation function for tripping of the excitation circuit breaker m genset shutdown function to command the shutdown of the prime mover Function output delays are used for sequential tripping Typical Parameter Setting for Industrial Network Generators Protection Circuit Breaker Genset Shutdown De Excitation Functions Tripping 12 21B 24 27 32Q 37P 40 46 47 49RMS 50 27 50 51 50N 51N 50G 51G 50V 51V 59 59N 64G2 27TN 1 64REF 67 67N NC 78PS 81H 81L 81R 87M D L 87T D Li 1 Generally initiates an alarm but may otherwise initiate circuit breaker tripping genset shutdown and de excitation 63230 216 230B1 225 Control and Monitoring Functions Operation This function is available in generator applications It is used to shut down the genset in one of two ways m mechanical shutdown by shutting down the prime mover m electrical shutdown by tripping the generator Genset shutdown may be initiated in the following Ways m by a external shutdown command D remote control command if enabled D logic input if set up m by logic equation or by Logipam to take into account all specific generator installation characteristics m by delaye
82. certain zones in the network Protection against synchronism loss can be used to detect cases of transient instability When a generator is connected to a network that has infinite power the voltage across its terminals is imposed by the network For a turbo generator under steady state conditions the internal impedance is equal to its longitudinal synchronous reactance Xd the resistance and possible saturation of the magnetic circuit are not factors 1 V gt gt gt V E jXdl where E is the electromotive force of the machine Xd the synchronous reactance V the network voltage I the current supplied by the generator Xd If the generator supplies a current the network voltage and the electromotive force of the machine are not in phase because of the synchronous reactance This displacement is commonly called the internal angle of the machine or the oad angle B When the electromotive force leads the network voltage the internal angle is positive When the electromotive force lags the network voltage the internal angle is negative The vector diagram is E System Rotation E 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50641 Schneider Gf Electric Pole Slip ANSI Code 78PS The electrical power supplied by the machine to the network is P 3VIpf e Pe On the vector diagram Esin X Ipf X 3 As a function of the electromotive force the internal angle and the synchronous
83. cn V r V ab V bc V ac Display Mode Current display true true value max value normalized in relation to maximum 1 normalized to 1 Voltage display true true value max value normalized in relation to maximum 1 normalized to 1 Phase to phase voltage wye delta Display of scale yes no 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 33 amp Electric MT10180 Metering Functions IA Trip1 TO Tripping current Tripla acquisition 34 63230 216 230B1 Network Diagnosis Tripping Context Tripping Current Tripping Context Operation This function records the values at the time of tripping activation of the tripping contact on output O1 This allows the user to conduct fault analysis to determine the cause The values available from the Sepam display are m tripping currents residual currents Ir l r Ir and I r amp differential and through currents phase to phase voltages residual voltage neutral point voltage third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage frequency active power reactive power apparent power In addition to these the following values are available from the SFT2841 software m phase to neutral voltages m negative sequence voltage m positive sequence voltage The values for the last five events are saved with the date and time of tripping in case of a power failure Each new trip value overwrites the oldest event
84. commands via the communication link W local control commands by logic input or mimic based UMI W internal control commands created by logic equation or Logipam The function also blocks circuit breaker closing according to the operating conditions Circuit Breaker Opening The circuit breakers open under two conditions 1 Voluntary open A circuit breaker open command triggers the staggered opening of capacitor step switches This command is maintained for a time T1 the time required for the staggered opening of the capacitor step switches and the circuit breaker The circuit breaker opens after all the capacitor step switches to avoid breaking the capacitive current 2 Trip The protection functions units configured to trip the circuit breaker and external protection units send a trip command to the circuit breaker After the circuit breaker opens an open commandis sent to all the capacitor step switches at the same time Circuit Breaker Closing The circuit breaker only closes if all the capacitor step switches are open Anti Pumping Function To prevent simultaneous breaking device open and close commands and to give priority to open commands breaker device close commands are of the pulse type Switchgear Control with Lockout Function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function usually performed by lockout relays can be provided by Sepam by using the Switchgear control function with latching of all the tripping conditions protection function
85. control logic A specific input can also be used to activate the protection by logic equation or by Logipam That option is useful for adding special cases of activation e g tripping by an external protection unit The time delayed output of the protection function should be assigned to a logic output via the control matrix Starting and stopping of the time delay T counter are conditioned by the presence of a current above the set point I gt Is Block Diagram activation by 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 64REF 87M 87T 1 ls circuit breaker closed delayed output Sch eo activation by logic equation or by Logipam Ce Signal signal Setting D without considering circuit breaker position considering circuit breaker position Characteristics Settings Is Set Point Setting range 0 2 IN to 2 IN Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 0 1A Drop out pick up ratio 87 5 2 Time Delay T Setting range 50msto3s Accuracy 1 2 or 10 ms to 15 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Considering Circuit Breaker Position Setting range With without Characteristic Times Overshoot time lt 35 ms at 2 Is Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P5OBF 1 101 m D Start 50BF P50BF_1_107 m Protection blocking P50BF_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P50BF_1_1 D Delayed output P50BF_1_3 L a D
86. delay T2 for the detection of the loss of all voltages must be longer than the time ittakes for a short circuit to be cleared by the protection function 50 51 or 67 to avoid the detection of a VT loss of voltage fault triggered by a 3 phase short circuit The time delay for the 51V protection function must be longer than the T1 and T2 time delays used for the detection of voltage losses Characteristics Validating the Detection of Partial Loss of Phase Voltages Setting Yes No Vs2 Set Point Setting 10 to 100 of Ving Accuracy 5 Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 95 2 5 Is2 Set Point Setting 5 to 100 of IN Accuracy 5 Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 105 2 5 or gt 1 0 01 IN Is2 x 100 Time Delay T1 Partial Loss of Phase Voltages Setting 0 1 s to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Validating the Detection of the Loss of All Phase Voltages Setting Yes No Detecting the Loss of All Voltages with Verification of the Presence of Current Setting Yes No Voltage Presence Detected by Setting Breaker closed Logic equation Time Delay T2 Loss of All Voltages Setting 0 1 s to 300s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Voltage and Power Protection Behavior Setting No action block Protection 67 Behavior Setting Non directional block Protection 67N 67NC Behavior Setting Non directional block Inputs Designation Syntax Equations L
87. direction a c b 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved components Va Vb Vr la Ib Ir Schneider 63230 216 230B1 amp Electric 17 Metering Functions Phase Current Residual Current Phase Current Operation This function provides an RMS value for the phase currents m la phase a current main channels Ib phase b current main channels Ic phase c current main channels l a phase a current additional channels l b phase b current additional channels m l c phase c current additional channels It is based on RMS current measurement and considers up to the13th harmonic Different types of current transformers CTs can monitor phase current m 1A or 5A current transformers m Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type current sensors Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m Sepam display via the key m a PC loaded with SFT2841 software m a communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 02 to 40 IN Units A or kA Resolution 01A Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 1 from 0 3 to 1 5 IN 2 from 0 1 to 0 3 IN Display format 3 significant digits Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Residual Current Operation This operation provides an RMS value of the residual current It is based on measu
88. fault still persists and a message will appear on the display m case of a cleared fault Following a reclosing command if the fault does not appear after the reclaim time has run out the recloser reinitializes and a message appears on the display see example 1 m closing ona fault If the circuit breaker closes on a fault or if the fault appears before the end of the safety time delay the recloser is blocked A final trip message is issued Recloser Block Conditions The recloser is blocked according to the following conditions m voluntary open or close command m recloser put out of service m receipt of a block command on the logic input W activation of the breaker failure such as trip circuit fault control fault SF6 pressure drop m opening of the circuit breaker by a protection unit that does not run reclosing cycles such as frequency protection by external tripping or by a function set up not to activate reclosing cycles In such cases a final trip message appears Extending the dead time If during a reclosing step it is impossible to reclose the circuit breaker because recharging is not finished the dead time can be extended up to the time the circuit breaker is ready to carry out an Open Close Open cycle The maximum time added to the dead time is adjustable Twait max If at the end of the maximum waiting time the circuit breaker is still not ready the recloser is blocked see example 5 1 Following a drop
89. for each phase and a fifth harmonic set point for each phase The second harmonic set point ensures that the protection function will not pick up if the transformer closes or the CTs become saturated The restraint can be global cross blocking all three phases are restrained as soon as the harmonic in one phase exceeds the set point or phase specific no cross blocking only the phase with a harmonic exceeding the set point is restrained Cross blocking is recommended for transformers used in three phase mode The fifth harmonic set point ensures that the protection function will not pick up if the transformer is connected to a voltage supply that is too high The restraint can be global all three phases are restrained or phase specific only the phase with a harmonic exceeding the set point is restrained Restraint without cross blocking is recommended for normal operation 63230 216 230B1 167 DE52176 Protection Functions Transformer Differential Winding 1 Vunt In Winding 2 Viin2 In2 168 ANSI Code 87T Restraint on Closing In some cases the harmonic content of the transformer inrush current is not sufficient to activate harmonic restraints An additional restraint can be activated m when the through current exceeds an adjustable set point Isinr m by an internal variable P87T_1_118 controlled by logic equations or Logipam This restraint is applied to the percentage based differential elements for an adjustable
90. for this type of fault lt 0 25 In wherex a b c 2 Restraint on CT saturation CT saturation can result in a false differential current and nuisance tripping The restraint analyses the asymmetry of the signals and restrains the tripping command if a CT is saturated 3 Restraint on CT loss CT loss can result in a false differential current and nuisance tripping This restraint is the means to detect a measurement that abnormally drops to zero sample analysis 4 Restraint on transformer energizing D this restraint ensures that the second harmonic level of the differential current is greater than 15 Idxh2 gt 0 15 where x a b c Idx Phase a fault Ida gt 5 5 IN Ida lta 1 High set point output Phase b fault Tripping output Percentage based set point l a output Ib CT loss Phase c l b Detection S R A fault Ic CT loss c 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 161 amp Electric Protection Functions 162 63230 216 230B1 Machine Differential ANSI Code 87M Sizing Phase Current Transformers Current transformers should be defined by a knee point voltage Vk gt Ret RW 20 INz Generators are characterized by large X R ratio s The rule of thumb is to use the highest possible accuracy class completely offset short circuit current requires the ct to support
91. groups of settings switching mode is determined by parameter setting m switching according to the position of a logic input 0 group A 1 group B m switching by remote control command TC33 TC34 m forced group A or group B Block Diagram Group A forced Choice by logic input Logic input for A B switching Group A active V_GROUPA Choice by remote control Group A by remote control TC33 Group B by remote control TC34 Group b forced Choice by logic input Logic input for A B switching Group B active V_GROUPB Choice by remote control Group B by remote control TC34 Group A by remote control TC33 Characteristics Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Group of settings A active V_GROUPA D Group of settings B active V_GROUPB D Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE50623 DE50809 Control and Monitoring Functions NO T Xs 09s T Xs 06s T Xs 0 3s Example radial distribution with use of time based discrimination T protection setting time As an approximation for definite time curves this is assumed to be equal to the protection tripping time The upstream protection units are typically delayed by 0 3 s to give the downstream protection units time to trip When there are many levels of discrimination the fault clearing time at the sou
92. in auxiliary voltage recharging time is longer 63230 216 230B1 151 Protection Functions 152 63230 216 230B1 Recloser ANSI Code 79 Characteristics Settings Number of Steps Setting range Activation of Shot 1 Protection 50 51 units 1 to 4 1t04 inst delayed no activation Protection 50N 51N units 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation Protection 67 units 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation Protection 67N 67NC units 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation Logic equations or Logipam outputs V TRIPCB Activation of Shots 2 3 and 4 Protection 50 51 units 1 to 4 active inactive inst delayed no activation Protection 50N 51N units 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation Protection 67 units 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation Protection 67N 67NC units 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation Logic equations or Logipam outputs active inactive V TRIPCB Time Delays Reclaim time 0 1to 300s Dead time Shot 1 0 1to 300s Shot 2 0 1 to 300s Shot 3 0 1to 300s Shot 4 0 1to 300s Safety time until ready 0 to 60s Maximum additional dead time 0 1 to 60s Accuracy 2 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection blocking P79_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Recloser in service P79 1 201 m D D Recloser ready P79 1 202 m D D Cleared fault P79 1 203 m
93. is distributed Connecting Voltage Connecting Main Current P Q S Calculation Method Power per Phase Channels Channels Pa Pb Pc Qa Qb Qc Sa Sb Sc 3V la Ib Ic three wattmeters Available la Ic two wattmeters Not available Vbc Vab Vr la Ib Ic three wattmeters Available la Ic two wattmeters Not available Vbc Vab without Vr la Ib Ic or la Ic two wattmeters Not available Vab la Ib Ic or la Ic two wattmeters Not available The system voltage is considered to be balanced Van la Ib Ic or la Ic No calculation Pa Qa Sa only Power calculation m by three wattmeter method gt gt gt 3 gt gt gt gt 3 gt gt P Vanlacos Van la Vbnibcos Vbn l b Venlccos Ven l c gt gt gt gt gt 2 gt doo 2 cx Q Vanlasin Vanil a Vbnlbsin Vbn b Venlesin Ven lc m by two wattmeter method m gt gt PE gt gt P Vablacos Vab la Vbclccos Vbclc Eo ol cU gt gt gt A gt Q Vablasin Vab la Vbclcsin Vbc Ic 2 2 m S jP Q According to standard practice m forthe outgoing circuit 0 O power supplied by the bus is positive D power supplied to the bus is negative 8 flow S direction 26 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved m for the incoming circuit 1 D power supplied to the bus is positive H power supplied by the bus is negative
94. m Sepam Series 20 User s Manual reference 63230 216 208 m Sepam Series 40 User s Manual reference 63230 216 219 m Sepam Series 80 Reference Manual reference 63230 216 230 m Sepam Series 80 Modbus Communication User s Manual reference 63230 216 231 m Sepam Series 80 Operation Manual reference 63230 216 229 m Sepam DNP3 Communication User s Manual reference 63230 216 236 m Sepam IEC 60870 5 103 Communication User s Manual reference 63230 216 237 2 63230 216 230B1 PE50465 PE50465 PE50464 Schneider amp Electric Sepam Protective Relays Overview Sepam Series 20 For Simple Applications Characteristics m 10 logic inputs m 8 relay outputs m 1 communication port m 8 temperature sensor inputs Sepam Series 40 For Demanding Applications Characteristics m 10 logic inputs 8 relay outputs Logic equation editor 1 communication port 16 temperature sensor inputs Sepam Series 80 For Custom Applications Characteristics m 42 logic inputs 23 relay outputs Logic equation editor 2 communication ports for multimaster or redundant architecture m 16 temperature sensor inputs Removable memory cartridge with parameters and settings for quick return to service after replacement Battery for storing logs and recording data m Mimic based User Machine Interface f
95. m a trip command to the generator circuit breaker m atrip command to the excitation circuit breaker m ashutdown command to the prime mover This mode is reserved for internal faults in generators and transformers of generator transformer units Generator Tripping This type of control function gives the following commands m atrip command to the generator circuit breaker m atrip command to the excitation circuit breaker The prime mover is not shut down This mode is reserved for power system faults and allows the generator to be quickly reconnected after the fault is cleared 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Gf Electric Generator Shutdown amp Tripping Generator Separation This type of control function gives a trip command to the generator utility tie circuit breaker The machine remains excited and the prime mover is not shut down This mode is used to isolate the machine from a utility power system which no longer meets the utility tie conditions voltage frequency loss of power system source The generator may continue to supply loads locally Sequential Tripping This type of control function gives the following commands consecutively m atrip command to the generator circuit breaker m a delayed trip command to the excitation circuit breaker m a delayed shutdown command to the prime mover This mode is reserved for steam turbine generators and other such machines that may be adversely affected
96. m protection function 67 of the fault free main is insensitive to fault current in the bus direction Example of Setting m logic input output assignment O 1104 blocking reception 2 Do not assign any inputs to blocking reception 1 D 0102 blocking send 1 W protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction line O instantaneous output blocking send 1 D delayed output not blocked no input assigned to blocking signal 1 circuit breaker tripping on faults upstream from main m protection function 50 51 unit 5 H delayed output blocked by protection 67 unit 1 if there is a fault upstream from the main not blocked for bus faults blocked for feeder faults W protection function 50 51 unit 3 as backup Schneider 63230 216 230B1 219 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 220 63230 216 230B1 DE50816 Zone Selective Interlocking Example Closed Ring Network Closed ring network protection may be provided by Sepam S82 or T82 This includes the following functions m two units of directional phase 67 and ground fault 67N protection functions D one unit to detect faults in the line direction D one unit to detect faults in the bus direction m use of two discrimination groups H sending two blocking signals according to the detected fault direction H receiving two blocking signals to block the directional protection relays according to the detection direction BS
97. o D D n D n n n n n n n Wh VARh Phase current l a I b l c RMS Ci Calculated residual current I rx D Voltage V ab V an and frequency Voltage V ab V bc V ac Van V bn V cn V 1 V2 and frequency Residual voltage V r Temperature 16 RTDs 6 D o o o o o D a o a Rotation speed 2 D D o D D o Neutral point voltage Vnt D D D Tripping context E Tripping current Tripla Triplb Triple Phase fault and ground fault trip counters Unbalance ratio negative sequence current I2 Harmonic distortion thd current Ithd and voltage Vthd Phase displacement gr g r orX Phase displacement qa ob qc Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter operating time Starting current and time Start block time Number of starts before blocking Unbalance ratio negative sequence current l 2 Differential current Idiffa Idiffb Idiffc Through current Ita Itb Itc Current phase displacement Or Apparent positive sequence impedance Z1 Apparent phase to phase impedances Zab Zbc Zac Third harmonic voltage neutral point VntH3 or D residual VrH3 Difference in amplitude frequency and phase of n n n n n n n D voltages compared for sync check 4 Capacitor unbalance current and capacitance D D D D CT
98. of charging position Ix 0 T SF6 pressure fault Ix m T 200 ms Breaker closed 1101 Capacitor step 1 open Ix q Capacitor step 2 open Ix Capacitor step 3 open Ix Ix Capacitor step 1 open Ix d Breaker closed 1101 d ID order Close by remote control TC2 Remote control inhibit Close order Ix D Close by mimic based UMI V_MIMIC_CLOSECB V_CLOSECB External close order 1 Ix External close order 2 Ix 202 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Capacitor Step Control Automatic Control When the Automatic capacitor step control logic input is on each step is controlled automatically by the reactive energy regulator VAR In this case one input per step is used to open and close one capacitor step switch m input in state 1 closing of capacitor step x switch m input in state 0 opening of capacitor step x switch Manual Control When the Manual capacitor step control logic input is on each step may be opened and closed manually m locally by specific logic inputs one open input and one close input per step m remotely by remote control Blocking Voluntary Capacitor Step Control Voluntary capacitor step switch control can be blocked by a logic input However this input does not block faul
99. of the protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set T corresponds to the time delay for I2 IB 5 The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations m forls IB lt I2 IB lt 0 5 3 19 12 1B m for0 5 lt 12 IB lt 5 _ 4 64 HE Leg m forl2 B gt 0 5 t T Schneider 63230 216 230B1 89 amp Electric Protection Functions Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 Determination of tripping time for different negative sequence current values for a given Schneider curve Use the table to find the value of X that corresponds to the required negative sequence current The tripping time is equal to XT t s 10000 5000 Example given a tripping curve with the setting T 0 5 s What is the tripping time at 0 6 IB 2000 Schneider IDMT Tripping Curve Use the table to find the value of X that corresponds to 1000 60 of IB 500 The table indicates X 7 55 The tripping time is equal to 0 5 x 7 55 3 755 s 200 100 50 20 max curve T 1s 10 5 2 1 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 min curve T 0 1s 0 02 0 01 0 005 0 002 0 001 Ve 12 IB 10 15 20 25 30 33 33 35 40 45 50 55 57 7 60 65 70 75 x 99 95 54 50 35 44 25 38 19 32 16 51 15 34 12 56 10 53 9 00 821 784 755 7 00 652 6 11 12 IB cont 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 X cont 5 74 542 513 487 464 424 390 361 337 315 296 280 265 252 240 2 29 12
100. of the main channels B Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Schneider Lp Electric Measurement range 0 015 to 40 IN Units A or kA Resolution 0 1 A Accuracy 1 5 Display format 3 significant digits Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At In under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 63230 216 230B1 45 DE50287 Metering Functions 46 63230 216 230B1 Machine Operation Assistance Current Phase Displacement Operation Current phase displacement between the main phase currents I and additional phase currents l 0a 0b 0c is calculated for each phase The measurements are corrected by taking account of the connection and the direction of rotation of the phases to create an image of the vector shift which must be set in order to use the ANSI 87T differential protection 6r 30 vector shift Setting ranges This is the protectioin setting range Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the Q icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 359 Units 9 Resolution r Accuracy 1 2 Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 At In under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider
101. on the External tripping 1 logic input m or V_TRANS_ON_FLT initialization of transfer by logic equations or by Logipam Schneider 63230 216 230B1 239 amp Electric DE52289 Control and Monitoring Functions Necessary Conditions for 2 3 Transfer ANSI 50 51 phase overcurrent unit 1 inst ANSI 50N 51N earth fault unit 1 inst V_TRANS_STOP ANSI 27 phase undervoltage unit 1 inst Remote control block local Opposite side remote control block local Tie breaker remote control block local Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Tie breaker racked out Breaker closed Opposite side voltage OK ANSI 60FL VT fault Selector on auto Tie breaker open Opposite side breaker us 5 Tie breaker Cl Led Opposite side breaker open Transfer initialization ANSI 27 phase undervoltage unit 1 delayed External trip 1 V_TRANS_ON_FLT Closing of NO breaker Breaker open Tie breaker or NO close blocked ANSI 27R remanent undervoltage unit 1 delayed 240 63230 216 230B1 Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Operation Block Diagram 0 T AT breaker trip order taken SEN into account by switchgear control We V_AT_TRIPPING NO errs NC Lalin Order for automatic closing of NO breaker 5 d V CLOSE NO ORD Closing a Normally Open Circuit Breaker The following conditions must be met to close the normally open circuit breaker m the incoming circuit breaker is open m nonormally op
102. protection operating delay t A DE50398 Definite time protection principle Schneider 63230 216 230B1 145 amp Electric Protection Functions 146 63230 216 230B1 Directional Ground Fault Type 3 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Type 3 Characteristics Measurement Origin Setting range Ir rr Ir sum of the main phase channels Tripping Zone Start Angle Lim 1 Setting 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 3 Tripping Zone End Angle Lim 2 Setting 0 to 359 1 Resolution 1 Accuracy 3 Tripping Direction Setting Line bus Isr Set Point Setting 2 With CSH zero sequence 0 1 A to 30 A CT 2 A rating With 1 ACT 0 005 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A With zero sequence CT 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A ACE990 range 1 Resolution 0 1 or 1 digit Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 2 95 Vsr Set Point Setting On sum of 3 Vs 2 Vup lt Vsr lt 80 Vup On external VT 0 6 Vip lt Vsr lt 80 Vup Resolution 0 196 for Vsr 10 1 for Vsr 2 10 Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 2 95 Time Delay T Setting instantaneous 50 ms lt T lt 300s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 3 or 20 ms at 2 Isr Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 40 ms at 2 Isr instantaneous lt 55 ms at 2 Isr Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Reset pro
103. radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved E 63230 216 230B1 ectric Contents Introduction Metering Functions Protection Functions Control and Monitoring Functions Appendix 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 ectric 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Introduction Schneider 63230 216 230B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Sepam Protective Relays Presentation Modular Architecture Selection Table Technical Characteristics Environmental Characteristics amp Electric Qo o o c BR NY Introduction The Sepam range of protection relays is designed for all protection applications on medium voltage public and industrial distribution networks It consists of three series of relays with increasing levels of performance m Sepam Series 20 for simple applications m Sepam Series 40 for demanding applications m Sepam Series 80 for custom applications All information relating to the Sepam range can be found in the following documents m Sepam Family Catalog reference 63230 216 238
104. reactance the active power is P nen d This equation can be used to determine the electrical power supplied by the generator to the network as a function of the internal angle and assuming that V E and Xd are constant If losses are neglected efficiency is close to 0 99 the relation between the mechanical power Pm and the electrical power supplied Pe is P P 10 where J is the moment of inertia of the machine Q is the angular velocity of the rotating masses Pm is the mechanical power supplied by the driving machine The velocity of the electric field is related to the mechanical velocity by the equation Q p where o is the angular velocity of the electrical field p is the number of pole pairs in the machine In the remainder of this example we will consider a machine with a single pair of poles i e p 1 The relation between electrical and mechanical power becomes do Pa P Jon Variations in speed are directly related to unbalances between the mechanical power and the electrical power supplied to the network do _ Fn P dt Jo Under steady state conditions with no increase in speed the electrical power Pe supplied to the network is equal to the mechanical power Pm Pe Load Angle The electrical power curve intersects the constant mechanical power line at two points A and B m point A stable operation o _if increases slightly with respect to its value at point A the electromoti
105. setting is suitable for compensated or resistance grounded systems When this setting is selected the parameter setting of the sector is used to reduce the protection tripping zone to ensure its stability on fault free feeders The protection function operates with the residual current measured at one of the relay Ir inputs operation with sum of three currents impossible The protection function is blocked for residual voltages below the Vsr set point It implements a definite time DT delay The tripping direction may be set at the bus end or line end Each of the two units has two groups of settings Switching to setting group A or B can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control command depending on the settings Memory The detection of recurrent faults is controlled by the time delay TOmem which extends the transient pick up information thereby enabling the operation of the definite time delay even with faults that are rapidly extinguished 2 ms and restrike periodically Even when a Petersen coil with no additional resistance is used tripping is ensured due to fault detection during the transient fault appearance Detection is extended throughout the duration of the fault based on the criterion Vr gt Vr mem within the limit of TOmem With this type of application TOmem must be greater than T definite time delay Block Diagram Van Vbn x Vcn
106. still allowed See the section on machine diagnosis Block Diagram la Ib gt 0 05 Is Ic DE50844 OB closed BE logic input Lio 100 ms deier motor re acceleration logic input thermal alarm hot state clear where k1 counter 1 for total starts k2 counter 2 for cold starts Nc number of cold starts Nh number of hot starts Nt total number of starts allowed per period of time k3 counter 3 for hot starts P period of time Characteristics Settings Period of Time P Setting range 1 to 6 hours Resolution 1h Total Number of Starts Nt Allowed per Period of Time P Setting range 1 to 60 Resolution 1 Number of Consecutive Hot Starts Nh Setting range 1 to Nf Resolution 1 Number of Consecutive Cold Starts Nc Setting range 1 to Nt Resolution 1 Stop start Time Delay Setting range 0 to 90 min 0 no delay Resolution 1 min Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P66_1_101 Motor re acceleration P66_1_102 Protection blocking P66_1_113 D D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Protection output P66_1_3 Li Protection blocked P66 1 16 Stop start block P66_1_29 D Total number starts reached P66_1_30 Total consecutive starts reached P66_1_31 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection
107. the motor in this case excessive starting time protection may be used However motor manufacturers provide the thermal withstand curves when the rotor is locked for different voltages at the time of starting Figure 4 Locked Rotor Thermal Withstand A MT10863 times s motor running locked rotor gt 1 05 2 Vp Figure 3 Hot cold curves compatible with the motor thermal withstand via the setting of an initial heat rise EsO A adjusted Sepam cold curve motor cold curve 400 motor hot curve 100 7 Sepam hot curve time before tripping s lt starting at Vun starting at 0 9 Vun Gi 2i 2 thermal withstand motor running thermal withstand motor stopped Sepam tripping curve starting at 65 Vit starting at 80 Vit starting at 100 Vit In order to consider these curves a second thermal overload relay can be used The time constant in this case is theoretically shorter It should however be determined in the same way as that of the first relay The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the equivalent current leq exceeds the Is value set point current 1 1 2 l 18 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Example 4 Transformer with Two Ventilation Modes The following data are available The rated current of a transformer with two ventilation modes is IB 200 A wi
108. the neutral point VntH3 voltage before the fault is greater than 0 2 of the network phase to neutral voltage The protection function is blocked if the power S produced by the generator is low or if the positive sequence voltage V1 is insufficient Adjustment This function is adjusted according to a series of measurements on the neutral point VntH3 voltage of the generator These measurements are used to determine the lowest VntH3 voltage value under normal operating conditions The measurements should be carried out m under no load conditions not connected to the network m ata number of load levels because the H3 voltage level depends on the load The parameter is set below the lowest H3 voltage value measured The Sepam unit provides the neutral point VntH3 voltage measurement to facilitate adjustment of the protection function Block Diagram vant V3nt lt Vs instantaneous 22 output TS 9 U gt 0 002 Vntp T 0 gt tripping s output S S Ssmin Vismin NI REEL Vi 5 Characteristics Settings Type of Set Point Setting range Fixed Third Harmonic Voltage Set Point Vs Setting range 0 2 to 20 of Vntp Accuracy 1 5 or 0 05 V of neutral point Vnts Resolution 0 1 Drop out pick up ratio 105 Time Delay Setting range 0 5 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced S
109. through the amp icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Resetting to Zero The thermal capacity used can be reset to zero after entering a password on m aSepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 800 Units Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Cooling Time Constant Operation The machine thermal overload protection function 49 RMS machine uses a cooling time constant T2 the user can enter according to the data given by the machine manufacturer It can also be information learned by Sepam T2 is estimated under two conditions 1 after a heating cooling sequence m heating period detected by ES gt 70 m followed by a shutdown detected by lt 10 of IB 2 when the machine temperature is measured by RTDs connected to MET1482 module number 1 m RTD 1 2 or 3 assigned to motor generator stator temperature measurement m RTD 1 3 or 5 assigned to transformer temperature measurement After each new heating cooling sequence is detected a new T2 value is estimated and displayed in the related SFT2841 screen Measurement accuracy may be improved by using RTD 8 to measure the ambient temperature The machine thermal overload function has two groups of thermal settings for cases such as natural or forced ventilation or two speed m
110. time Inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 sor TMS 2 EPATR B 0 5to1s EPATR C 0 1t03s Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings 2nd Harmonic Restraint Fixed threshold Timer Hold T1 Setting range 17 33 Definite time 0 0 05 t0 300 s IDMT DI 0 5 to 20s Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 Isr typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 55 ms at 2 Isr for Is 2 0 3 Inr typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Isr for Is lt 0 3 Inr typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms at 2 Isr Reset time lt 50 ms at 2 Isr for T1 0 x unit number Inputs 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Designation Syntax Equations Logipam 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Protecti t PSON SIN x 101 m Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 EE x m Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Protection blocking P50N 51N x 113 m Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Outputs m Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix m IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 r m JEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 Instantaneous output pick up P5ON 51N x 1 a D m IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 Delayed output P50N 51N x 3 m JAC inverse
111. to 50 VLLN Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Restraint on Frequency Variation Setting With without dFs dt set point 1 Hz s to 15 Hz s Accuracy 1 1 Hz s Resolution 1 Hz s Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 90 ms from Fs 40 5 Hz to Fs 0 5 Hz Overshoot time lt 50 ms from Fs 0 5 Hz to Fs 0 5 Hz Reset time lt 55 ms from Fs 0 5 Hz to Fs 0 5 Hz Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P81L x 101 m Protection blockingblock P81L x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P81L_x_1 E a Delayed output P81L_x_3 D D D Protection blocked P81L x 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Rate of Change of Frequency df dt ANSI Code 81R Protection function based on the calculation Operation of the frequency variation used to rapi e rate of change of frequency protection function is complementary to the under an f the freq y variation pidly Th f change of fi ion function i he under and disconnect a source supplying a network or overfrequency protection functions in detecting network configurations that require load shedding or disconnection to control load shedding The function is activated when the rate of change of frequency df dt of the positive sequence v
112. to V FLAGREC15 Number of recordings stored 1 1to 19 Total duration of a recording 1 1sto20s Maximum recording capacity 22 s at 50 Hz 12 samples per cycle dist rec memory usage 100 18 s at 60 Hz 12 samples per cycle 7 s at 50 Hz 36 samples per cycle 6 s at 60 Hz 36 samples per cycle Periods recorded before triggering 0 to 99 cycles3 event 1 File format COMTRADE 97 1 To be set using the SFT2841 software 2 According to type and connection of CTs 3 According to Sepam hardware configuration 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved gi eed 63230 216 230B1 39 ectric Metering Functions 40 63230 216 230B1 Network Diagnosis Sync Check Voltage Comparison and Out of Sync Context Operation Voltage Comparison For the sync check function the MCS025 module continuously measures the amplitude frequency and phase differences between V sync1 and V sync2 Out of Sync Context Out of sync context gives a precise indication as to why a synchronization request fails The context is provided only when the switchgear control function with the closing with sync check option is activated When a synchronization request fails the amplitude frequency and phase differences of the Vj sync1 and V sync2 voltages measured by the MCS025 module are recorded with the date and time at the end of the switchgear control function closing request time delay Readout The amplitude fre
113. to control the electrotechnical device D directly via the Sepam logic outputs D by the switchgear control function D by logic equations or the Logipam program Schneider 63230 216 230B1 251 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 252 63230 216 230B1 Local Control Symbol Animation Symbols change depending on the value of their inputs A graphic symbol represents each state Animation occurs automatically by changing the symbol each time the state changes The symbol inputs must be assigned directly to the Sepam inputs to indicate the position of the symbolized switchgear Animated Symbols with One Input Animated 1 input and Controlled 1 input output symbols are animated symbols with one input The value of the input determines the state of the symbol m input set to 0 inactive m input set to 1 active This type of symbol is used for simple presentation of information for example the racked out position of a circuit breaker Symbol Inputs Symbol State Graphic Representation example Input 0 Inactive Input 1 Active I Animated Symbols with Two Inputs Animated 2 inputs and Controlled 2 inputs outputs symbols are animated symbols with two inputs one open and the other closed This is the most common situation in representing switchgear positions The symbol has three states or graphic representations open closed and unknown The latter occurs when the inputs are not matc
114. two independent set points m alarm set point m tripping set point When the protection function is activated it detects whether the RTD is shorted or disconnected m RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than 31 F or 35 C measurement displayed m RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater than 205 C or 401 F measurement displayed If an RTD fault is detected the protection function is blocked and its output relays are setto zero The RTD fault item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated specifying the number of the MET1482 module for the faulty RTD Block Diagram T lt 205 C DE50778 RTD T gt 35 C Characteristics Settings Alarm and Trip Set Points TS1 TS2 T gt Ts1 1 1 set point 2 set point RTD fault Setting range 0 C to 180 C 32 F to 356 F Accuracy 1 1 5 C 2 7 F Resolution 1 C 1 F Pick up drop out difference 3 C 5 4 F Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P38 49T x 101 m D Protection blocking P38 49T_x_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Protection output P38 49T_x_3 D D D Alarm P38 49T x 10 m D D RTD fault P38 49T x 12 m D Protection blocked P38 49T x 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 84 63230 216 230B1 Schneide
115. voltage Vp 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Function number 39xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to 4 Common settings 5 Tripping curve 0 definite 19 IDMT 6 Threshold voltage Vp 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 268 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Function Settings Protection Settings Appendix ANSI 27TN 64G2 Third Harmonic Undervoltage Function number 71xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1t03 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Access 0 adaptive 1 fixed 6 Vs set point 0 1 Vi tp 7 Min Ss set point Sb 8 Min Vs set point Vp 9 K set point 0 01 10 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 64 REF Restricted Ground Fault Differential Function number 64xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to4 Common settings 5 Threshold current 0 1A ANSI 66 Starts per Hour Function number 4201 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Common settings 2 Reserved 3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Period of time Hours 6 Total number of starts 1 7 Number of consecutive hot starts 1 8 Number of consecutive cold starts 1 9 Time delay between stop and start min ANSI 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent Function number 52xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02
116. xm Dem where x a b orc m Through current Itx max l xml Dem where x a b orc The function picks up if the differential current of at least one phase is greater than the operating threshold defined by m ahigh adjustable differential current set point without tripping restraint m an adjustable percentage based characteristic with two slopes m alow adjustable differential current set point Stability is ensured by the following tripping restraints m a self adaptive or conventional harmonic restraint m atransfomer energization restraint m a CT loss restraint The high tripping set point is not restrained Block Diagram Test mode P87T 1 41 High set point phase a Ida gt Idmax Maximum threshold P87T_1_33 High set point phase b Idb gt Idmax High set point phase c Idc gt Idmax Percentage differential Conventional or self adaptive restraint Tripping output P87T_1_3 Percentage threshold oo Restraint on closing Detection of CT loss 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric P87T_1_34 Phase a D CT loss P87T_1_39 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 163 Protection Functions Definitions The terms winding 1 and winding 2 are used in the following manner m winding 1 corresponds to the circuit to which the main currents la Ib Ic and the voltage measurements Van Vbn Vcn Vab or Vbc are c
117. 0 Units Resolution 0 1 Accuracy 1 1 at VN or VN for Vthd gt 2 Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 63230 216 230B1 37 DE50412 MT11029 Metering Functions 0 Phase displacement pr ga Phase displacement ga 38 63230 216 230B1 Vr Van Network Diagnosis Phase Displacement or o r qr Phase Displacement qa ob pc Phase Displacement or o r qr Operation This function gives the phase displacement measured between the residual voltage and residual current in the trigonometric counter clockwise direction see diagram The measurement is used during commissioning to ensure the directional ground fault protection unit is connected correctly Three values are available m or angle between Vr and measured Ir m or angle between Vr and measured I r m rz angle between Vr and IrZ calculated as the sum of the phase currents Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display through the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 359 Resolution ae Accuracy 2 Refresh Interval 2 seconds typical Phase Displacement qa ob oc Operation This function calculates the phase displacement between the Van Vbn Vcn voltages and la Ib Ic currents respectively in the trigonometric counter clockwis
118. 0 0 75 10 0 37 0 41 0 45 0 50 054 0 59 0 63 0 68 0 73 0 78 0 83 15 0 56 0 62 0 68 0 75 0 81 0 88 0 95 1 02 1 10 1 17 1 25 20 0 74 0 82 0 91 1 00 1 09 1 18 1 27 1 37 1 46 1 56 1 67 25 0 93 1 03 1 14 1 25 1 36 1 47 1 59 1 71 1 83 1 95 2 08 30 1 11 1 24 1 36 1 49 1 63 1 76 1 90 2 05 2 20 2 35 2 50 40 1 48 1 65 1 82 1 99 217 235 254 2 73 293 3 13 3 33 50 1 85 2 00 2 27 249 2 71 2 94 3 17 341 3 66 3 91 4 17 60 2 22 2 47 2 73 2 99 3 26 3 53 3 81 4 10 4 39 4 69 4 10 70 2 59 2 88 3 18 3 49 380 4 12 4 44 478 5 12 5 47 5 83 80 2 96 3 30 3 64 398 4 34 4 71 508 5 46 5 85 6 26 6 67 90 3 33 3 71 4 09 4 48 488 5 29 5 71 6 14 6 59 7 04 7 50 VntH3 V p x 100 4 DE51618 64 K max 0 2 LA K min 0 1 Tripping zone T T T T T T T 3 VrH3XM p x 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 76 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved gr eed 63230 216 230B1 79 lectric DE50771 Protection Functions Directional Active Overpower ANSI Code 32P Protection against reverse power and This protection function enables if the active power flowing in either direction overloads supplied or drawn is greater than set point Ps It includes a definite time delay T and is based on the two or three wattmeter method of measurement depending on the connection conditions RR m Van Vbn Vcn and la Ib Ic three wattmeters Description m Vab Vbn Vcn and la Ic two wattmeters Two way pro
119. 0 1438 0 1241 0 1082 0 0952 0 0845 0 0755 0 0679 0 0614 0 0558 0 0509 110 0 3877 0 3634 0 3415 0 3216 0 2578 0 2119 0 1776 0 1512 0 1304 0 1136 0 1000 0 0887 0 0792 0 0712 0 0644 0 0585 0 0534 115 0 4095 0 3835 0 3602 0 3390 0 2713 0 2227 0 1865 0 1586 0 1367 0 1191 0 1048 0 0929 0 0830 0 0746 0 0674 0 0612 0 0559 120 0 4317 0 4041 0 3792 0 3567 0 2849 0 2336 0 1954 0 1661 0 1431 0 1246 0 1096 0 0972 0 0868 0 0780 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 125 0 4545 0 4250 0 3986 0 3747 0 2988 0 2446 0 2045 0 1737 0 1495 0 1302 0 1144 0 1014 0 0905 0 0813 0 0735 0 0667 0 0609 130 0 4778 0 4465 0 4184 0 3930 0 3128 0 2558 0 2136 0 1813 0 156 0 1358 0 1193 0 1057 0 0943 0 0847 0 0766 0 0695 0 0634 135 0 5016 0 4683 0 4386 0 4117 0 3270 0 2671 0 2228 0 1890 0 1625 0 1414 0 1242 0 1100 0 0982 0 0881 0 0796 0 0723 0 0659 140 0 5260 0 4907 0 4591 0 4308 0 3414 0 2785 0 2321 0 1967 0 1691 0 147 0 1291 0 1143 0 1020 0 0916 0 0827 0 0751 0 0685 145 0 5511 0 5136 0 4802 0 4502 0 3561 0 2900 0 2414 0 2045 0 1757 0 1527 0 1340 0 1187 0 1058 0 0950 0 0858 0 0778 0 0710 150 0 5767 0 5370 0 5017 0 4700 0 3709 0 3017 0 2509 0 2124 0 1823 0 1584 0 1390 0 1230 0 1097 0 0984 0 0889 0 0806 0 0735 155 0 6031 0 5610 0 5236 0 4902 0 3860 0 3135 0 2604 0 2203 0 189 0 1641 0 1440 0 1274 0 1136 0 1019 0 0920 0 0834 0 0761 160 0 6302 0 5856 0 5461 0 5108 0 4013 0 3254 0 2701 0 2283 0 1957 0 1699 0 1490 0 1318 0 1174 0 1054 0 0951 0 0863 0 0786 165 0 6580 0 6108 0 5690 0 5319 0 4169 0 3375 0 2798 0 2363 0 2025 0
120. 0 3 376 9 000 33 000 67 691 1 427 3 152 10 199 23 421 2 524 7 932 16 178 2 5 2 548 6 000 18 857 35 490 1 290 2 402 6 133 13 512 2 056 4 676 9 566 3 0 2 121 4 500 12 375 21 608 1 212 2 016 4 270 8 970 1 792 3 249 6 541 3 5 1 858 3 600 8 800 14 382 1 161 1 777 3 242 6 465 1 617 2 509 4 872 4 0 1 676 3 000 6 600 10 169 1 126 1 613 2 610 4 924 1 491 2 076 3 839 4 5 1 543 2 571 5 143 7 513 1 101 1 492 2 191 3 903 1 396 1 800 3 146 5 0 1 441 2 250 4 125 5 742 1 081 1 399 1 898 3 190 1 321 1 610 2 653 5 5 1 359 2 000 3 385 4 507 1 065 1 325 1 686 2 671 1 261 1 473 2 288 6 0 1 292 1 800 2 829 3 616 1 053 1 264 1 526 2 281 1 211 1 370 2 007 6 5 1 236 1 636 2 400 2 954 1 042 1 213 1 402 1 981 1 170 1 289 1 786 7 0 1 188 1 500 2 063 2 450 1 033 1 170 1 305 1 744 1 135 1 224 1 607 7 5 1 146 1 385 1 792 2 060 1 026 1 132 1 228 1 555 1 105 1 171 1 460 8 0 1 110 1 286 1 571 1 751 1 019 1 099 1 164 1 400 1 078 1 126 1 337 8 5 1 078 1 200 1 390 1 504 1 013 1 070 1 112 1 273 1 055 1 087 1 233 9 0 1 049 1 125 1 238 1 303 1 008 1 044 1 068 1 166 1 035 1 054 1 144 9 5 1 023 1 059 1 109 1 137 1 004 1 021 1 031 1 077 1 016 1 026 1 067 10 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 10 5 0 979 0 947 0 906 0 885 0 996 0 981 0 973 0 934 0 985 0 977 0 941 11 0 0 959 0 900 0 825 0 787 0 993 0 963 0 950 0 877 0 972 0 957 0 888 11 5 0 941 0 857 0 754 0 704 0 990 0 947 0 929 0 828 0 960 0 939 0 841 12 0 0 925 0 818 0 692 0 633 0 988 0 932 0 912 0 784 0 949 0 922 0
121. 0 8302 0 7763 0 7279 0 5760 0 4692 0 3907 0 3310 0 2844 0 2472 0 2170 0 1921 0 1714 0 1538 1 25 0 6916 0 6432 0 6002 0 5618 0 4421 0 3589 0 2981 0 2521 0 2163 0 1878 0 1647 0 1457 0 1299 0 1165 1 30 0 5367 0 4977 0 4634 0 4328 0 3386 0 2738 0 2268 0 1914 0 1640 0 1422 0 1246 0 1102 0 0981 0 0880 1 35 0 3913 0 3617 0 3358 0 3129 0 2431 0 1957 0 1617 0 1361 0 1164 0 1009 0 0883 0 0780 0 0694 0 0622 104 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Curves for Initial Heat Rise 0 Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS Is 2 IB Iph lBseq 1 10 1 15 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 15 160 165 170 1 75 1 80 ltrip IBseq 1 05 69 6380 51 5950 41 7340 35 1750 30 3940 26 7150 23 7800 21 3760 19 3690 17 6660 16 2030 14 9330 13 8200 12 8380 11 9650 1 10 33 9580 25 2760 20 5180 17 3440 15 0260 13 2370 11 8070 10 6340 9 6521 88176 8 0995 7 4750 6 9270 6 4425 1 15 22 0350 16 4730 13 4160 11 3720 9 8756 8 7189 7 7922 7 0303 6 3916 5 8479 5 3792 4 9710 4 6123 1 20 16 0520 12 0490 9 8435 8 3659 7 2814 6 4415 5 7674 5 2122 4 7460 4 3485 4 0053 3 7060 1 25 12 4460 9 3782 7 6840 65465 5 7100 5 0610 4 5392 4 1087 3 7467 3 4375 3 1703 1 30 10 0300 7 5843 6 2313 5 3211 4 6505 4 1294 3 7096 3 3629 3 0708 2 8210 1 35 8 2921 6 2917 5 1827 4 4353 3 8838 3 4544 3 1081 2 8215 2 5799 1 40 6 9790 5 3124 4 3868 3 7619 3 3000 29399 2 6491 2 4081 1
122. 01 Drop out pick up ratio 105 Characteristic Times 1 Operation time typically 140 ms Overshoot time lt 65 ms Reset time lt 65 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P27TN 64G2 x 101 m D Protection blocking P27TN 64G2 x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Tripping output P27TN 64G2 x 3 m a D Protection blocked P27TN 64G2 x 16 m D Instantaneous output P27TN 64G2_x 23 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Measured for a variation of 2V3nt to O with VrH3Z 30 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Third Harmonic Undervoltage ANSI Code 27TN 64G2 Adaptive Set Point K 3 K V3r2 Table with Maximum Values of V3nt Vinp K 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 Curves V3rx Vinp 1 0 04 0 04 0 05 0 05 0 05 0 06 0 06 0 07 0 07 0 08 0 08 2 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 3 0 11 0 12 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 22 0 23 0 25 4 0 15 0 16 0 18 0 20 0 22 0 24 0 25 0 27 0 29 0 31 0 33 5 0 19 0 21 0 23 0 25 0 27 0 29 0 32 0 34 0 37 0 39 0 42 6 0 22 0 25 0 27 0 30 0 33 0 35 0 38 0 41 0 44 0 47 0 50 7 0 26 0 29 0 32 035 0 38 0 41 0 44 0 48 0 51 0 55 0 58 8 0 30 0 33 0 36 040 043 0 47 0 51 0 55 0 59 0 53 0 67 9 0 33 0 37 0 41 045 049 0 53 0 57 0 61 0 66 0 7
123. 01 0 0084 0 0072 0 60 0 0547 0 0470 0 0408 0 0358 0 0316 0 0282 0 0252 0 0228 0 0206 0 0188 0 0172 0 0157 0 0145 0 0120 0 0101 0 0086 0 65 0 0645 0 0554 0 0481 0 0421 0 0372 0 0831 0 0297 0 0268 0 0242 0 0221 0 0202 0 0185 0 0170 0 0141 0 0118 0 0101 0 70 0 0752 0 0645 0 0560 0 0490 0 0433 0 0885 0 0345 0 0311 0 0282 0 0256 0 0234 0 0215 0 0198 0 0163 0 0137 0 0117 0 75 0 0869 0 0745 0 0645 0 0565 0 0499 0 0444 0 0397 0 0358 0 0324 0 0295 0 0269 0 0247 0 0228 0 0188 0 0157 0 0134 0 80 0 0995 0 0852 0 0738 0 0645 0 0570 0 0506 0 0453 0 0408 0 0370 0 0336 0 0307 0 0282 0 0259 0 0214 0 0179 0 0153 0 85 0 1130 0 0967 0 0837 0 0732 0 0645 0 0574 0 0513 0 0462 0 0418 0 0380 0 0347 0 0319 0 0293 0 0242 0 0203 0 0172 0 90 0 1276 0 1091 0 0943 0 0824 0 0726 0 0645 0 0577 0 0520 0 0470 0 0427 0 0390 0 0358 0 0329 0 0271 0 0228 0 0194 0 95 0 1433 0 1223 0 1057 0 0923 0 0813 0 0722 0 0645 0 0581 0 0525 0 0477 0 0436 0 0400 0 0368 0 0303 0 0254 0 0216 1 00 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 0 0444 0 0408 0 0336 0 0282 0 0240 1 05 0 1780 0 1516 0 1307 0 1139 0 1002 0 0889 0 0794 0 0714 0 0645 0 0586 0 0535 0 0490 0 0451 0 0371 0 0811 0 0264 1 10 0 1972 0 1676 0 1444 0 1258 0 1106 0 0980 0 0875 0 0786 0 0711 0 0645 0 0589 0 0539 0 0496 0 0408 0 0342 0 0291 1 15 0 2177 0 1848 0 1589 0 1383 0 1215 0 1076 0 0961 0 0863 0 0779 0 0708 0 0645 0 0591 0 0544 0 0447 0 0374 0 0318 1 20 0 2396 0 2029 0 1744 0 1516 0 1330 0 1178 0 1051 0 0943 0 085
124. 0208 0 0179 0 0155 0 0136 0 0120 0 0107 0 0096 0 0086 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 190 0 0417 0 0382 0 0313 0 0261 0 0221 0 0189 0 0164 0 0144 0 0127 0 0113 0 0101 0 0091 0 0058 0 0040 0 0030 0 0023 195 0 0441 0 0404 0 0330 0 0275 0 0233 0 0200 0 0173 0 0152 0 0134 0 0119 0 0107 0 0096 0 0061 0 0043 0 0031 0 0024 200 0 0464 0 0426 0 0348 0 0290 0 0245 0 0211 0 0183 0 0160 0 0141 0 0126 0 0113 0 0102 0 0065 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 118 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Backup protection if the circuit breaker does not trip 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE51550 Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Description If a breaker fails to open after a tripping command detected by the non extinction of the fault current this backup protection sends a tripping command to upstream or adjacent breakers The breaker failure protection function is activated by an O1 output tripping command received from the overcurrent protection functions which trip the circuit breaker 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 64REF 87M 87T It checks for the absence of current during the time interval specified by the time delay T It may also take into account the position of the circuit breaker read on the logic inputs to determine the actual opening of the breaker Automatic activation of this protection function requires the use of the circuit breaker control function in the
125. 0264 0 0243 0 0200 0 0168 0 0143 0 0123 0 0107 0 0094 0 0083 0 0074 0 0067 0 0060 0 0038 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 65 0 0286 0 0263 0 0217 0 0182 0 0155 0 0134 0 0116 0 0102 0 0090 0 0081 0 0072 0 0065 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 70 0 0309 0 0284 0 0234 0 0196 0 0167 0 0144 0 0125 0 0110 0 0097 0 0087 0 0078 0 0070 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 75 0 0331 0 0305 0 0251 0 0211 0 0179 0 0154 0 0134 0 0118 0 0104 0 0093 0 0083 0 0075 0 0048 0 0033 0 0025 0 0019 80 0 0353 0 0325 0 0268 0 0225 0 0191 0 0165 0 0143 0 0126 0 0111 0 0099 0 0089 0 0080 0 0051 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 85 0 0376 0 0346 0 0285 0 0239 0 0203 0 0175 0 0152 0 0134 0 0118 0 0105 0 0095 0 0085 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 90 0 0398 0 0367 0 0302 0 0253 0 0215 0 0185 0 0161 0 0142 0 0125 0 0112 0 0100 0 0090 0 0058 0 0040 0 0029 0 0023 95 0 0421 0 0387 0 0319 0 0267 0 0227 0 0196 0 0170 0 0150 0 0132 0 0118 0 0106 0 0095 0 0061 0 0042 0 0031 0 0024 100 0 0444 0 0408 0 0336 0 0282 0 0240 0 0206 0 0179 0 0157 0 0139 0 0124 0 0111 0 0101 0 0064 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 105 0 0466 0 0429 0 0353 0 0296 0 0252 0 0217 0 0188 0 0165 0 0146 0 0130 0 0117 0 0106 0 0067 0 0047 0 0034 0 0026 110 0 0489 0 0450 0 0370 0 0310 0 0264 0 0227 0 0197 0 0173 0 0153 0 0137 0 0123 0 0111 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 115 0 0512 0 0471 0 0388 0 0325 0 0276 0 0237 0 0207 0 0181 0 0160 0 0143 0 0128 0 0116 0 0074 0 0051 0 0038 0 0029 120 0 0535 0 0492 0 0405 0 0339 0 0288 0 0248 0 0216 0 0189 0 0167 0 0149 0 0134 0 0
126. 07 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE50853 DE50455 DE80140 Protection Functions Ground fault protection for impedant or compensated neutral systems Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N 67NC type 1 protection characteristic angle 00 0 characteristic angle Or 0 sector Isr set point tripping zone Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N 67NC type 1 protection characteristic angle 60 0 Directional Ground Fault Type 1 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Description The function determines the projection of the residual current Ir on the characteristic line the position of which is determined by the setting of characteristic angle er in relation to the residual voltage The projection value is compared to the Isr set point This protection function is suitable for radial feeders in resistive effectively ungrounded or compensated neutral systems designed to compensate for system capacitance using a tuned inductor in the neutral This is not common in North America With compensated neutral systems it is characterized by its capacity to detect very brief repetitive faults recurrent faults In the case of Petersen coils with no additional resistance fault detection under steady state conditions is not possible due to the absence of active zero sequence current The protection function uses the transient current at the beginning of the fault to ensure tripping The 6r 0
127. 09 1 3209 1 1896 1 0798 0 9865 0 9061 0 8362 0 7749 0 7207 1 15 1 8980 1 4189 1 1556 0 9796 0 8507 0 7510 0 6712 0 6056 0 5506 0 5037 0 4634 0 4282 0 3973 Is 1 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 1 4660 1 3741 1 2911 1 2158 0 9747 0 8011 0 6713 0 5714 0 4927 0 4295 0 3779 0 3352 0 2995 0 2692 1 10 0 6725 0 6293 0 5905 0 5554 0 4435 0 3635 0 3040 0 2584 0 2226 0 1939 0 1704 0 1511 0 1349 0 1212 1 15 0 3699 0 3456 0 3237 0 3040 0 2417 0 1976 0 1649 0 1399 0 1204 0 1047 0 0920 0 0815 0 0728 0 0653 Is 1 3 IB Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Itrip IBseq 1 05 15 0540 11 1530 9 0217 7 6039 6 5703 5 7750 5 1405 4 6210 4 1871 3 8189 3 5027 3 2281 2 9875 2 7752 2 5864 1 10 6 7905 5 0545 4 1030 3 4684 3 0047 2 6470 2 3611 2 1265 1 9301 1 7633 1 6197 1 4948 1 3852 1 2883 1 15 3 9779 2 9738 2 4220 2 0530 1 7829 1 5740 1 4067 1 2692 1 1539 1 0557 0 9711 0 8974 0 8327 1 20 2 5077 1 8824 1 5378 1 3070 1 1375 1 0063 0 9010 0 8143 0 7415 0 6794 0 6257 0 5790 1 25 1 5305 1 1532 0 9449 0 8050 0 7021 0 6223 0 5582 0 5052 0 4607 0 4227 0 3898 Is 1 3 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 2 4177 2 2661 2 1292 2 0051 1 6074 1 3211 1 1071 0 9424 0 8126 0 7084 0 6233 0 5529 0 4939 0 4440 1 10 1 2021 1 1249 1 0555 0 9927 0 7927 0 6498 0 5435 0 4619 0 3979 0 3465 0 3047 0 2701 0 2412 0 2167
128. 1 3669 1 20 9 6105 6 4010 4 8272 3 8656 3 2112 2 7355 2 3737 2 0892 1 8597 1 6709 1 5129 1 3788 1 25 8 1323 5 5465 4 2465 3 4375 2 8792 2 4688 2 1537 1 9041 1 7014 1 5337 1 3927 1 30 6 9855 4 8534 3 7614 3 0722 2 5911 2 2342 1 9582 1 7380 1 5583 1 4088 1 35 6 0646 4 2771 3 3484 2 7556 2 3380 2 0258 1 7828 1 5879 1 4280 1 40 5 3051 3 7883 2 9911 2 4776 2 1131 1 8388 1 6241 1 4511 1 50 4 1166 2 9979 2 3998 2 0090 1 7283 1 5149 1 60 3 2166 2 3778 1 9239 1 6242 1 70 2 4956 1 8670 Is 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 d i 4 00 ltrip IBseq c 1 05 1 2436 1 1525 1 0718 1 0000 0 7783 0 6262 0 5165 0 4343 0 3709 0 3209 o 280640 pyze E2202 0 1972 1 10 12495 1 1559 1 0788 1 0000 0 7750 0 6217 0 5118 0 4297 0 3666 0 3168 0 2768 0 24nd 21 s 0 1943 1 15 1 2562 1 1597 1 0750 1 0000 0 7713 0 6169 0 5066 0 4247 0 3618 0 3124 0 2727 0 24048 0 2136 0 1911 1 20 1 2638 1 1640 1 0768 1 0000 0 7673 0 6115 0 5010 0 4192 0 3567 0 3076 0 2683 0 2363 0 2099 0 1877 1 25 1 2725 1 1690 1 0790 1 0000 0 7628 0 6057 0 4949 0 4133 0 3511 0 3025 0 2636 0 232 1e 3059 0 1841 1 30 1 2826 1 1747 1 0814 1 0000 0 7578 0 5992 0 4882 0 4069 0 3451 0 2969 0 2585t 0 pA 18072017 0 1802 1 35 1 2945 1 1813 1 0842 1 0000 0 7522 0 5920 0 4808 0 3998 0 3386 0 2910 0 2531T 0 gleqQ 97 0 1760 1 40 1 8085 1 1891 1 0874 1 0000 0 7459 0 5841 0 4728 0 3921 0 3315 0 2844 0 2471 0 Gm 9 19 0 1715 1 50 1 3463 1 2094 1 0958 1 0000 0 7306 0 56
129. 1 A 5 ACT Zero 1 ACT CSH Primary Rated 5 ACT IDMT 0 1 to INr Sequence CT or 5 ACT Current 1 A to 6 25 CSH 30 Aux CT Rate CSH KA INr IN as interface 1A 2 Turns 5B Standard 5 A CT or DT 0 1 to 15Inr 5A 1ACT Zero EEE sh 5 ACT CSH Primary Rated Sensitive 1 A CT IDMT 0 1 to INr Sequence CT s or 1 ACT Current 1 A to 6 25 CSH 30 Aux CT EDT CSH kA INrzIN 10 as interface sensitivity X10 6B External Sum of DT 0 1 to 15 INr CSH 30 Zero 1 ACT CSH Set Sepam Series Phase CT IDMT 0 1 to INr Sequence CT as or 5 ACT 80 For INr IN Secondaries 1 A Interface CSH Primary Rated or 5 A Current 1A to 6 25 kA 6B External Sum of DT 0 1 to15INr CSH 30 Zero 1 ACT CSH INr IN 10 Ipri 1 A to Sensitive Phase CT IDMT 0 1 to INr Sequence CT as or5ACT 6 25 kA Secondaries 1 A Interface 14 17 CSH sensitivity or5 A X10 75 18 _ 7B Standard 1 A CT or DT 0 1 to 15 Inr 1 A 5 A Zero 5ACT ACE Inr kxN 5ACT IDMT 0 1 to INr Sequence CT 1 ACT ACE N CT turns 00578 ACE 990 lt K lt 26316 ACE 990 52 14 17 See alternate CSH30 secondary connection in the Sepam Series 80 Installation Use Commissioning and Maintenance manual Note INr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase ct s and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port c
130. 1 X R times the calculated voltage In many applications it is not possible to completely avoid saturation Under these conditions it is helpful to have machine differential ct s with the same knee point voltage The equations apply to the phase current transformers placed on either side of the machine Ina is the CT rated secondary current Rct is the CT internal resistance Rw is the resistance of the CT load and wiring The setting range of the Is set point depends on the rated values of the CTs on the main channels la Ib Ic and the additional channels l a I b l c The setting range is the intersection of 0 05 In 0 5 In with 0 05 I N 0 5 I N When the rated values are identical the setting range is optimum Ifthere is no intersection the function cannot be used Characteristics Settings Is Set Point Setting range max 0 05 INA 0 05 INB lt Is lt min 0 5 Ina 0 5 INB Accuracy 1 5 Is or 0 4 IN Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 Advanced Settings Pick up of restraint on CT loss Setting range On off Characteristic Times Operation time Operation time of differential current function Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time 35 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P81L x 101 D Li Protection blockingblock P81L x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Protection output P87M 1 3 D Phase a fau
131. 1 breaker tri See Logic diagram above V_TRIPPED en Internal close order 0 T V_CLOSED To O3 by default T 200 ms breaker close Breaker closed Controlling a Contactor Without Mechanical Latching The block diagram below represents the following parameter setting m type of switchgear Contactor m output O1 open close Internal trip order O1 contactor i memes 1 open close a Internal close ol Control See Logic diagram above order S V_CLOSED T 200 ms Contactor open Loss of supply 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved E 63230 216 230B1 189 ectric DE52275 Control and Monitoring Switchgear Control Functions ANSI Code 94 69 Processing Internal Switchgear Control Commands Block Diagram V_MIMIC_OPENCB Trip by AT V_AT_TRIPPING V_2 3_TRIPPING E 0 T i ons Internal trip order Trip by protection D ANSI 12 14 21B 24 27 27D 27TN T 200 ms V_TRIPPED 32P 32Q 37 37P 38 49T 40 46 47 48 51LR 49RMS 50 27 50 51 50N 51N 50V 51V 59 59N 64REF 67 67N 78PS 81H 81L 81R 87M 87T configured to trip circuit breaker Trip by recloser 79 logic discrimination V LOGDSC TRIP de excitation V DE EXCIT ORD genset shutdown V SHUTDN ORD load shedding V LOADSH ORD equations or Logipam V TRIPCB External trip 1 Ix External trip 2 Ix External trip 3 Ix Buchholz trip Ix Pressure trip
132. 109 0 7346 0 6700 0 6146 0 5666 0 5245 0 4874 130 2 3308 1 7838 1 4663 1 2493 1 0885 0 9632 0 8622 0 7789 0 7089 0 6491 0 5975 0 5525 0 5129 135 2 7726 1 9951 1 6035 1 3499 1 1672 1 0275 0 9163 0 8253 0 7494 0 6849 0 6295 0 5813 0 5390 140 2 2634 1 7626 1 4618 1 2528 1 0962 0 9734 0 8740 0 7916 0 7220 0 6625 0 6109 0 5658 145 2 6311 1 9518 1 5877 1 3463 1 1701 1 0341 0 9252 0 8356 0 7606 0 6966 0 6414 0 5934 150 3 2189 2 1855 1 7319 1 4495 1 2498 1 0986 0 9791 0 8817 0 8007 0 7320 0 6729 0 6217 155 2 4908 1 9003 1 5645 1 3364 1 1676 1 0361 0 9301 0 8424 0 7686 0 7055 0 6508 160 2 9327 2 1030 1 6946 1 4313 1 2417 1 0965 0 9808 0 8860 0 8066 0 7391 0 6809 165 2 3576 1 8441 1 5361 1 3218 1 1609 1 0343 0 9316 0 8461 0 7739 0 7118 170 2 6999 2 0200 1 6532 1 4088 1 2296 1 0908 0 9793 0 8873 0 8099 0 7438 175 3 2244 2 2336 1 7858 1 5041 1 3035 1 1507 1 0294 0 9302 0 8473 0 7768 180 2 5055 1 9388 1 6094 1 3832 1 2144 1 0822 0 9751 0 8861 0 8109 185 2 8802 2 1195 1 7272 1 4698 1 2825 1 1379 1 0220 0 9265 0 8463 190 3 4864 2 3401 1 8608 1 5647 1 3555 1 1970 1 0713 0 9687 0 8829 195 2 6237 2 0149 1 6695 1 4343 1 2597 1 1231 1 0126 0 9209 200 3 0210 2 1972 1 7866 1 5198 1 3266 1 1778 1 0586 0 9605 114 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Cold Curves for Es0 0 Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves
133. 1101 contactor closed Input 1 Active Open inhibit E O101 Output 1 Active inhibit 63230 216 230B1 253 Control and Monitoring Functions Protection Button All application protection functions Inputs Button Logic inputs 1101 to 1114 Description Control Matrix The control matrix is used for assigning the logic outputs and LEDs to data produced by the protection functions control logic and logic inputs Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected The matrix can also be used to display the alarms associated with the data It guarantees the consistency of the parameter setting with the predefined functions The following data are managed in the control matrix and can be set using the SFT2841 software tool Control Matrix Inputs Meaning Protection tripping output and additional outputs when applicable According to configuration Comments If first MES120 module is configured Logic inputs 1201 to 1214 According to configuration If second MES120 module is configured Logic inputs 1301 to 1314 Equations Button V1 to V20 Logipam Button MATOO0 1 to MAT128 Logic Button Switchgear Control According to configuration Meaning Logic equation editor outputs Meaning Logipam output variables to the control matrix Meaning If third MES120 module is configured Comments Comments Only the variables actually us
134. 121 0 0077 0 0053 0 0039 0 0030 125 0 0558 0 0513 0 0422 0 0353 0 0300 0 0258 0 0225 0 0197 0 0175 0 0156 0 0139 0 0126 0 0080 0 0056 0 0041 0 0031 130 0 0581 0 0534 0 0439 0 0368 0 0313 0 0269 0 0234 0 0205 0 0182 0 0162 0 0145 0 0131 0 0084 0 0058 0 0043 0 0033 135 0 0604 0 0555 0 0457 0 0382 0 0325 0 0279 0 0243 0 0213 0 0189 0 0168 0 0151 0 0136 0 0087 0 0060 0 0044 0 0034 140 0 0627 0 0576 0 0474 0 0397 0 0337 0 0290 0 0252 0 0221 0 0196 0 0174 0 0156 0 0141 0 0090 0 0062 0 0046 0 0035 145 0 0650 0 0598 0 0491 0 0411 0 0349 0 0300 0 0261 0 0229 0 0203 0 0181 0 0162 0 0146 0 0093 0 0065 0 0047 0 0036 150 0 0673 0 0619 0 0509 0 0426 0 0361 0 0311 0 0270 0 0237 0 0210 0 0187 0 0168 0 0151 0 0096 0 0067 0 0049 0 0038 155 0 0696 0 0640 0 0526 0 0440 0 0374 0 0321 0 0279 0 0245 0 0217 0 0193 0 0173 0 0156 0 0100 0 0069 0 0051 0 0039 160 0 0720 0 0661 0 0543 0 0455 0 0386 0 0332 0 0289 0 0253 0 0224 0 0200 0 0179 0 0161 0 0103 0 0071 0 0052 0 0040 165 0 0743 0 0683 0 0561 0 0469 0 0398 0 0343 0 0298 0 0261 0 0231 0 0206 0 0185 0 0166 0 0106 0 0074 0 0054 0 0041 170 0 0766 0 0704 0 0578 0 0484 0 0411 0 0353 0 0307 0 0269 0 0238 0 0212 0 0190 0 0171 0 0109 0 0076 0 0056 0 0043 175 0 0790 0 0726 0 0596 0 0498 0 0423 0 0364 0 0316 0 0277 0 0245 0 0218 0 0196 0 0177 0 0113 0 0078 0 0057 0 0044 180 0 0813 0 0747 0 0613 0 0513 0 0435 0 0374 0 0325 0 0285 0 0252 0 0225 0 0201 0 0182 0 0116 0 0080 0 0059 0 0045
135. 154 1 25 1 0000 0 6820 0 5222 0 4227 0 3541 0 3036 0 2648 0 2341 0 2092 0 1886 0 1713 Is 1 3 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 0 2688 0 2491 0 2317 0 2162 0 1682 0 1354 0 1117 0 0939 0 0802 0 0694 0 0607 0 0535 0 0476 0 0426 1 10 0 2499 0 2311 0 2146 0 2000 0 1550 0 1243 0 1023 0 0859 0 0733 0 0633 0 0554 0 0488 0 0434 0 0389 1 15 0 2268 0 2094 0 1941 0 1805 0 1393 0 1114 0 0915 0 0767 0 0653 0 0564 0 0492 0 0434 0 0386 0 0345 1 20 0 1974 0 1819 0 1682 0 1562 0 1199 0 0955 0 0783 0 0655 0 0557 0 0481 0 0419 0 0369 0 0328 0 0293 1 25 0 1565 0 1438 0 1327 0 1230 0 0938 0 0745 0 0609 0 0508 0 0432 0 0372 0 0324 0 0285 0 0253 0 0226 Is 1 41B Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Itrip IBseq 1 05 5 9304 3 3874 2 3488 1 7816 1 4243 1 1788 1 0000 0 8642 0 7577 0 6721 0 6019 0 5434 0 4938 0 4515 0 4148 1 10 4 2662 2 6278 1 8931 1 4701 1 1942 1 0000 0 8560 0 7451 0 6571 0 5857 0 5267 0 4771 0 4350 0 3988 1 15 3 2252 2 0806 1 5388 1 2158 1 0000 0 8453 0 7289 0 6383 0 5657 0 5064 0 4570 0 4154 0 3797 1 20 2 4862 1 6559 1 2488 1 0000 0 8307 0 7077 0 6141 0 5405 0 4811 0 4323 0 3914 0 3567 1 25 1 9151 1 3061 1 0000 0 8095 0 6780 0 5814 0 5072 0 4484 0 4007 0 3612 0 3280 1 30 1 4393 1 0000 0 7750 0 6330 0 5339 0 4603 0 4035 0 3581 0 3211 0 2903 1 35 1 0000 0 7053 0 5521 0 4544 0 3855 0 3340 0 2940 0 2618 0 2355 Is 1 4 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1
136. 2 I Opposite side Remote control ox e T 441 9 Remote control blocked Local blocked Local i Breaker close ready l Close order I Remote control blocked Local dresse eee 0 Opposite side Remote control O Breaker close ready blocked Local l Close order gl O NO breaker close o Automatic close order l Opposite side breaker closed o T 0 Breaker closed l Opposite side breaker open 2 0 Breaker open l Opposite side breaker rackedouto a Hy Sid Breaker racked out l Trip o Close o Automatic close order 0 T NO breaker close O l Breaker closed o D 1 x Opposite side breaker closed l Breaker open 0 gt o Opposite side breaker open l Breakerrackedouto 4 9 Opposite side breaker racked out I o Tipo O Close o l l l l Main 1 i Main 2 N O l N O Racked out o le ee Open Closed optional wiring 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 235 PE50458 Control and Monitoring Functions SETIBAT Sepan series 0 Som station 87 Pie EEE eege SFT2841 parameter setting of predefined control logic e Acn ss Automatic Transfer Main Main Implementation Parameter Setting Prede
137. 2 0 0773 0 0705 0 0645 0 0593 0 0488 0 0408 0 0347 1 25 0 2629 0 2223 0 1907 0 1656 0 1452 0 1285 0 1145 0 1028 0 0927 0 0842 0 0767 0 0702 0 0645 0 0530 0 0444 0 0377 1 30 0 2877 0 2428 0 2080 0 1804 0 1581 0 1397 0 1245 0 1116 0 1007 0 0913 0 0832 0 0762 0 0700 0 0575 0 0481 0 0408 1 35 0 3142 0 2646 0 2263 0 1960 0 1716 0 1516 0 1349 0 1209 0 1091 0 0989 0 0901 0 0824 0 0757 0 0621 0 0520 0 0441 1 40 0 3424 0 2877 0 2456 0 2125 0 1858 0 1640 0 1459 0 1307 0 1178 0 1067 0 0972 0 0889 0 0816 0 0670 0 0560 0 0475 145 0 3725 0 3122 0 2661 0 2298 0 2007 0 1770 0 1574 0 1409 0 1269 0 1150 0 1047 0 0957 0 0878 0 0720 0 0602 0 0510 1 50 0 4047 0 3383 0 2877 0 2481 0 2165 0 1907 0 1694 0 1516 0 1365 0 1236 0 1124 0 1028 0 0943 0 0773 0 0645 0 0547 1 55 0 4391 0 3659 0 3105 0 2674 0 2330 0 2050 0 1820 0 1627 0 1464 0 1325 0 1205 0 1101 0 1010 0 0828 0 0691 0 0585 1 60 0 4759 0 3953 0 3347 0 2877 0 2503 0 2201 0 1952 0 1744 0 1568 0 1418 0 1290 0 1178 0 1080 0 0884 0 0738 0 0625 1 65 0 5154 0 4266 0 3603 0 3091 0 2686 0 2358 0 2089 0 1865 0 1676 0 1516 0 1377 0 1258 0 1153 0 0943 0 0786 0 0666 1 70 0 5578 0 4599 0 3873 0 3316 0 2877 0 2523 0 2233 0 1992 0 1789 0 1617 0 1469 0 1340 0 1229 0 1004 0 0837 0 0709 Iph IB 7 00 750 800 850 900 950 10 00 1250 15 00 17 50 20 00 la IB 0 50 0 0051 0 0045 0 0039 0 0035 0 0031 0 0028 0 0025 0 0016 0 0011 0 0008 0 0006 0 55 0 0062 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0034 0 0030 0 0019 0 0013 0 0010 0 0008 0 60 0 0074 0 0064 0 0056 0 00
138. 2 1371 1 5422 1 2267 1 0218 0 8755 0 7647 0 6776 0 6072 0 5489 1 50 2 2188 1 6159 1 2935 1 0829 0 9316 0 8165 0 7257 0 6519 1 55 2 2930 1 6832 1 3550 1 1394 0 9838 0 8650 0 7708 1 60 2 3609 1 7452 1 4121 1 1921 1 0327 0 9106 1 65 2 4233 1 8027 1 4652 1 2415 1 0787 1 70 2 4813 1 8563 1 5150 1 2879 Iph IB 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 4 80 la IB 1 10 0 0779 0 0726 0 0562 0 0451 0 0371 0 0312 0 0266 0 0230 0 0201 0 0177 0 0157 0 0141 0 0127 0 0115 0 0105 0 0096 1 15 0 1223 0 1137 0 0877 0 0702 0 0576 0 0483 0 0411 0 0355 0 0310 0 0273 0 0243 0 0217 0 0196 0 0177 0 0161 0 0147 1 20 0 1708 0 1586 0 1217 0 0970 0 0795 0 0665 0 0566 0 0488 0 0426 0 0375 0 0333 0 0298 0 0268 0 0243 0 0221 0 0202 1 25 0 2240 0 2076 0 1584 0 1258 0 1028 0 0858 0 0729 0 0628 0 0547 0 0482 0 0428 0 0382 0 0344 0 0311 0 0283 0 0259 1 30 0 2826 0 2614 0 1981 0 1566 0 1276 0 1063 0 0902 0 0776 0 0676 0 0594 0 0527 0 0471 0 0424 0 0383 0 0348 0 0318 1 35 0 3474 0 3204 0 2410 0 1897 0 1541 0 1281 0 1085 0 0932 0 0811 0 0713 0 0632 0 0564 0 0507 0 0458 0 0417 0 0380 1 40 0 4194 0 3857 0 2877 0 2253 0 1823 0 1512 0 1278 0 1097 0 0953 0 0837 0 0741 0 0661 0 0594 0 0537 0 0488 0 0445 1 45 0 4999 0 4581 0 3384 0 2635 0 2125 0 1758 0 1483 0 1271 0 1103 0 0967 0 0856 0 0763 0 0686 0 0619 0 0562 0 0513 1 50 0 5907 0 5390 0 3938 0 3046 0 2446 0 2018 0 1699 0 1454 0 1260 0 1104 0 0976 0 0870 0 0781 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 1
139. 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Metering Functions Machine Operation Assistance Apparent Positive Sequence and Phase to Phase Impedances Apparent Positive Sequence Impedance Operation Apparent positive sequence impedance is used to facilitate the implementation ofthe underimpedance field loss protection function ANSI 40 zi M I Readout The measurement may be accessed via m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 200 kQ Units Q Resolution 0 001 Q Accuracy 1 5 96 Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 At IN VN under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Apparent Phase to Phase Impedances Operation Apparent phase to phase impedances are used to facilitate the implementation of the backup underimpedance protection function ANSI 21B They are expressed as the ratio of phase to phase voltage to phase to phase current Y gt 25 Zab Wabi with tab la 1 I ab gt gt gt Vbc with Ibc Ib Ic Zbc TI I bc gt m Zac Vac with lac Ic la l ac Readout The measurement may be accessed via m aPCwith SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 200 kQ Units Q Resolution 0 001 Q Accuracy 1 5 Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 At In VN under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schnei
140. 216 230B1 5 ectric Introduction Selection Table Substation Transformer Motor Generator Bus Cap Phase overcurrent 1 50 51 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Ground fault Sensitive ground 50N 51N 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 fault 4 50G 51G Breaker failure 50BF 1 il 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Negative sequence unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Thermal overload for cables 49RMS 2 2 2 Thermal overload for machines 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS 2 Capacitor bank unbalance 51C 8 Restricted ground fault 64REF 2 2 2 2 Two winding transformer 87T 1 1 1 differential Machine differential 87M 1 1 Directional phase overcurrent fl 67 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Directional ground fault 1 67N 67NC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Directional active overpower 32P 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Directional reactive overpower 32Q 1 1 1 1 1 1 Directional active underpower 37P 2 2 Phase undercurrent 37 1 1 1 Excessive starting time locked 48 51LR 1 1 1 rotor Starts per hour 66 1 1 1 Field loss underimpedance 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pole slip 78PS 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overspeed 2 set points 12 Hn o o H a o Underspeed 2 set points 14 o o n s a o Voltage restrained overcurrent 50V 51V 2 2 2 Underimpedance 21B 1 1 1 Inadvertent energization 50 27 1 1 1 Third harmonic undervoltage 27TN 64G2 2 2 2 100 stator ground fault 64G Overexcit
141. 230 216 230B1 delay before load shedding Schneider Load Shedding Operation The purpose of load shedding is to reduce the load on the electrical network in order to keep the voltage within an acceptable range Load shedding may be triggered by m a command from outside Sepam in the presence of a logic input assigned for the reception of load shedding commands Commands can be delayed m a voltage dip detected by the delayed output of Sepam 27D protection unit 1 typical setting 40 V N Load shedding triggers m tripping by the switchgear control function m Block closing as long as the load shedding command is maintained The load shedding command is maintained as long as one of the following three conditions is present m external command via logic input W positive sequence voltage detected by 27D unit 1 less than load shedding voltage threshold m insufficient positive sequence voltage detected by the delayed 27D unit 2 for a restart command to be given The time delay for the detection of correct voltage recovery must be shorter than the load shedding delay 27D unit 1 in order for the load shedding command to be maintained correctly This unit is also used by the restart function The function may be validated by the switchgear closed and not racked out conditions Block Diagram load shedding V LOADSH ORD Characteristics Settings Activity Setting range On Off Delay Before Load Shedding Settin
142. 24 IN expressed in amperes IDMT 0 5 IN lt Is 2 4 IN expressed in amperes Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 with min reset variance of 0 015 IN Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Is Setting range Definite time Inst 50 ms lt Tx 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 sor TMS 2 Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings Timer Hold T1 Setting range Definite time 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT time 0 5 to 20s Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is confirmed instantaneous typically 35 ms Overshoot time lt 50 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P50V 51V_x_101 Protection blocking P50V 51V_x_113 D D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P50V 51V_x_1 Delayed output P50V 51V_x_3 D D D Drop out P50V 51V_x_4 Phase a fault P50V 51V_x_7 a Phase b fault P50V 51V_x_8 a Phase c fault P50V 51V_x_9 E Protection blocked P50V 51V_x_16 x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode m Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 m Very inverse VIT
143. 2407 0 2136 0 1914 0 1728 0 1572 0 1438 135 1 5870 0 9734 0 7077 0 5543 0 4535 0 3819 0 3285 0 2871 0 2541 0 2271 0 2048 0 1860 0 1699 140 2 3979 1 2417 0 8668 0 6662 0 5390 0 4507 0 3857 0 3358 0 2963 0 2643 0 2378 0 2156 0 1967 145 1 6094 1 0561 0 7921 0 6325 0 5245 0 4463 0 3869 0 3403 0 3028 0 2719 0 2461 0 2243 150 2 1972 1 2897 0 9362 0 7357 0 6042 0 5108 0 4408 0 3864 0 3429 0 3073 0 2776 0 2526 155 3 8067 1 5950 1 1047 0 8508 0 6909 0 5798 0 4978 0 4347 0 3846 0 3439 0 3102 0 2817 160 2 0369 1 3074 0 9808 0 7857 0 6539 0 5583 0 4855 0 4282 0 3819 0 3438 0 3118 165 2 8478 1 5620 1 1304 0 8905 0 7340 0 6226 0 5390 0 4738 0 4215 0 3786 0 3427 170 1 9042 1 3063 1 0076 0 8210 0 6914 0 5955 0 5215 0 4626 0 4146 0 3747 175 2 4288 1 5198 1 1403 0 9163 0 7652 0 6554 0 5717 0 5055 0 4520 0 4077 180 3 5988 1 7918 1 2933 1 0217 0 8449 0 7191 0 6244 0 5504 0 4908 0 4418 185 2 1665 1 4739 1 1394 0 9316 0 7872 0 6802 0 5974 0 5312 0 4772 190 2 7726 1 6946 1 2730 1 0264 0 8602 0 7392 0 6466 0 5733 0 5138 195 4 5643 1 9782 1 4271 1 1312 0 9390 0 8019 0 6985 0 6173 0 5518 200 2 3755 1 6094 1 2483 1 0245 0 8688 0 7531 0 6633 0 5914 MB 185 19 19 200 220 240 260 280 3 00 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 4 60 Es 105 0 0209 0 0193 0 0180 0 0168 0 0131 0 0106 0 0087 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0033 0 0030 0 0027 0 0025 110 0 0422 0 0391 0 0363 0 0339 0 0264 0 0212 0 0175 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0095 0 0084 0 0075 0 0067 0 0060 0 0055 0 0050 115 0 0639 0 0592
144. 3 0 6808 0 6314 0 5878 0 5491 0 4295 0 3473 1 35 2 6571 2 0161 1 6607 1 4212 1 2445 1 1069 0 9959 0 9041 0 8267 0 7604 0 7029 0 6526 0 6081 0 4725 0 3804 1 40 2 6915 2 0488 1 6918 1 4508 1 2727 1 1338 1 0217 0 9287 0 8502 0 7829 0 7245 0 6733 0 5191 0 4159 1 45 2 7249 2 0805 1 7220 1 4796 1 3001 1 1601 1 0467 0 9527 0 8733 0 8050 0 7458 0 5699 0 4542 1 50 2 7571 2 1112 1 7513 1 5075 1 3269 1 1856 1 0712 0 9762 0 8958 0 8267 0 6253 0 4953 1 55 2 7883 2 1410 1 7797 1 5347 1 3529 1 2106 1 0952 0 9992 0 9179 0 6859 0 5397 1 60 2 8186 2 1699 1 8074 1 5612 1 3783 1 2349 1 1185 1 0217 0 7527 0 5878 1 65 2 8480 2 1980 1 8343 1 5870 1 4031 1 2587 1 1414 0 8267 0 6399 1 70 2 8766 2 2254 1 8605 1 6122 1 4272 1 2819 0 9091 0 6966 1 la is the permissible current for the cable 96 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 3 Protection Functions Curves for Initial Heat Rise 0 1 Thermal Overload for Cables ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Iph IB 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 4 20 440 460 480 500 550 6 00 6 50 la IB 0 50 0 0377 0 0324 0 0282 0 0247 0 0219 0 0195 0 0175 0 0157 0 0143 0 0130 0 0119 0 0109 0 0101 0 0083 0 0070 0 0059 0 55 0 0458 0 0393 0 0342 0 0300 0 0265 0 0236 0 0212 0 0191 0 0173 0 0157 0 0144 0 0132 0 0122 0 01
145. 30B1 15 DE50333 Metering Functions Processing Measured Signals Measured Physical Values Sepam measures the following physical values m phase currents 3l m residual current Ir m phase voltages 3V m residual voltage Vr gt RMS a En Sepam processes each measured signal to produce all the values necessary for xH3 metering diagnosis and protection Vr H The charts below identify according to the various functions the values produced V gt H3 from the signals measured with a 7 gt RMS m RMS RMS value up to the 13th harmonic gt H1 m H1 fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component gt XH1 m gt Hi vector sum of the fundamental components of the three phases 2 G m H3 3rd harmonic component i gt H1 m gt H3 vector sum of the 3rd harmonic components of the three phases Values produced by Sepam from the signals measured Values Used by the Metering and Diagnosis Functions 3I Ir 3V Vr Metering RMS H1 ZH1 H1 RMS Hi ZH1 zZH3 H1 H3 RMS phase current la Ib Ic Calculated residual current Ir Demand current la Ib Ic Peak demand current lamax Ibmax Icmax Measured residual current Ir l r Voltage Vab Vbc Vac Van Vbn Vcn V ab V bc V ac V an V bn V cn Residual voltage Vr Positive sequence voltage V1 rotation direction Negative sequence voltage V2 Frequency f Active power P Pa Pb Pc
146. 336 EECElectromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive n 92 31 EECAmendment n 93 68 EECAmendment m 73 23 EECLow Voltage Directive n 93 68 EECAmendment UL UL508 CSA C222 no 14 95 File E212533 CSA CSA C22 2 no 14 95 no 94 M91 no 0 17 00 File 210625 1 Except for communication 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode 2 Except for communication 1 kVrms 3 Sepam must be stored in its original packing 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved eed 63230 216 230B1 9 lectric 10 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Instrument Transformer Inputs General Settings Characteristics Processing Measured Signals Phase Current Residual Current Demand Current Peak Demand Currents Phase to Phase Voltage Phase to Neutral Voltage Residual Voltage Neutral Point Voltage Positive Sequence Voltage Negative Sequence Voltage Frequency Active Reactive and Apparent Power 12 13 14 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Peak Demand Active and Reactive Power Power Factor pf 29 Active and Reactive Energy Temperature Rotation Speed Phasor Diagram Network Diagnosis Machine Operation Assistance Switchgear Diagnosis Schneider 63230 216 230B1 amp Electric 30 31 32 33 34 41 51 11 DE50583 Metering Functions Instrument Transformer Inputs S
147. 470 0 0408 0 0358 0 0316 0 0282 0 0252 0 0228 0 0145 0 0101 0 0074 0 0056 1 55 0 0503 0 0437 0 0883 0 0338 0 0301 0 0270 0 0243 0 0155 0 0107 0 0079 0 0060 1 60 0 0537 0 0466 0 0408 0 0361 0 0321 0 0288 0 0259 0 0165 0 0114 0 0084 0 0064 1 65 0 0572 0 0496 0 0435 0 0384 0 0342 0 0306 0 0276 0 0176 0 0122 0 0089 0 0068 1 70 0 0608 0 0527 0 0462 0 0408 0 0363 0 0325 0 0293 0 0187 0 0129 0 0095 0 0073 1 la is the permissible current for the cable 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 97 amp Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Cables ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Curves for Initial Heat Rise 100 Iph IB 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 1 85 1 90 la lB 1 10 1 0531 0 6487 0 4673 0 3629 0 2948 0 2469 0 2113 0 1839 0 1622 0 1446 0 1300 0 1178 0 1074 0 0984 0 0907 0 0839 1 15 1 3203 0 8518 0 6300 0 4977 0 4094 0 3460 0 2984 0 2613 0 2316 0 2073 0 1871 0 1700 0 1555 0 1429 0 1319 1 20 1 5243 1 0152 0 7656 0 6131 0 5093 0 4339 0 3765 0 3314 0 2950 0 2650 0 2400 0 2187 0 2004 0 1846 1 25 1 6886 1 1517 0 8817 0 7138 0 5978 0 5126 0 4472 0 3954 0 3533 0 3185 0 2892 0 2642 0 2427 1 30 1 8258 1 2685 0 9831 0 8030 0 6772 0 5840 0 5118 0 4543 0 4073 0 3682 0 3352 0 3070 1 35 1 9433 1 3705 1 0729 0 8830 0 7492 0 6491 0 5713 0 5088 0 4576 0 4148 0 3785 1 40 2 0460 1 4610 1 1536 0 9555 0 8149 0 7092 0 6263 0 5596 0 5047 0 4586 1 45
148. 5 0 4082 0 3603 0 3207 0 2877 0 2597 0 2358 0 2152 0 1972 0 60 1 9110 1 3269 1 0217 0 8267 0 6897 0 5878 0 5090 0 4463 0 3953 0 3531 0 3178 0 2877 0 2619 0 2396 0 65 1 9823 1 3907 1 0793 0 8789 0 7373 0 6314 0 5491 0 4832 0 4295 0 3849 0 3473 0 3153 0 2877 0 70 2 0488 1 4508 1 1338 0 9287 0 7829 0 6733 0 5878 0 5191 0 4629 0 4159 0 3763 0 3424 0 75 2 1112 1 5075 1 1856 0 9762 0 8267 0 7138 0 6253 0 5540 0 4953 0 4463 0 4047 0 80 2 1699 1 5612 1 2349 1 0217 0 8687 0 7527 0 6615 0 5878 0 5270 0 4759 0 85 2 2254 1 6122 1 2819 1 0652 0 9091 0 7904 0 6966 0 6206 0 5578 0 90 2 2780 1 6607 1 3269 1 1069 0 9480 0 8267 0 7306 0 6526 0 95 2 3279 1 7070 1 3699 1 1470 0 9855 0 8618 0 7636 1 00 2 3755 1 7513 1 4112 1 1856 1 0217 0 8958 1 05 2 4209 1 7937 1 4508 1 2228 1 0566 1 10 2 4643 1 8343 1 4890 1 2587 1 15 2 5060 1 8734 1 5258 1 20 2 5459 1 9110 1 25 2 5844 Iph IB 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 la IB 0 50 0 1475 0 1365 0 1266 0 1178 0 1099 0 1028 0 0963 0 0905 0 0852 0 0803 0 0759 0 0718 0 0680 0 0645 0 0530 0 0444 0 55 0 1815 0 1676 0 1553 0 1444 0 1346 0 1258 0 1178 0 1106 0 1040 0 0980 0 0925 0 0875 0 0829 0 0786 0 0645 0 0539 0 60 0 2201 0 2029 0 1878 0 1744 0 1623 0 1516 0 1418 0 1330 0 1251 0 1178 0 1111 0 1051 0 0995 0 0943 0 0773 0 0645 0 65 0 2637 0 2428 0 2243 0 2080 0 1934 0 1804 0 1686 0 1581 0 1485 0 1397 0 1318 0 1245 0 1178 0 1116 0 0913 0 0762 0 70 0 3132 0 2877 0 2653 0 2456 0 22
149. 5 KQ Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 0 001 Q or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 105 of circle 2 diameter T1 Time Tripping Time Delay Circle 1 Setting range 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit T2 time Tripping Time Delay Circle 2 Setting range 100 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times 1 Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms from 0 to C1 typically 25 ms Pick up lt 35 ms from 0 to C2 typically 25 ms lt 40 ms Overshoot time Reset time 50 ms for T1 2 0 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P40 1 101 L D Protection blocking P401 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P40_1_1 Delayed output P40_1_3 D D D Protection blocked P40_1_16 D D Instantaneous protection 1 circle 1 P40_1_23 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Loss of Field ANSI Code 40 Example 1 Synchronous Generator Synchronous Generator Data m S 3 15 MVA m VwuNni 6 3kV m Xd 233 m Xd 21 Protection setting To set the protection function it is necessary to calculate the rated generator impedance ZN m 1B S V3 VunNt 289A m ZN VuN1 3 IB 12 586 Q Generally speaking circle 1 is set with a di
150. 50 0 0045 0 0040 0 0036 0 0023 0 0016 0 0012 0 0009 0 65 0 0087 0 0075 0 0066 0 0059 0 0052 0 0047 0 0042 0 0027 0 0019 0 0014 0 0011 0 70 0 0101 0 0087 0 0077 0 0068 0 0061 0 0054 0 0049 0 0031 0 0022 0 0016 0 0012 0 75 0 0115 0 0101 0 0088 0 0078 0 0070 0 0063 0 0056 0 0036 0 0025 0 0018 0 0014 0 80 0 0131 0 0114 0 0101 0 0089 0 0079 0 0071 0 0064 0 0041 0 0028 0 0021 0 0016 0 85 0 0149 0 0129 0 0114 0 0101 0 0090 0 0080 0 0073 0 0046 0 0032 0 0024 0 0018 0 90 0 0167 0 0145 0 0127 0 0113 0 0101 0 0090 0 0081 0 0052 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 0 95 0 0186 0 0162 0 0142 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0058 0 0040 0 0030 0 0023 1 00 0 0206 0 0179 0 0157 0 0139 0 0124 0 0111 0 0101 0 0064 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 1 05 0 0228 0 0198 0 0174 0 0154 0 0137 0 0123 0 0111 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 130 0 0250 0 0217 0 0191 0 0169 0 0151 0 0135 0 0122 0 0078 0 0054 0 0040 0 0030 135 0 0274 0 0238 0 0209 0 0185 0 0165 0 0148 0 0133 0 0085 0 0059 0 0043 0 0033 1 20 0 0298 0 0259 0 0228 0 0201 0 0179 0 0161 0 0145 0 0093 0 0064 0 0047 0 0036 1 25 0 0824 0 0282 0 0247 0 0219 0 0195 0 0175 0 0157 0 0101 0 0070 0 0051 0 0039 1 30 0 0351 0 0305 0 0268 0 0237 0 0211 0 0189 0 0170 0 0109 0 0075 0 0055 0 0042 1 35 0 0379 0 0329 0 0289 0 0255 0 0228 0 0204 0 0184 0 0117 0 0081 0 0060 0 0046 1 40 0 0408 0 0355 0 0311 0 0275 0 0245 0 0220 0 0198 0 0126 0 0087 0 0064 0 0049 1 45 0 0439 0 0381 0 0834 0 0295 0 0263 0 0236 0 0212 0 0135 0 0094 0 0069 0 0053 1 50 0 0
151. 50 5 1152 3 9169 3 2491 27969 2 4617 2 1997 1 60 3 8403 2 9564 2 4625 2 1271 1 70 2 8932 2 2383 Is 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 190 195 200 220 240 260 280 3 00 320 340 360 380 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 11 1840 10 4830 9 8495 9 2753 7 4358 6 1115 5 1214 4 3594 3 7590 3 2768 2 8832 2 5574 2 2846 2 0537 1 10 6 0114 5 6254 5 2781 4 9642 3 9642 3 2494 2 7177 2 3099 1 9896 1 7328 1 5235 1 3506 1 2059 1 0836 1 15 4 2947 4 0117 3 7581 3 5295 2 8064 2 2986 1 9142 1 6245 1 3975 1 2159 1 0683 0 9464 0 8446 0 7586 1 20 3 4426 3 2091 3 0008 2 8138 2 2265 1 8138 1 5104 1 2795 1 0993 0 9555 0 8388 0 7426 0 6624 0 5946 1 25 2 9368 2 7311 2 5486 2 3855 1 8775 1 5240 1 2659 1 0704 0 9184 0 7974 0 6994 0 6187 0 5515 0 4949 1 30 2 6048 2 4157 2 2489 2 1007 1 6433 1 3288 1 1007 0 9289 0 7958 0 6901 0 6047 0 5346 0 4762 0 4271 1 35 2 3729 2 1935 2 0365 1 8978 1 4745 1 1871 0 9804 0 8257 0 7061 0 6116 0 5354 0 4730 0 4210 0 3774 1 40 2 2046 2 0301 1 8787 1 7459 1 3461 1 0785 0 8878 0 7459 0 6369 0 5509 0 4817 0 4252 0 3782 0 3388 1 50 1 9875 1 8112 1 6620 1 5337 1 1600 0 9190 0 7509 0 6276 0 5337 0 4603 0 4016 0 3538 0 3143 0 2812 1 60 1 8779 1 6825 1 5240 1 3920 1 0256 0 8008 0 6484 0 5386 0 4560 0 3920 0 3411 0 2998 0 2659 0 2376 1 70 1 8713 1 6215 1 4355 1 2893 0 9143 0 7007 0 5610 0 4625 0 3895 0 3335 0 2894 0 2538 0 2246 0 2004 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 105 amp Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Capaci
152. 50755 Timer hold dependent on current I PE50157 Customized tripping curve set using SFT2841 software 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved General Trip Curves Setting IDMT Tripping Curves Time Delay T or TMS Factor The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves except for customized and RI curves may be set as follows W time T operating time at 10 x Is m TMS factor factor shown as T B in the equations on the left Example t l 123 x TMS whereTMS 5 wer Is The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with TMS 1orT 1 5s TMS Setting Mode Retrofit Sepam to electromechanical relay may be done as the following example shows With a U S built VIT relay having 3 TDS 4A Tap 500 5A CT use a primary current setting of 4A x 500 5 400A with an IEEE VIT curve seton TMS 3 To verify coordination plot the associated equation with T replaced by TMS value and all coefficients inserted Another method takes the plotted family IEEE VIT of curves and transposes them by a factor of Timer Hold The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for m detection of restriking faults DT curve m coordination with electromechanical relays IDMT curve m Timer hold may be blocked if necessary Equation for IDMT Timer Hold Curve Equation t D se ge where TMS Iv p p S T1 timer hold setting timer hold for reset 0 and TMS 1 T tripping time delay setting a
153. 52 0 4539 0 3744 0 3152 0 2697 0 2337 0 2048 0 1811 0 1614 1 60 1 4070 1 2406 1 1082 1 0000 0 7102 0 5410 0 4303 0 3527 0 2955 0 2520 0 2178 0 1904 0 1681 0 1496 1 70 1 5237 1 2953 1 1286 1 0000 0 6816 0 5089 0 4000 0 3253 0 2711 0 2302 0 1983 0 1730 0 1524 0 1355 Schneider 107 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Protection of equipment against thermal Description damage caused by overloads This function is used to protect equipment motors transformers generators against overloads based on measurement of the current drawn Operation Curve The protection issues a trip command when the heat rise E calculated by measuring an equivalent current leq is greater than the heat rise set point Es The greatest permissible continuous current is IBVES The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T m the calculated heat rise depends on the current drawn and the previous heat rise m the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise m the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 rated heat rise Cold curve DE50808 Hot curve 10 IN natural logarithm Alarm Set Point Tripping Set Point Two set points are available for heat rise m Est alarm m Es2 tripping Imax IB if the max operating conditions are unknown use SF x FLA for Imax
154. 64 0 0308 0 0264 0 0229 0 0200 0 0177 0 0157 0 0141 0 0127 0 0081 0 0056 0 0041 0 0031 1 55 0 0602 0 0491 0 0409 0 0346 0 0297 0 0257 0 0225 0 0199 0 0177 0 0158 0 0143 0 0091 0 0063 0 0046 0 0035 1 60 0 0672 0 0548 0 0456 0 0386 0 0330 0 0286 0 0251 0 0221 0 0197 0 0176 0 0159 0 0101 0 0070 0 0051 0 0039 1 65 0 0745 0 0607 0 0505 0 0427 0 0365 0 0317 0 0277 0 0245 0 0218 0 0195 0 0176 0 0112 0 0077 0 0057 0 0043 1 70 0 0820 0 0668 0 0555 0 0469 0 0402 0 0348 0 0305 0 0269 0 0239 0 0214 0 0193 0 0122 0 0085 0 0062 0 0047 98 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE51606 Protection Functions Protection of equipment against thermal damage due to overloads 10 T 1109 ec eem Ses 10 XN l _ Cold curve i AEN Ee 1_ Hot curve 102 0 5 10 Tripping curves 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS Description This function is used to protect capacitor banks with or without harmonic filters against overloads based on the measurement of the current drawn The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current that factors harmonics up to the13th The highest current of the three phases la Ib and Ic subsequently called phase current Iph is used to calculate the heat rise Iph max la lb lc Taking capacitor step ratio into account When the number of s
155. 671 0 2490 0 2327 0 2181 0 2048 65 1 0498 0 8905 0 7704 0 6763 0 6004 0 5379 0 4855 0 4411 0 4029 0 3698 0 3409 0 3155 0 2929 0 2728 0 2548 0 2386 0 2239 70 1 2040 1 0076 0 8640 0 7535 0 6657 0 5942 0 5348 0 4847 0 4418 0 4049 0 3727 0 3444 0 3194 0 2972 0 2774 0 2595 0 2434 75 1 3863 1 1403 0 9671 0 8373 0 7357 0 6539 0 5866 0 5302 0 4823 0 4412 0 4055 0 3742 0 3467 0 3222 0 3005 0 2809 0 2633 80 1 6094 1 2933 1 0822 0 9287 0 8109 0 7174 0 6413 0 5780 0 5245 0 4788 0 4394 0 4049 0 3747 0 3479 0 3241 0 3028 0 2836 85 1 8971 1 4739 1 2123 1 0292 0 8923 0 7853 0 6991 0 6281 0 5686 0 5180 0 4745 0 4366 0 4035 0 3743 0 3483 0 3251 0 3043 90 2 3026 1 6946 1 3618 1 1411 0 9808 0 8580 0 7605 0 6809 0 6147 0 5587 0 5108 0 4694 0 4332 0 4013 0 3731 0 3480 0 3254 95 1 9782 1 5377 1 2670 1 0780 0 9365 0 8258 0 7366 0 6630 0 6012 0 5486 0 5032 0 4638 0 4292 0 3986 0 3714 0 3470 100 2 3755 1 7513 1 4112 1 1856 1 0217 0 8958 0 7956 0 7138 0 6455 0 5878 0 5383 0 4953 0 4578 0 4247 0 3953 0 3691 105 3 0445 2 0232 1 5796 1 3063 1 1147 0 9710 0 8583 0 7673 0 6920 0 6286 0 5746 0 5279 0 4872 0 4515 0 4199 0 3917 110 2 3979 1 7824 1 4435 1 2174 1 0524 0 9252 0 8238 0 7406 0 6712 0 6122 0 5616 0 5176 0 4790 0 4450 0 4148 115 3 0040 2 0369 1 6025 1 3318 1 1409 0 9970 0 8837 0 7918 0 7156 0 6514 0 5964 0 5489 0 5074 0 4708 0 4384 120 2 3792 1 7918 1 4610 1 2381 1 0742 0 9474 0 8457 0 7621 0 6921 0 6325 0 5812 0 5365 0 4973 0 4626 125 2 9037 2 0254 1 6094 1 3457 1 1580 1 0154 0 9027 0 8
156. 77 0 2173 0 1715 0 1395 0 1161 0 0984 0 0847 0 0737 0 0648 0 0574 0 0513 0 0461 0 0417 0 0379 180 0 4008 0 3660 0 3361 0 3102 0 2336 0 1840 0 1495 0 1244 0 1054 0 0906 0 0788 0 0692 0 0614 0 0548 0 0493 0 0446 0 0405 185 0 4321 0 3940 0 3614 0 3331 0 2502 0 1967 0 1597 0 1327 0 1123 0 0965 0 0839 0 0737 0 0653 0 0583 0 0524 0 0474 0 0431 190 0 4644 0 4229 0 3873 0 3567 0 2671 0 2096 0 1699 0 1411 0 1193 0 1025 0 0891 0 0782 0 0693 0 0619 0 0556 0 0503 0 0457 195 0 4978 0 4525 0 4140 0 3808 0 2842 0 2226 0 1802 0 1495 0 1264 0 1085 0 0943 0 0828 0 0733 0 0654 0 0588 0 0531 0 0483 200 0 5324 0 4831 0 4413 0 4055 0 3017 0 2358 0 1907 0 1581 0 1335 0 1145 0 0995 0 0873 0 0773 0 0690 0 0620 0 0560 0 0509 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 117 amp Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Hot Curves VIB 4 80 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 25 105 0 0023 0 0021 0 0017 0 0014 0 0012 0 0010 0 0009 0 0008 0 0007 0 0006 0 0006 0 0005 0 0003 0 0002 0 0002 0 0001 110 0 0045 0 0042 0 0034 0 0029 0 0024 0 0021 0 0018 0 0016 0 0014 0 0013 0 0011 0 0010 0 0006 0 0004 0 0003 0 0003 115 0 0068 0 0063 0 0051 0 0043 0 0036 0 0031 0 0027 0 0024 0 0021 0 0019 0 0017 0 0015 0 0010 0 0007 0 0005 0 0004 120 0 0091 0 0084 0 0069 0 0057 0 0049 0 0042 0 0036 0 0032 0 0028 0 0025 0 0022 0 0020 0 0013 0 0009 0 0007 0 0005
157. 7_x_1 D Delayed output P27 x 3 m m D Fault phase a2 P27x7 m Fault phase b 2 P27x8 m Fault phase c 2 P27x9 m Protection blocked P27_x 16 m Instantaneous output Van or Vab P27 x 23 m D Instantaneous output Vbn or Vbc P27 x 24 m D Instantaneous output Ven or Vac P27 x25 m D Delayed output Van or Vab P27 x 26 m Delayed output Vbn or Vbc P27 x 27 m Delayed output Ven or Vac P27_x 28 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 When the protection function is used for phase to neutral voltage Schneider 63230 216 230B1 73 amp Electric Protection Functions Motor protection against incorrect voltages 74 63230 216 230B1 Positive Sequence Undervoltage amp Phase Rotation Direction Check ANSI Code 27D Description This feature provides motor protection against faulty operation due to an insufficient or unbalanced network voltage It is based on measuring the positive sequence voltage V1 and includes a definite time delay T It does not operate when only a single phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage is connected This protection also detects the phase rotation direction The protection function considers that the phase rotation direction is reversed when the positive sequence voltage is less than 10 of Vip and when the phase to phase voltage is greater than 80 of Vii p When this is the case the alarm message ROTATION is generated Block Diagram DE51544 Vi Vab o
158. 80 B80 Directional ground fault S81 T81 M81 Directional ground fault and phase overcurrent S82 T82 G82 Check on 3 phase voltages on two busses B83 Rate of change of frequency S84 Capacitor bank unbalance C86 Transformer or machine differential T87 M87 G87 Machine transformer unit differential M88 G88 4 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric EA Sync check module Introduction Modular Architecture Flexibility and Upgrading Capability The user can add optional modules to Sepam at any time for increased functionality This gives Sepam exceptional versatility adapting to as many situations as possible and allowing for future installation upgrade Base unit with different types of User Machine Interfaces UMI m integrated mimic based UMI m integrated or remote advanced UMI PE50286 Parameter and protection settings saved on removable memory cartridge 42 logic inputs and 23 output relays with three optional modules providing 14 inputs and 6 outputs Two independent communication ports W direct connection to 2 wire RS485 4 wire RS485 and fiber optic networks m connection to Ethernet TCP IP network via PowerLogic Ethernet server Transparent Ready Processing of data from 16 temperature sensors Pt100 Ni100 or Ni120 1 low level analog output 0 10 mA 4 20 mA or 0 20 mA Software tools m Sepam parameter and protection s
159. 81 0 2125 0 1984 0 1858 0 1744 0 1640 0 1545 0 1459 0 1380 0 1307 0 1067 0 0889 0 75 0 3691 0 3383 0 3113 0 2877 0 2667 0 2481 0 2314 0 2165 0 2029 0 1907 0 1796 0 1694 0 1601 0 1516 0 1236 0 1028 0 80 0 4326 0 3953 0 3630 0 3347 0 3098 0 2877 0 2680 0 2503 0 2344 0 2201 0 2070 0 1952 0 1843 0 1744 0 1418 0 1178 0 85 0 5049 0 4599 0 4210 0 3873 0 3577 0 3316 0 3084 0 2877 0 2691 0 2523 0 2371 0 2233 0 2107 0 1992 0 1617 0 1340 0 90 0 5878 0 5332 0 4866 0 4463 0 4112 0 3804 0 3531 0 3289 0 3072 0 2877 0 2701 0 2541 0 2396 0 2263 0 1832 0 1516 0 95 0 6836 0 6170 0 5608 0 5127 0 4710 0 4347 0 4027 0 3744 0 3491 0 3265 0 3061 0 2877 0 2710 0 2557 0 2064 0 1704 1 00 0 7956 0 7138 0 6456 0 5878 0 5383 0 4953 0 4578 0 4247 0 3953 0 3691 0 3456 0 3244 0 3052 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 1 05 0 9287 0 8267 0 7431 0 6733 0 6142 0 5633 0 5191 0 4804 0 4463 0 4159 0 3888 0 3644 0 3424 0 3225 0 2585 0 2125 1 10 1 0904 0 9606 0 8569 0 7717 0 7005 0 6399 0 5878 0 5425 0 5027 0 4675 0 4363 0 4082 0 3830 0 3603 0 2877 0 2358 1 15 1 2934 1 1231 0 9916 0 8862 0 7996 0 7269 0 6651 0 6118 0 5654 0 5246 0 4884 0 4563 0 4274 0 4014 0 3192 0 2609 1 20 1 5612 1 3269 1 1549 1 0217 0 9147 0 8267 0 7527 0 6897 0 6353 0 5878 0 5460 0 5090 0 4759 0 4463 0 3531 0 2877 1 25 1 9473 1 5955 1 3593 1 1856 1 0509 0 9425 0 8531 0 7780 0 7138 0 6583 0 6098 0 5671 0 5292 0 4953 0 3898 0 3165 1 30 2 6214 1 9823 1 6286 1 3907 1 2155 1 0793 0 9696 0 8789 0 8026 0 737
160. 88 Pressure alarm 1114 T8x M88 G88 Selector set to Circuit Breaker 1201 S8x T8x G8x B8x ANSI 10 Selector set to Tie Breaker ANSI 10 1202 S8x T8x G8x B8x Selector set to Auto ANSI 43 1203 S8x T8x G8x B8x Selector set to Manual ANSI 43 1204 S8x T8x G8x B8x Opposite side closed 1205 S8x T8x G8x B8x Opposite side open 1206 S8x T8x G8x B8x Opposite side voltage OK 1207 S8x T8x G8x B8x Block opposite side remote control 1208 S8x T8x G8x B8x local Automatic closing command 1209 S8x T8x G8x B8x Tie Breaker open 1210 S8x T8x G8x B8x Tie Breaker closed 1211 S8x T8x G8x B8x Block closing of tie breaker 1212 S8x T8x G8x B8x Tie Breaker close command 1213 S8x T8x G8x B8x Block remote control tie breaker local 1214 S8x T8x G8x B8x 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 187 lectric Control and Monitoring Functions Predefined circuit breaker or contactor control function Operation The Switchgear control function can control the following types of breaking device circuit breakers with NO or NC contacts latching contactors with NO contacts contactors with latched commande This function comprises two parts processing of internal switchgear control Commande D open 1 1 2 13 o close with or without sync check 6 7 8 4A D block closing 4 5 execution of internal commands by contro
161. Accuracy 1 5 for Ps between 5 Sn and 40 Sn 3 for Ps between 40 Sn and 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 kW Drop out pick up ratio 106 Time Delay T Setting range 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time lt 120 ms Overshoot time lt 65 ms Reset time lt 60 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P37P_x_101 m Li Protection blocking P37P x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P37P_x_1 D L Delayed output P37P x 3 Li D Protection blocked P37P_x 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Sn V3 Vis IN 63230 216 230B1 83 Protection Functions Temperature Monitoring ANSI Code 38 49T Protection against heat rise in equipment by Description measuring the temperature with a sensor This protection detects abnormal heat rise by measuring the temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors m transformer protection of primary and secondary windings m motor and generator protection of stator windings and bearings This protection function is associated with a Resistance Temperature Detector RTD type Pt100 platinum 100 Q at 0 C or 32 F or nickel Ni100 or Ni120 conforming to IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards It activates when the monitored temperature is greater than the temperature set point Ts Ithas
162. At the normal operating rate after starting the protection enables when one of the three phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a period of time that is longer than the LT time delay of the definite time type 3 Ifthe rotor is locked on start LTS Large motors may have very long starting times due to inertia or a reduced voltage supply This starting time is longer than the permissible rotor blocking time To protect such a motor the LTS timer initiates a trip if a start is detected I gt Is or if the motor speed is zero For a normal start the input 123 zero speed switch disables this protection Motor Acceleration When a motor accelerates it consumes a level of current in the vicinity of the starting current gt Is without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of IB The ST time delay which corresponds to the normal starting time can be reinitialised by the logic input motor re acceleration This will reinitialize the excessive starting time protection and set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value Block Diagram I gt Is starting tripping in progress output la 1 gt 0 05 Is locked rotor after starting motor re accelera logic input excessive starting time I gt Is locked rotor on start rotor rotation detection logic input zero speed ANSI 14 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Res
163. Automatic Main Main or Main Tie Main Transfer Operating and implementing the automatic transfer function depends on the type of substation m Main main transfer is suitable for dual main substations without a tie m Main tie main transfer is suitable for dual main substations with a tie These two applications are described separately The automatic transfer function is symmetrical m hardware symmetry dual main substations with two incoming circuit breakers and each main is protected by a Sepam Series 80 unit m functional symmetry automatic transfer is distributed between the two Sepam Series 80 units protecting the two mains Each function is described from the viewpoint of one of the two mains the other main being referred to as the opposite side main Schneider 63230 216 230B1 229 amp Electric DE51499 Control and Monitoring Functions MCS025 Automatic main tie main transfer with sync check managed by Sepam B80 230 63230 216 230B1 Automatic Transfer Equipment Used Sepam Protection Relay Each main is protected by a Sepam Series 80 unit At least two MES120 modules should be added to each Sepam The sync check function ANSI 25 is performed by an optional MCS025 module connected to one of the two Sepam units For busses with motors it is necessary to check the remna
164. Breaker Closed Information When connected to a logic input the circuit breaker closed information is used to detect the loss of one two or three voltages In certain applications the circuit breaker location is insufficient to determine the presence of voltages In such cases the equation editor can be used to precisely define the conditions for voltage presence DE10413 DE10414 Switchgear Diagnosis VT Supervision ANSI Code 60V Block Diagram Phase Voltage Fault Detection Partial loss of phase voltages main voltage channels only 12 12 lt Is2 v2 V2 gt Vs2 circuit breaker closed Loss of all phase voltages max voltages measured lt 10 Viinp max la Ib Ic Y gt 10 IN phase voltage fault PVTS_x_3 and VT fault message circuit breaker closed voltage presence PVTS_x_117 phase VT fuse blown phase VT fault PVTS x 3 min voltages measured 40 Viinp Block Diagram Residual Voltage Fault Detection phase voltage fault PVTS x 3 Vr r no residual VT Vr VT fuse blown residual voltage fault Vr VT fault message Consequences of a VT Fault on Protection Functions A Phase voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 21B 27 27D 27TN 32P 32Q 37P 40 47 50 27 51V 78PS m 59 only in cases where the protection function is set up for phase to neutral overvoltage when the vo
165. D D Final trip P79 1 204 m n D Closing by recloser P79 1 205 m D Reclosing step 1 P790 1211 m D D Reclosing step 2 P79 1 212 m D D Reclosing step 3 P79_1 213 m D D Reclosing step 4 P79_1 214 m D D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50786 DE50787 Protection Functions Recloser ANSI Code 79 Example 1 Fault cleared after the second shot Ground fault I l nit 1 1 d ES Cycle 2 ground fault message Protection time delay Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 or Reclaim time gt j I SE ication ication A 7 Ao Cleared fault message EL Example 2 Fault not cleared 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Circuit breaker open Recloser ready Remote indication Reclosing in progress Remote indication permanent trip Ground fault l Cycle 1 ground fault message Ground fault Cycle 2 ground fault message Ground fault NT I Protection l time delay Permanent trip 1g I Protection time delay I Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 le Lope eee l A l Ge Al 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 153 Electric Protection Functions Recloser ANSI Code 79 Example 3 Closing o
166. Data Format Unit 1 Latching 0 no 1 yes 2 Program logic see details 3 Activity 0 Off 1 On 4 Measurement origin 0 mainsee note 1 additional Details on program logic field Bit 31 30 Se 4 3 2 1 0 DES AGR CDC CDC 1 the protection function takes part in circuit breaker contactor control 0 the protection function does not take part AGR 1 the protection function takes part in genset shutdown 0 the protection function does not take part DES 1 the protection function takes part in de excitation 0 the protection function does not take part When a common protection setting is not applicable to a particular protection function it is signaled reserved in the table for the function Nota there are a few special cases of coding for the measurement origin field listed below Value 50N 51N 67N 59N 0 Ir Lex Vr 1 Ir Ir Vint 2 lr lr 3 PE Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Appendix Protection Settings Function Settings Protection Settings They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes ANSI 12 Overspeed Function number 72xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1t03 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Set point 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 14 Underspeed Function number 77xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setti
167. De Excitation Setting range per protection unit Enabled disabled De Excitation Time Delay Setting range Oto 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam De excitation V DE EXCITATION m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix De excitation V_DE EXCIT_ORD D D De excitation on V_DE EXCIT_ON D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 227 ectric DE51602 Control and Monitoring Functions Generator Shutdown amp Tripping Example Installation Description The electrical installation consists of a bus that connects to m a main supplied by a 10 MVA transformer m 23 15 MVA power generator 50 51 51V 50N 51N 49RMS 46 40 87M 27 124 H81HH 81L 59 32QH47 78PS 59N 228 63230 216 230B1 In normal operation the generator and transformer are connected to the bus The generator provides backup power to the installation in the absence of the transformer power supply The installation is grounded by a neutral inductance When the generator is not connected to the network its neutral is isolated When faults occur the generator is over excited for 3 10 seco
168. Hz dPhi set point 5 to 80 5 to 80 Vus high set point 70 to 110 Vip sync1 70 to 110 Vinp sync1 Vus low set point Other Settings Lead time 10 to 70 Vip sync 0100 55 10 to 70 Vinp sync1 0to0 5s Operating modes no voltage conditions for which tie breaking is allowed Dead1 AND Live Dead1 AND Live2 Live1 AND Dead2 Live1 AND Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead2 60 63230 216 230B1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Setting Ranges ANSI 27 Undervoltage L L or L n Tripping curve Definite time IDMT Set point 5 to 100 of Viup 0 05 to 300 s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI 27D Positive Sequence Undervoltage Set point and time delay 15 to 60 of Vip 0 05 to 300 s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI 27R Remnant Undervoltage Set point and time delay 5 to 100 of Vip 0 05 to 300 s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI 27TN 64G2 Third Harmonic Undervoltage Vs set point fixed 0 2 to 20 of Vntp 0 5 to 300 s K set point adaptive 0 1 to 0 2 0 5 to 300 s Positive sequence undervoltage 50 to 100 of Vip Minimum apparent power 1 to 90 of Sb Sb V3 V IB ANSI 32P Dire
169. IG2 4 67 A Y BSIG1 BS BSIG1 L direction of protection function detection A direction of blocking signal orders With the combination of directional protection functions and the zone selective interlocking function the faulty section may be isolated with a minimal delay by tripping of the circuit breakers on either side of the fault Blocking signals are initiated by both protection functions 67 and 67N Priority is given to protection function 67 when protection functions 67 and 67N detect faults in opposite directions at the same time the blocking signal sent is determined by the direction of the fault detected by protection function 67 The instantaneous output of protection functions 67 and 67N activated at 80 of the Is threshold is used to send blocking signals This avoids uncertainty when the fault current is close to the Is threshold Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Zone Selective Interlocking Functions Example Closed Ring Network Example Case of a closed ring with two substations each of which comprises two Sepam S82 relays marked R11 R12 and R21 R22 DE50817 Substation 2 Substation 1 lt direction of protection function detection A direction of blocking signal orders Starting at one end of the ring the detection direction of uni
170. IN2 3 4 kA 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Gf Electric Transformer Differential Code ANSI 87T Example 2 2 5 MVA Dyn11 20 8 kV 420 V transformer the peak closing current is linr 9 6 IN The transformer features a tap changer with a tap range of 15 of the rated voltage of winding 2 Sensor selection The rated current of the windings is Thanks to the tap changer the current sensors can support an overload of 115 IN gt 69 A x 1 15 79 4 A and I n gt 3 4 kA x 1 15 3 91 kA The main currents of the CTs must also meet the following requirements S S S IN 2 5 1 Abos S3Vunt andro 3Vun2 3Vun2 S d I N y 2 2 3Vitn1 LPS So for this transformer 6 9 A lt In lt 173 A and 340A lt I N lt 8 5 kA Taking these two restrictions into account the values selected are those standardized by the IEC In 100 A and l n 4 kA The tripping current is finr 9 6 n SO for both winding 1 and winding 2 finri 9 6x2x69A 937A finr2 9 6 x 2 x 4 kA 46 2 kA These tripping currents must be compared with the rated current of the CTs in order to select the accuracy limit factor linr1 937A 6 6 lt 6 7 and linr2 46 2 kA 2IN 2x100A ON AKA 82767 The accuracy limit factor is therefore 20 for the sensors in winding 1 finr2 _ 46 2 kA SIN Gees d 24 5 for winding 2 and equal to 3 The closest standard value 30 is selected The follo
171. ME S a S o 0 01 1 10 I Is 178 63230 216 230B1 General Trip Curves Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI Curve VIT LTI VIT B LTI B DE50869a 10000 1000 100 OPERATE TIME S 0 1 0 01 1 10 100 I Is 100 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric DE50870 Protection Functions Extremely Inverse Time EIT Curve EIT EIT C 10000 1000 D 100 Lu F w 10 ke st D Lu a 1 0 1 0 01 1 10 I Is 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved General Trip Curves Ultra Inverse Time UIT Curve ULTRA INV TIME UIT 1000 DE50870a 100 0 1 0 01 100 1 10 100 l lIs Schneider 63230 216 230B1 Electric 179 MT10206 MT10206b Protection Functions IEEE Curves IEEE MI IEC D 1000 100 o LL 10 Lu lt c 1 LL D o 0 1 0 01 1 10 I Is IEEE Curves IEEE El IEC F 1000 1000 10 Ed wi F w 1 z W a O 4 0 1 0 01 I Is 180 63230 216 230B1 General Trip Curves IEEE Curves MT10206a 10000 1000 OPERATE TIME S o o E 0 1 0 01 100 Schneider Electric IEEE VI IEC E I Is 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50869 MT10206 Protection Functions IAC Curves IAC SIT 1000 100 CH OPERATE TIME S o 0 01 I Is IAC Curves IAC EIT 10000 1000 100 OPERATE TIME S 6 o A 0 01
172. N1 3IN1 E gt gt gt 5 i3m JE la 1b Ic INI 3IN1 Winding 2 Current Matching and Vector Shift The matching of winding 2 affects the amplitude and phase and takes account of the vector shift of the transformer Standard IEC 60076 1 assumes the vector shift is given for a transformer connected to a power source with a phase rotation sequence of a b c Sepam uses this vector shift value for both a b c and a c b type networks Therefore it is unnecessary to complement this value by a b for an a c b type network When the current transformer connections are correct The vector shift matching is the result of the phase displacement measurement taken by Sepam between the currents in winding 1 and winding 2 divided by 30 The table on the next page contains vectorial diagrams and matching formulae based on the vector shift of the transformer for networks with type a b c phase rotation sequences 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions ANSI Code 87T Calculating Matched Currents for Winding 2 Transformer Differential Vector Winding 1 Winding 2 Matching Vector Winding 1 Winding 2 Matching shift shift g i g 8 8 a poe j la lb Ic NES XIV Ic Ib ic Mb Pa Pa Pb l __Pa Pa b c IN BIND c Ib in2 am2 0 Pb Pa Pb 6 _ Pb Pa Pb Pc RUES me I ypt DTIC IN 3IN2 IN2 3IN2 d Pc l as basic lcm LB em IN2 3IN2 Pc Pasfb IN2 3IN2 iy PHP 2 g am
173. O Tie breaker trip Le Tie breaker trip Oo Tie breaker close o i 9 Tie breaker close l l l l l l l Closed 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PE50458 Control and Monitoring Functions SETIBAT Sepan series B Sous station 12 Predefined control logic 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SFT2841 parameter setting of predefined control logic Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Implementation Parameter Setting of Predefined Control Functions The Automatic transfer function is set up atthe same time as the Switchgear control function in the Control logic tab of the SFT2841 software Switchgear Control Function W activation of the Switchgear control function m activation of the Sync check function if necessary Automatic Transfer Function W activation of the Automatic transfer function and adjustment of associated parameters H voltage return time Tr typically 3 sec D normal tie position normally open or normally closed according to the network operating mode VT Supervision Function The VT supervision ANSI 60FL is to be activated if necessary Protection Function Setting Protection Functions Phase undervoltage ANSI 27 Unit 1 Use Initialization of automatic transfer on detection of voltage loss Setting Information Voltage set point 60 Vi Np Delay 300 msec Phase overcurrent ANSI 50 51 Unit 1 in
174. ORMER a 3 15 ba 50 65 80 d ee J 4 1 PHASE 1 C PHASE2 a 1 if 5 l C TL e a l IE m e E X A i E Bl pL Ier ENS bd ge 8 ge Eu WW _ Geo M i as Le START N M d 5 T 3 i 15 pm alt L i i 3 i ac E nr nes rt Lest a d 5 il fe Li 6 RER Essai Series 80 Full Voltage Non Reversing FVNR E Series 80 Reduced Voltage Autotransformer RVAT 196 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Switchgear Control Motor AC Contactor Control Timing Diagram Control and Monitoring Functions SEPAM Series 80 Motor AC Contactor Control 120 VAC X M 48 ro RES dus IR p ns o 5 o je os Lo S sda Is Im m E 78 8 x DN f T NE a ra EE Ls T m f8 a FT 9 e di 9 E i REL m bR NL UL p JE 1 O IR m US E Tom ln zm Hu T0 toc Lem ly d SP START o start er AMT Hh T NE Dus L pp Tom T T erger aw INHIBIT START X 1M um um Ek Jm T en o a T d FMR LN I Tm FR EA anamar DO PT Mop SA L L AJ A s HA ia DOCH Im 09 OF i Ou OF Om Os Os Y D A D D D A A D D Ful Volfag gei tt na NR PUE Reduced Voltage Autotransformer RVAT Start Controls WIth iL EI Remote ntact Remote ontacts Timing Diagram 8 B d
175. Protection blocked P50BF_1 16 m D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 119 amp Electric Protection Functions 120 63230 216 230B1 DE52249 Schneider Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Example Below is an example for determining the time delay setting of the breaker failure function The following parameters are for the illustration m overcurrent protection setting T inst m circuit breaker operating time 60 ms m auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream breaker s 10 ms Fault A Clearing of fault without breaker failure Rising time EE Sepam output relay 40 ms Circuit breaker lit Dre Margin opening time Overshoot time 35 ms Sepam output relay Trip auxiliary relay Time delay T of the 50BF protection function with 20 ms margin T 210 60 20 35 125 ms gt Fault clearance time 40 125 10 10 60 245 ms The breaker failure function time delay is the sum of the following times m Sepam O1 output relay pick up time 10 ms W circuit breaker opening time 60 ms m Breaker failure function overshoot time 35 ms To avoid unwanted tripping of the upstream breakers add a margin of approximately 20 ms The time delay is 125 ms minimum set at 130 ms 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Protection against inadvertent energization of generators that are s
176. Qs 2 x R 3 ms Resolution 1 s with T gt 60 Qs x R Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P14_x_101 m Protection blocking P14 x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P14_x_1 D Delayed output P14xX3 m D D Protection blocked P14 x 16 m Zero speed P14 x 38 m x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Qs in rpm 3 R Number of pulses cam per rotation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 67 amp Electric DE50317 Protection Functions Phase to phase short circuit protection for generators x Example Synchronous Generator Synchronous generator data m S 3 15 MVA m Vuni 6 3kV m Xa 233 m Xa 21 68 63230 216 230B1 Underimpedance ANSI Code 21B Description The protection function is made up of a circular tripping characteristic on the impedance plane R X with a definite time delay It picks up when one of the apparent phase to phase impedances enters the circular tripping characteristic The apparent impedances are V E Vb Zab ab Zbc dug DE51540 delayed output pick up Signal Characteristics Settings Set Point Os Setting range 0 05VN IB lt Zs x 2 VN IB or 0 001 Q Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 0 001 Q or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 105 Time Delay T Set
177. Schneider Sync Check ANSI Code 25 User Information The following measurements are available m voltage difference m frequency difference m phase difference Characteristics Settings dVLLs Set Point Setting range 3 to 30 VLLsynct Accuracy 1 2 5 or 0 003 VLLsynci Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 106 dfs Set Point Setting range 0 05 Hz to 0 5 Hz Accuracy 1 10 mHz Resolution 0 01 Hz Drop out pick up lt 15 mHz dPhis Set Point Setting range 5 to 50 Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 120 Vuus High Set Point Setting range 70 to 110 ViLsynci Accuracy 1 1 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 VLLs Low Set Point Setting range 10 to 70 VLLsync1 Accuracy 1 1 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 106 Anticipating Circuit Breaker Closing Time Setting range 0 1 to 500 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Voltage Checking Setting range On Off Operating Mode with No Voltage Setting range Dead1 AND Live2 Live1 AND Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead2 Characteristic Times 1 Operation time 190 ms dVLL operation time 120 ms df operation time 190 ms dPhi operation time 190 ms Reset time lt 50 ms Outputs 1 Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Close enable Sync check P25_1_46 D D No voltage P25_1_47
178. Sepam Series 80 Protective Relays Reference Manual Instruction Bulletin 63230 216 230B1 7 Merlin Gerin Schneider J SquareD Telemecanique Electric Safety Instructions Safety Symbols and Messages Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate service or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure e Risk of Electric Shock N The addition of either symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label on a device indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in death or personal injury if the instructions are not followed ANSI symbol IEC symbol Safety Alert This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards and prompt you to consult the manual Obey all safety instructions that follow this symbol in the manual to avoid possible injury or death Safety Messages A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death serious injury or property damage A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death serious injury or property damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a
179. T FAULT Vo VT FAULT Vr CT supervision 60 Main CT supervision CT FAULT CT FAULT Additional CT supervision CT FAULT CT FAULT Trip circuit supervision TCS fault or 74 TRIP CIRCUIT TRIP CKT FAULT mismatching of open closed position contacts Closing circuit fault CLOSE CIRCUIT CLOSE CIRCUIT Capacitor step matching fault COMP FLT STP 1 to 4 BANK FLT STP 1 to 4 Cumulative breaking current monitoring ZPBREAKING gt gt ZPBREAKING gt gt Battery monitoring BATTERY LOW BATTERY LOW 1 Auxiliary power supply monitoring Low threshold LOW POWER SUP LOW POWER SUP High threshold HIGH POWER SUP HIGH POWER SUP 248 63230 216 230B1 1 RTD FAULT BATTERY LOW messages refer to the maintenance chapter 2 With indication of the faulty phase 3 With indication of the faulty phase when used with phase to neutral voltage Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Local Indication Functions ANSI Code 30 Functions UK English US English Protection ANSI Code Overspeed 12 OVERSPEED OVERSPEED Underspeed 14 UNDERSPEED UNDERSPEED Underimpedance 21B UNDERIMPEDANCE UNDERIMPEDANCE Overexcitation V Hz 24 OVER FLUXING OVER EXCITATION Sync check 25 Sync checked
180. TP1_TRIPPING Tripping of capacitor step 2 V_STP2_TRIPPING D D Tripping of capacitor step 3 V_STP3_TRIPPING Tripping of capacitor step 4 V STPA4 TRIPPING D E Closing of capacitor step 1 V_STP1_CLOSING D Closing of capacitor step 2 V_STP2_CLOSING D D Closing of capacitor step 3 V_STP3_CLOSING D D Closing of capacitor step 4 V_STP4_CLOSING a Capacitor step 1 matching fault V_STP1_CTRLFLT D E Capacitor step 2 matching fault V_STP2_CTRLFLT D D Capacitor step 3 matching fault V_STP3_CTRLFLT D Capacitor step 4 matching fault V_STP4_CTRLFLT 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 206 63230 216 230B1 d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Latching Acknowledgement Operation The tripping outputs of all protection functions and logic inputs can be latched individually Logic outputs cannot be latched Logic outputs set up as pulse type outputs maintain pulse type operation even when they are linked to latched data Latched data is saved in the event of an auxiliary power loss All latched data are acknowledged together at the same time Acknowledgement is done m locally on the UMI using the key m orremotely via a logic input the SFT2841 software or via the communication link m or by logic equation or Logipam The remote indication TS5 remains present after latching operations u
181. Tripping as of 1 2 Is 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 63 ectric Protection Functions Setting Ranges ANSI 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent Characteristic angle 30 45 60 Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Delay Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT IEC SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E EI F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Customized DT Is set point 0 1 to 24 IN Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 IN IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5sto20s ANSI 67N 67NC Type 1 Directional Ground Fault According to Ir Projection Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Isr set point 0 01 to 15 Inr mini 0 1 A Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s Vsr set point 2 to 80 of Vip Memory time TOmem time 0 0 05 s to 300 s Vrmem validity set point 0 2 to 80 of Vip Measurement origin Ir input l r input ANSI 67N 67NC Type 2 Directional Ground Fault According to Ir Vector Magnitude Directionalized on a Tripping Half Plane Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Delay Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT IEC SIT A LTI B VIT B
182. VV1 to VV31 The values of these variables are not saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage They are assigned the value of 0 when Sepam starts Constants K_1 K 0 Value not modifiable K_1 always 1 K_0 always 0 258 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Control and Monitoring Logic Equations Functions Processing in the Event of Auxiliary Power Outage All the variables with the exception of the variables VVx are saved in the event of a Sepam auxiliary power outage The states of the variables are restored when the power is recovered allowing the states produced by LATCH SR or PULSE type memory operators to be saved Special Cases m brackets must be used in expressions that comprise different OR AND XOR or NOT operators D V1 VL1 AND 1102 OR P27 27S_1_1 expression incorrect D V1 VL1 AND 1102 OR P27 27S_1_1 expression correct D V1 VL1 OR 1102 OR P27 27S_1_1 expression correct m protection input output variables Pnnn x y may not be used in the LATCH function m function parameters may not be expressions Hn VL3 TON ONT AND V3 300 expression incorrect o VL4 z V1 AND V3 D VL3 TON VLA 300 correct Use Limit The number of operators and functions OR AND XOR NOT TON TOF SR PULSE is limited to 200 Examples of Applications The following are some application examples 1 Latching the recloser permanent trip signal By default thi
183. Vr memory reset Vr Vsr Vr Vr lt Vr mem external VT Ir cos pr 80 lt Isr m CSH ZSCT o busbar gt delayed output CT or Ir cos or 80 gt Isr LA line iai eland ACE990 F choice pick up signal an core Ir cos pr 80 lt 0 8 Isr to zone selective interlocking instantaneous output reverse zone instantaneous output at 0 8 Isr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 141 amp Electric Protection Functions 142 63230 216 230B1 Directional Ground Fault Type 1 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Characteristic Angle 0 Setting range Ir lr 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 1 Isr Setting Setting range 2 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A in amperes Sum of CTs 0 01 IN lt Isr lt 15 In min 0 1 A With CSH sensor 2A rating 0 1 to 30 A 20 A rating 0 2 to 300 A CT 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 01 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A Accuracy 1 5 at or 180 Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio Time Delay T Definite Time DT Tripping Curve Setting range 93 5 5 Inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution Advanced Settings Tripping Direction 10 ms or 1 digit Setting range Bus line Vsr Set P
184. W Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 Time Delay T Setting range 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time lt 90 ms Overshoot time lt 95 ms Reset time lt 90 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P32Q 1 101 m Protection blocking P32Q_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P32Q_1_1 E Delayed output P32Q_1_3 D D D Protection blocked P32Q 1 16 m D Positive reactive power P32Q 1 54 m D Negative reactive power P32Q_1_55 m D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Sn v3 Vit IN 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 81 amp Electric Protection Functions Protection for pumps its set point Is Phase Undercurrent ANSI Code 37 This protection is single phase It enables when phase a current la drops below mE 1 06 Is Description els This function protects pumps against the results of a do 015 la loss of priming by detecting motor no load operations Pick up signal Delayed io emp NEN output Current sag This protection is inactive when the current is less than 1 5 of IN It is insensitive to current drops due to circuit breaker tripping 1 06 Is Is DE50776 0 015 Is Pick up signal 0 Delayed output 0 Circuit breaker tripping l i m the protection function include
185. acceleration area When the fault is cleared the voltage across the machine terminals is no longer zero It is assumed that the network voltage the load and the electromotive force are the same In that the internal angle increased the electrical power is Pe t Depending on the sign of Pm Pe t the machine slows or continues to accelerate fodo A je P t dt o t Generally Pm Pe t 0 This condition is not sufficient to recover stability 150 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Pole Slip ANSI Code 78PS m fault clearing with return to stability the machine returns to its operating mode prior to the fault if the two integrals are equal amp t n P t dt P dt Je ty dt J t t The integral Ip P t dt is called the braking area t Pe Braking area DE50859 Acceleration area p 526 m fault clearing and loss of synchronization During slowing the machine passes point B and begins to accelerate again because beyond this point Pm Pe t gt 0 t The braking area Pr P t dt is not sufficient t The machine starts to race and stability is lost The machine alternates between phases during which it supplies electrical power and others where it draws power Pe DE50860 Braking area Pm Acceleration area u Se 84 85 82 Machine racing The situation presented here is also true for machines other than turbo generators
186. active m Vab Vbc with Vr and la Ib Ic three wattmeters power to detect field loss on synchronous machines m Vab Vbc with Vr and la Ic two wattmeters W reactive overpower protection for motors that m Vab Vbc without Vr two wattmeters consume more reactive power following field loss m other cases protection function unavailable W reverse reactive overpower protection for The function is enabled only if the following condition is met generators that consume reactive power Q23496P following field loss This provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or main parameter according to the convention For the feeder circuit W power supplied by the busses is positive g flow o m power supplied to the bus is negative 3 direction For the Main circuit m power supplied to the bus is positive e i flow m power supplied by the busses is negative IH direction overpower Block Diagram overpower reverse power P a Q gt Qs choice T 0 delayed Q lt e direction output mn pick up signal e Characteristics Settings Tripping Direction Setting range Overpower reverse power Qs Set Point Setting range 5 of Sn to 120 of Sn 2 Accuracy 1 5 for Qs between 5 Sn and 40 Sn Operating zone 3 for Qs between 40 Sn and 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 k
187. ain Tie Main Operation Closing Tie Description The voluntary closing of the tie circuit breaker without interruption involves two separate control functions 1 closing the tie circuit breaker regardless of sync check The three circuit breakers are closed 2 opening the normally open circuit breaker designated by the NO circuit breaker selector Mandatory Transfer Conditions These conditions are required to enable transfer m the opposite side voltage is OK m the following conditions are not fulfilled simultaneously o the main circuit breaker is closed H the opposite side circuit breaker is closed o the tie breaker is the normally open circuit breaker NO tie Optional Transfer Conditions These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled m the Auto Manual selector is in the Manual position the three Local Remote selectors are in the Local position the three circuit breakers are racked in no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function ANSI 60FL to avoid transfer on the loss of voltage transformers m no blocking transfer by V_TRANS_STOP by logic equations or by Logipam Initializing Tie Closing Voluntary tie close command Block Diagram Tie breaker close ready V_TIE_CLOSE_EN Tie breaker close command V_TIE_CLOSING Schneider 63230 216 230B1 243 amp Electric DE51599 Control and Monitoring Functions Automatic Transfer Main T
188. ain channels Vr Additional channels V r Neutral point voltage Vint Tripping Curve Setting range Definite time IDMT dependent on the residual voltage Vr Vsr Set Point Definite time setting range 2 to 80 Vip for residual voltage Vr 2 to 80 Vnip for neutral point voltage Vnt IDMT setting range 2 to 10 Vui p for residual voltage Vr 2 to 10 Vntp for neutral point voltage Vint Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Vup Resolution 196 Drop out pick up ratio 97 2 or gt 1 0 006 Viip Vsr x 100 Time Delay T Tripping Time at 2 Vsr Definite time setting range 50 ms to 300 s IDMT setting range 100 ms to 10s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up 45 ms typically 25 ms at 2 Vsr Overshoot time 40 ms at 2 Vsr Reset time 40 ms at 2 Vsr Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P59N x 101 m D Protection blocking P59N x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P59N_x_1 D Delayed output P59N_x 3 m D Protection blocked P59N x 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50099 Protection Functions Protection against internal faults in generators I i gt 59N 64G1 I gt 27TN 64G2 2007 Schneider Electric All Ri
189. ameter ZN offset by X d 2 and circle 2 is set with a diameter Xd offset by X d 2 m Xa X d 200 ZN 1 321 Q m Xb X d 200 1 ZN 13 907 Q m Xc X d 200 X1 100 ZN 30 646 The faults detected in circle 1 are violent field loss faults that must be cleared rapidly Circle 2 may concern faults other than field loss faults and its tripping time is longer m T1 70ms m T2 500 ms Example 2 Generator Transformer Unit Applications Synchronous Generator Data m S_gen 19 MVA m ViLN2 5 5 kV m Xd 257 m X d 30 Transformer Data m S_ix 30 MVA m VunNt 20kV Vn2 5 5KkV E Z 7 m Pcu 191 kW Load Losses in KW from TX test report Protection Setting To set the protection function it is necessary to calculate the rated generator impedance at voltage Vn1 m ZN 20kV 19MVA m ZN 21 05 The transformer impedance at voltage Vn1 is Z_tx in MVA Z 100 KVLLN1 S_tx in MVA 0 933 Q The transformer resistance at voltage VLLN1 is R_tx Pcu 1000 ViLN1 S_tx 0 085 Q The transformer reactance at voltage VLLN1 is Xtx Ztx Rtx 0 9290 Circle 1 is set with a diameter Zn offset by X d 2 and the transformer reactance Circle 2 is set with a diameter Xd offset by X d 2 and the transformer reactance m Xa X d 200 ZN X tx 4 09 Q m Xb X d 200 1 ZN X tx 24 2 Q m Xc X d 200 X1 100 ZN X tx 57 1 Q The faults detected in circle 1 are violent field loss faults that must be clear
190. an also accept a zero sequence ct which measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So the port name INr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative or zero sequence depends on the type of CT s used 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 263 Appendix 264 63230 216 230B1 Function Settings Setting Coding Common Protection Settings Setting Coding Data Format All the settings are transmitted in 32 bit signed 2 s complement integer format Coding of Tripping and Timer Hold Curves The numbers correspond to the setting columns in the lists of settings Tripping Curves 0 definite time 1 inverse9 IEC VIT B 2 long time inverse10 IEC EIT C 3 very inverse11 IEEE Mod inverse 4 extremely inverse12 IEEE very inverse 5 ultra inverse13 IEEE extr inverse 6 RI14 IAC inverse 7 IEC SIT A15 IAC very inverse 8 IEC LTI B16 IAC extr inverse 24 Customized curve 2 Tripping Curves 0 definite11 IEEE moderately inverse 7 IEC inverse A12 IEEE very inverse 8 IEC long time inverse B13 IEEE extremely inverse 9 IEC very inverse B17 Specific Schneider curve 10 IEC extremely inverse C20 RI ER Timer Hold Curves 0 definite time 1 IDMT Common Protection Settings All protection functions have the following settings at the head of the table Setting
191. and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 m Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 m Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 m IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 m EEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 m IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 m AC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 m AC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 m AC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 129 amp Electric Protection Functions Capacitor Bank Unbalance ANSI Code 51C Detection of capacitor bank internal faults by Description The capacitor bank unbalance function detects unbalance current flowing between the two neutral points of double wye connected capacitor banks measurement of the unbalance current flowing between the two neutral points of a double wye connected capacitor bank 130 63230 216 230B1 The protection function is activated when the unbalance current is higher than the current set point Is during tripping time T Block Diagram Istep_x I gt Is DE51551 gt gt delayed output Characteristics pick up signal Settings Set Point Is Setting range 0 02 IN to 2 IN with a minimum value of 0 05 A Accuracy 1 45 Resolution 0 01 A Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 Time Delay Setting range 0 1 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time Pick u
192. and monitoring messages functions programmed using Logipam Protection functions Animated Logic outputs mimic diagram ld Logipam Programming Software The Logipam SFT2885 programming software can be used to m adapt predefined control and monitoring functions m program specific control and monitoring functions either to replace the predefined versions or to create completely new functions to provide all the i functions required by the application o It consists of m a ladder language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to De io it EH ed nhung Ge Se program complex control functions mt ms m a simulator for complete program debugging Le Win m m a code generator to run the program on Sepam mn da 4 Een To The ladder language program and the data used can be documented and a complete file can be printed E Offering more possibilities than the logic equation editor Logipam can be used to SFT2885 Logipam programming software create the following functions W Specific automatic transfer functions m motor starting sequences The functions programmed by Logipam cannot be combined with functions adapted by the logic equation editor in a given Sepam The Logipam program uses the input data from m protection functions m logic inputs m remote control commands m local control commands transmitted by the mimic based UMI The result of Logipam processing can be
193. ansformer IN is the CT rated secondary current Rct is the CT internal resistance Rw is the resistance of the CT load and wiring I3P is the maximum current value for a three phase short circuit Hp is the maximum current value for a phase to ground short circuit Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Main channels I Ir Additional channels l l r Isr Setting range 0 05 IN to 0 8 IN for IN 2 20A 0 1 IN to 0 8 IN for In 20A Accuracy 1 596 Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 93 2 Characteristic Times Operation time lt 55 ms at lir 2 1 lm Overshoot time lt 35 ms at ltr 2 1 IrO Reset time lt 45 ms at l1r 2 1 IrO Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P64REF x 101 m Protection blocking Pe4REF x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Protection output P64REF_x_3 Protection blocked P64REF x 16 m x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 185 amp Electric ssoonmo Protection Functions Motor protection against heat rise caused overly frequent starts Description Protection against motor overheating caused by m overly frequent starts motor energizing is blocked when the maximum permissible number of starts is reached m Starts occur too close to one another motor re energizing after a shutdown is allowed only after an adjusta
194. ation V Hz 24 2 2 2 2 Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 Remnant undervoltage 27R 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 D 2 2 Undervoltage L L or L n 27 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 Overvoltage L L or L n 59 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Negative sequence overvoltage 47 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 g 2 2 Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Rate of change of frequency 81R 2 Recloser 4 shots 2 79 n n n n Thermostat Pressure 26 63 n n n n n n n Temperature monitoring 38 49T D D D D D D D D D D 16 RTDs 9 Sync check 9 25 n n n n n n n n n o n n Circuit breaker contactor control 94 69 D D D D D D D D o n D D D D o o Automatic transfer AT o o o o o n n a a a n o Load shedding automatic restart De excitation Genset shutdown Capacitor step control a Zone Selective Interlocking 68 n n n n n n n n n n n n n n E o Latching acknowledgement 86 LI Li Annunciation 30 LI LI LI Li Switching of groups of settings LI 8 D D Adaptation using logic equations D Logipam programming Ladder language D n n n n n n n n n n n n n D n The figures indicate the number of relays available for each protection function m standard n options 1 Protection functions
195. ble thermal withstand curve Conditions are correct at 10 IB In the range of currents close to the permissible current the 1 second thermal withstand is used to estimate maximum thermal withstand for the cable assuming there are no heat exchanges The maximum tripping time is calculated as I x tmax constant Ith 1 s x 1 For the cable in question and at 10 IB tmax Ith 1 s I0Ib 22400 3500 41 s For 10 IB 3500 A and la IB 1 38 the value of k in the cold tripping curve table is k 0 0184 The tripping time at 10 IB is therefore t kxTx60 0 0184 x 30 x 60 35 6s lt tmax For a 10 IB fault occuring after a rated operation phase with 100 heat rise the value ofk is k 0 0097 The tripping time is t kxTx60 0 0097 x 30 x 60 17 5 s Coordination Check Coordination between 49RMS for the cable and the downstream protection curves including 49RMS Protection Functions must be checked to avoid any risk of nuisance tripping Schneider 63230 216 230B1 95 amp Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Cables ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Curves for Initial Heat Rise 0 Iph IB 0 55 0 60 0 65 0 70 0 75 0 80 0 85 0 90 0 95 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 la IB 0 50 1 7513 1 1856 0 8958 0 7138 0 5878 0 4953 0 4247 0 3691 0 3244 0 2877 0 2572 0 2314 0 2095 0 1907 0 1744 0 1601 0 55 1 8343 1 2587 0 9606 0 7717 0 6399 0 5425 0 467
196. ble time delay Starting is detected when the current drawn rises above 596 of current IB The number of starts is limited by m the number of starts Nt allowed per period of time P m the permissible number of consecutive hot starts Nh m the permissible number of consecutive cold starts Nc 136 63230 216 230B1 Starts per Hour ANSI Code 66 The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P Nt minutes The motor hot state corresponds to the overshooting of the fixed set point 5096 heat rise of the thermal overload function During re acceleration the motor is subjected to a stress similar to that of starting without the current first passing through a value less than 596 of IB In this case the number of starts is not incremented It is however possible to increment the number of starts for a re acceleration using a logic input or information from a logic equation or Logipam program motor re acceleration input The stop start time delay T may be used to block starting after a stop until the delay has elapsed and thus impose a minimum stop time before each restart Use of Circuit Breaker Closed Data In synchronous motor applications it is advisable to connect the circuit breaker closed data to a logic input in order to enable more precise detection of starts User Information The following information is available for the user m the time before a start is allowed m the number of starts
197. c Control and Monitoring Switchgear Control Functions Typical Breaker amp Contactor Diagrams Breaker AC 3 Line Typical Vox 19 eouenbes o18z 19SZ g1 Bunous 9 g oz N E NA r P d 2 EE sA EE A Q I s v Es m m m m g3 1 AB D N L o g gt m S iE DP amp DoS 8 53 i 3 FF 1 MS 1SeL LIO Linvs GND LX mue Wd 10 WO Bo aMmod wedas LL Va oer y mn eet Iv L LAO LINVA GND LT SS 1 T NI l SES NC MS mol Wd 10 WO otBoiewod nen Bet he o EORR NC OR RETE ONES a oS i EAT 1 e e ES EE g7 io ges BAR Fee 1 T 3 der 1 N OUO i gt H uj 388 282 Ge ele ee S ICD QE TE her et ee eas eh Ce DOPO T i e VA og i N 2b SS 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 Electric res dAL INIT E Ov HIMV3HE 08 S31H3S wl AVd3S Control and Monitoring Functions 194 Switchgear Control Typical Breaker amp Contactor Diagrams Breaker DC Control Typical SEPAM Series 80 Breaker DC Control Typical x Vdc Control Voltage Sepam series 80 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSE CIRCUIT e E USING SEPAM SERIES 80 USING
198. c current Ic processing 0 8 ls phase a delayed phase a instantaneous phase b delayed phase b instantaneous DE50849 DE80139 phase c instantaneous delayed fe output for tripping phase c delayed gt pick up signal phase 1 instantaneous reverse zone phase 2 instantaneous Breverse zone phase 3 instantaneous reverse zone phase a inst 0 8 s DE52316 phase b inst 0 8 s phase c inst 0 8 s reverse zone instantaneous Tesen direction gt indication instantaneous output 0 8 Is for closed ring logic discrimination Tripping logic parameter setting one out ofthree 2 two out of three Grouping output data 138 63230 216 230B1 gr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider
199. cables and implement directional and differential protection functions The phasor is programmable and the following choices equip the user to adapt the diagram according to requirements m measurements displayed in the phasor diagram m reference phasor m display mode Measurements to be Displayed m phase currents on main and additional channel residual currents measured or with sum on main and additional channels symmetrical components of current I1 12 Irx 3 phase to neutral voltages on main and additional channels phase to phase voltages on main and additional channels residual voltages on main and additional channels symmetrical components of voltage V1 V2 Vr 3 Reference Phasor The phasor used as reference is chosen from the phase or residual current or voltage phasors Phase shifts of the other phasors displayed are calculated according to this reference choice When the reference phasor is too small 2 In for currents or 5 Vn for voltages display is impossible Display Mode Geet m Display as true values The measurements are displayed without any modification in a scale chosen in relation to the respective rated values O Oto 2 Max IN I N for currents o Oto2Max Vip V p for voltages m Display as values normalized in relation to the maximum The measurements are normalized in relation to the greatest measurement of the same type The greatest measurement is displayed full scale with a modulus equal to 1 and th
200. calculated by the number of starts protection function The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor Readout The measurements may be accessed via m aSepam display by means of the amp icon m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Resetting to Zero The number of starts counters may be reset to zero after entry of a password on m the Sepam display via the icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 60 Units None Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Start Block Time Operation Start block time is calculated by the number of starts protection function This function indicates that starting is blocked when the allowed number of starts is reached and the circuit breaker is open The time given represents the waiting time before starting is allowed Readout The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 360 min Units min Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 min Refresh Interval 1 second typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50311 Metering Functions 87M 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Machine Ope
201. ck 12 V2 tripping set point K 13 12 tripping set point 14 3 V 2 Vu loss time 10 ms 15 V2 I2 criterion time 10 ms Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 271 amp Electric Appendix 272 63230 216 230B1 Function Settings Other Function Settings ANSI 79 Recloser Function number 1701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Number of shots 0104 6 Reclaim time 10 ms 7 Safety time until ready 10 ms 8 Maximum additional dead time 0 no 1 yes 9 Maximum wait time 10 ms 10 Step 1 activation mode see note 11 Step 2 8 4 activation mode see note 12 Step 1 dead time 10 ms 13 Step 2 dead time 10 ms 14 Step 3 dead time 10 ms 15 Step 4 dead time 10 ms Nota The activation of each of the cycles is coded as follows Bit Activation by if bit set to 1 Non activation by if bit set to 0 0 Instantaneous protection 50 51 unit 1 1 Delayed protection 50 51 unit 1 2 Instantaneous protection 50 51 unit 2 3 Delayed protection 50 51 unit 2 4 Instantaneous protection 50 51 unit 3 5 Delayed protection 50 51 unit 3 6 Instantaneous protection 50 51 unit 4 7 Delayed protection 50 51 unit 4 8 Instantaneous protection 50N 51N unit 1 9 De ayed protection 50N 51N unit 1 10 Ins antaneous protection 50N 51N unit 2 11 De ayed protection 50N 51N unit 2 12 Ins antaneous protection 50N 51N unit 3 13 De ayed protect
202. cked P59_x_16 D Instantaneous output Van or Vab P59_x_23 D Instantaneous output Vbn or Vbc P59_x_24 Instantaneous output Ven or Vca P59_x_25 Delayed output Van or Vab P59_x_26 D D Delayed output Vbn or Vbc P59_x_27 Delayed output Vcn or Vca P59 x 28 D D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 When the protection function is used for phase to neutral voltage Schneider 63230 216 230B1 131 Protection Functions Protection against insulation faults 132 63230 216 230B1 Neutral Voltage Displacement ANSI Code 59N Description This function provides protection against insulation faults by measuring the residual voltage Vr or the neutral point voltage Vint for generators and motors The residual voltage is obtained by the vector sum of the phase voltages or by measurements using delta connected VTs The neutral point voltage is measured by a VT inserted in the neutral point of the generator or the motor The protection function includes a time delay T either definite or IDMT dependent on the residual voltage Vr see tripping curve equation on page 173 It operates only when a residual or neutral point voltage is available by connecting VanVbnVon Vr or Vint Block Diagram Van 8 Vbn X g Vcn T 0 gt delayed output External VT residual or neutral pick up signal voltage Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range M
203. ckel Ni120 100 Q or 120 Q at 0 C or 32 F Each RTD channel gives one measurement tx RTD x temperature The function also indicates RTD faults m RTD disconnected t gt 205 C ort gt 401 F m RTD shorted t lt 35 C ort lt 31 F If a fault occurs display of the value is blocked The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the key in C or F m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Range 30 C to 200 C 22 F to 392 F Resolution 1 C 1 F Accuracy 1 C from 20 C to 140 C 1 8 F from 68 F to 284 F 2 C from 30 C to 20 C 3 6 F from 22 F to 68 F 2 C from 140 C to 200 C 3 6 F from 284 F to 392 F Refresh interval 5 seconds typical Accuracy Derating According to Wiring Connection in 3 wire mode the error At is directly proportional to the length of the connector and inversely proportional to the connector cross section ACC 2x Km S mm m 2 1 C km for a cross section of 0 93 mm AWG 18 W 1 C km for a cross section of 1 92 mm AWG 14 Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 31 amp Electric Metering Functions Rotation Speed Operation Use this function to determine the rotation speed of a motor or generator rotor Whenever a ro
204. close request in process SYNC IN PROCESS SYNC IN PROCESS Sync checked close request successful SYNC OK SYNC OK Closing failed out of sync SYNC FAILURE SYNC FAILURE Closing failed out of sync cause dU SYNC FAILED dU SYNC FAILED dV Closing failed out of sync cause dPHI SYNC FAILED dPhi SYNC FAILED dPhi Closing failed out of sync cause dF SYNC FAILED dF SYNC FAILED df Stop closing with sync check STOP SYNC STOP SYNC Tie closing with sync check failed TIE SYNC FAILED TIE SYNC FAILED Undervoltage 27 UNDERVOLTAGE 1 UNDERVOLTAGE 1 Positive sequence undervoltage 27D Positive sequence undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE PS UNDERVOLTAGE PS Reverse rotation ROTATION REV ROTATION Third harmonic undervoltage 27TN 64G2 100 STATOR 100 STATOR GROUND Active overpower 32P OVERP OVER POWER Reactive overpower 32Q OVERQ EXCESS OVER VAR Phase undercurrent 37 UNDER CURRENT UNDERCURRENT Phase underpower 37P UNDER POWER UNDER POWER Temperature monitoring 38 49T Alarm OVER TEMP ALM OVER TEMP ALM Tripping OVER TEMP TRIP OVER TEMP TRIP Field loss 40 FIELD LOSS LOSS OF FIELD Negative sequence unbalance 46 UNBALANCE CURRENT UNBAL Negative sequence overvoltage 47 UNBALANCE U VOLTAGE UNBAL Excessive starting time locked rotor 48 51LR Excessive starting time LONG START LONG START Locked rotor in normal operation ROTOR BLOCKING JAMMED STALL Locked rotor on start LOCKED ROTOR STRT LOCKED ROTR Thermal overload 49RMS Alarm THERMAL ALARM THERMAL ALARM Tripp
205. cluded in underfrequency protection functions It consists of activating the frequency variation restraint and does not call for implementation of the rate of change of frequency protection function 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 159 lectric DE50311 Protection Functions Phase to phase short circuit protection for generators and motors Description This is phase to phase short circuit protection and is based on phase by phase comparison of the currents on motor and generator windings This function enables if the difference in current is greater than the set point defined by m apercentage based curve m a differential curve high set point Tripping restraint ensures stability due to m detection of an external fault or machine starting m detection of CT saturation m fast detection of CT loss m detection of transformer energizing 87M 63230 216 230B1 160 Machine Differential ANSI Code 87M Percentage Based Differential The percentage based tripping characteristic compares the through current to the differential current According to the current measurement convention shown in the diagram and respecting the recommended wiring system the differential and through currents are calculated by m differential current gt 2 Idx tal through current Por Itx at where x a b c The percentage based characteristic is made up to two half c
206. comply with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30 200 ms 2000 operations 8 63230 216 230B1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Introduction Environmental Characteristics Emission Tests Disturbing field emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Immunity Tests Radiated Disturbances Immunity to radiated fields ANSI C37 90 2 1995 35 V m 25 MHz 1 GHz IEC 60255 22 3 II 10 V m 80 MHz 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 10 V m 80 MHz 2 GHz Electrostatic discharge ANSI C 37 90 3 8 kV air 4 kV contact IEC 60255 22 2 8 kV air 6 kV contact Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000 4 8 4 30 A m continuous 300 A m 1 3 s Immunity Tests Conducted Disturbances Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255 22 6 II 10V Fast transient bursts ANSI C37 90 1 4 kV 2 5 kHz IEC 60255 22 4 AandB 4 kV 2 5 kHz 2 kV 5 kHz IEC 61000 4 4 IV 4 kV 2 5 kHz 1 MHz damped oscillating wave ANSI C37 90 1 2 5 kV 2 5 kHz IEC 60255 22 1 2 5 KV CM 1kV DM Surges IEC 61000 4 5 Il 2 KV CM 1 kV DM Voltage interruptions IEC 60255 11 100 during 100 ms In Operation Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 1 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Fc 2 Hz 13 2 Hz a 1 mm Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 10 Gn 11 ms Groundquakes IEC 60255 21 3 2 2 Gn horizontal axes 1 Gn vertical axes De Energized
207. counts only trips triggered by protection functions 50 51 50V 51V and 67 Ifthere is discrimination between several circuit breakers the fault is only counted by the Sepam that issues the trip command Transient faults cleared by the recloser are counted The number of phase fault trips is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure It can be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display through the amp icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m the communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 65535 Units None Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Number of Ground Fault Trips Operation This function counts the network ground faults that cause circuit breaker tripping It counts only those trips that are triggered by protection functions 50N 51N and 67N If there is discrimination between several circuit breakers the fault is only counted by the Sepam that issues the trip command Transient faults cleared by the recloser are counted The number of ground fault trips is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure It can be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display through the amp icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m the communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 65535 Units None Reso
208. cs CT VT sensors CT Logic input output assignment used Charact Pulse O1 Yes NO O2 ies NC 03 ies NO O4 Mo OS jYes NC 200 ms SFT2841 default parameter setting of the logic outputs assigned to Switchgear control Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Parameter Setting The Switchgear control function is set up and adapted to match the type of breaking device to be controlled using the SFT2841 software Control Logic Tab W activation of the Switchgear control function W choice of the type of breaking device to be controlled circuit breaker by default or contactor W activation of the Sync check function if necessary Logic I Os Tab m assignment of the logic inputs required m definition of logic output behavior By default the following outputs are used Logic Output Associated Internal Command Circuit Breaker Contacts O1 Trip Normally Open NO V TRIPPED O2 Close block Normally Closed NC V_CLOSE_BLOCKED 03 Close Normally Open NO V_CLOSED m the Trip command is always associated with output O1 If output O1 is set up for pulse type operation the pulse command duration may be set up m the optional Close block and Close commands may be assigned to any logic output Matrix Screen Logic Button Modification of the default internal command assignment to outputs O2 and O3 if necessary 192 63230 216 230B1 gr d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectri
209. ctional Active Overpower 1 to 120 of Sn 0 1 s to 300s ANSI 32Q Directional Reactive Overpower 5 to 120 of Sn 2 0 1 s to 300s ANSI 37 Phase Undercurrent 0 05 to 1 IB 0 05 s to 300s ANSI 37P Directional Active Underpower 5 to 100 of Sn 2 0 1 s to 300s ANSI 38 49T Temperature Monitoring Alarm set point TS1 0 C to 180 C or 32 F to 356 F Trip set point TS2 0 C to 180 C or 32 F to 356 F ANSI 40 Field Loss Underimpedance Common point Xa 0 02 VN IB to 0 2 Vin lB 187 5 kQ Circle 1 Xb 0 2 VN IB to 1 4 Vin IB 187 5 KQ 0 05 to 300 s Circle 2 Xc 0 6 VN IB to 3 Vi IB 187 5 KQ 0 1 to 300 s 1 Sn V3 IN Vup Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 61 Protection Functions Setting Ranges ANSI 46 Negative Sequence Unbalance Tripping curve Definite time Schneider Electric IEC SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C IEEE MI D VI E El F RI setting constant from 1 to 100 Is set point 0 to 5 IB Definite time 0 1 to 300 s 0 1 to 0 5 IB Schneider Electric IDMT 0 1 to 1s 0 1 to 1 IB IEC IEEE 0 03 to 0 2 IB RI Measurement origin Main channels I or additional channels l ANSI 47 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Set point and time delay 1 to 50 of Vip 0 05 to 300 s Measurement origin Main channels V or additional channels V ANSI 48 51LR Locked Rotor Excessive Starting Time I
210. ctions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode No time tagged events are sent by the communication link Test mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_TEST 1 The Logipam programming software can be used to customize control mode processing Mimic Diagram and Symbols A mimic diagram or single line diagram is a simplified diagram of an electrical installation It is made up of a fixed background on which symbols and measurements are placed The mimic diagram editor integrated in the SFT2841 software can be used to personalize and setup mimic diagrams The symbols that make up the mimic diagram constitute the interface between the mimic based UMI and the other Sepam control functions There are three types of symbols m fixed symbol represents the electrotechnical devices that are neither animated or controlled e g a transformer m animated symbol with one or two inputs represents the electrotechnical devices that change on the mimic diagram depending on the symbol inputs but cannot be controlled via the Sepam mimic based UMI This type of symbol is used for switch disconnectors without remote control for example m controlled symbol with one or two inputs outputs represents the electrotechnical devices that change on the mimic diagram depending on the symbol inputs and can be controlled via the Sepam mimic based UMI This type of symbol is used for circuit breakers for example The symbol outputs are used
211. ctric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 157 amp Electric Protection Functions Rate of Change of Frequency df dt ANSI Code 81R Disconnection Application The rate of change of frequency df dt function can be used on service entrance mains that include generators that operate in parallel with the utility grid If under these conditions the utility experiences an outage the co gen will temporarily try to back feed the utility system If the power flow from the utility prior to the service switchgear main was not a zero value the generator frequency changes The df dt protection function detects an islanded generator operation more rapidly than conventional frequency Protection Functions Other disturbances such as short circuits load fluctuations and switching may cause changes of frequency The low set point may be reached temporarily due to these disturbances and a time delay is necessary In order to maintain the advantage of the speed of the df dt protection compared to conventional frequency protection functions a second higher set point with a short time delay may be added The actual rate of change of frequency is not constant Often the rate is highest at the beginning of the disturbance and decreases afterward This extends the tripping time of frequency protection functions but does not affect the tripping time of the rate of change of frequency protection function Low Set Point m Follow the utility s
212. current set point Low auxiliary voltage threshold The auxiliary voltage is below the low threshold High auxiliary voltage threshold The auxiliary voltage is above the high threshold Low battery fault Battery low or absent MET1482 No 1 fault MET1482 No 2 fault Hardware problem on an MET 1482 module module 1 or 2 or on an RTD Watchdog CT Supervision Main CT fault Monitoring of Sepam operation current input CT fault Always on O5 if used Additional CT fault VT Supervision Main VT fault phase channel l current input CT fault V voltage input phase VT fault Main VT fault residual channel Vr voltage input residual VT fault Additional VT fault phase channel V voltage input phase VT fault Additional VT fault residual channel Sync Check Closing with sync check V r voltage input residual VT fault Circuit breaker close request with sync check by the ANSI 25 function has been initiated Switchgear control with sync check func ion Closing with sync check completed Breaker closing with sync check by the ANSI 25 function successful Switchgear control wi func ion h sync check Closing failed out of sync Synchronism conditions too short to enable breaker closing Switchgear control wi func ion h sync check Closing failed out of sync cause dU Breaker closing blocked because sources are out of sync due to an excessive v
213. curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT IEC SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Customized DT Is set point 0 05 to 24 IN Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 05 to 2 4 IN IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s Measurement origin Main channels I or additional channels l Confirmation None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase to phase undervoltage 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is 62 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Setting Ranges ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Ground Fault Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E EI F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT EPATR B EPATR C DT Customized DT Isr set point 0 01 to 15 Inr min 0 1 A Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 01 to 1 Inr min 0 1 A IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Isr 0 6to5A EPATR B 0 5to1s 0 6to5A EPATR C 0 1 to3s Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5sto 20s Measurement origin Ir input Tr input sum of phase currents Ir or sum of phase currents Ir ANSI
214. cy 1 typical 1 1 typical 1 Display Format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits 1 At IN V p pf gt 0 8 under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Accumulated Active and Reactive Energy by Pulse Metering Operation Use this option to monitor energy from logic inputs Energy incrementing is associated with each input one of the general parameters to be set Each input pulse increments the meter Four inputs and four accumulated energy metering options are available m positive and negative active energy m positive and negative reactive energy The accumulated active and reactive energy values are saved if the system loses power Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Active Energy Reactive Energy Metering Capacity 0 to 2 1 10 MW h 0 to 2 1 10 MVAR h Units MW h MVAR h Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 MVAR h Display Format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Increment 0 1 kW h to 5 MW h 0 1 kVAR h to 5 MVAR h Pulse 15 ms min 15 ms min Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Temperature Operation This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs m platinum Pt100 100 Q at 0 C or 32 F in accordance with IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m ni
215. d 46 Reserved 47 Reserved 48 Reserved Application Specific Parameters These settings are read accessible only Function number D003 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Transformer presence 1 no 2 yes 2 Voltage winding 1 V 1 220 to 250000 V 3 Voltage winding 2 V 2 220 to 440000 V 4 Power S 100 to 999000 kVA 5 Vector shift Oto 11 6 Rated motor speed 100 to 3600 rpm 7 Number of pulses per rotation 1 to 1800 8 Zero speed threshold 5 to 20 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 273 Appendix 274 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Appendix 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 275 lectric Appendix 276 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Schneider Electric USA Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified 295 Tech Park Drive Suite 100 personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising LaVergne TN 37086 out of the use of this material Tel 1 888 SquareD 1 888 778 2733 www us squared com 63230 216 230B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
216. d 2 is assigned to an output Oxxx 0103 by default The SFT 2841 software indicates the type of threshold logic or time based according to the input output parameter setting l n 1 Sepam l Send BSIG1 BSIG2 Reception N O Tv Send BSIG1 Send BSIG2 output output to Send Ge n other level BSIG1 BSIG2 n Sepams Reception WW Assigning protection devices to the two ZSI groups is fixed and cannot be modified When ZSI is used it is important to ensure that the measurement origin and logic group to which the unit is assigned are in accordance By default the same logic group has the same measurement origin When several origins are possible the main channels la Ib Ic and Ir are assigned by default to the first group and the additional channels l a l b l c l r to the second 63230 216 230B1 211 Control and Monitoring Functions Time seconds 212 100 1000 10000 Current amperes 63230 216 230B1 ZSI TIME SAVING VS TIME BASED COORDINATION R6 R3 R2 R4 R1 R5 100000 Relay 6 Relay 3 Relay 2 Relay 4 Relay 1 Relay 5 Zone Selective Interlocking Principle The duration of blocking signals lasts as long as it takes to clear the fault If Sepam issues a tripping command the blocking signals are interrupted after a time delay that takes into account the breaking device operatin
217. d protection functions The protection functions concerned are those that detect internal faults in generators or transformers of generator transformer units They are divided into 2 groups protection functions that contribute to shutdown regardless of the circuit breaker position and those whose contribution is dependent on the circuit breaker position W protection functions unrelated to circuit breaker position 12 21B 24 27TN 32Q 40 51V 64REF 67 67N 81L 87M 87T W protection functions dependent on circuit breaker position 50 51 50N 51N 59N The delayed unlatched outputs of these protection units activate shutdown only if the circuit breaker is open Participation in the function is an individual setting located in the protection setting tabs of the SFT2841 software for each protection unit that can take part in genset shutdown At the same time the function gives a tripping command via switchgear control to disconnect the generator from the power network It must be associated with a logic output in the matrix to initiate genset shutdown 226 63230 216 230B1 TC35 genset shutdown A 44 A TC36 end of genset 40 Schneider amp Electric Generator Shutdown amp Tripping Genset Shutdown Block Diagram Gap 1 shutdown inhibit remote control logic input genset shutdown V SHUTDOWN 50 51 i 50N 51N La 59N H circuit breaker op
218. dard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse EE EEE IAC extremely inverse m when the monitored value is more than 20 times the set point the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point m if the monitored value exceeds the measurement capacity of Sepam 40 IN for the phase current channels 20 Inr for the residual current channels the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to the largest measurable value 40 IN or 20 INr 172 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Equation k T ty x gt a HR ls Equation t B xt qa ls Equation t4 D A 8 D E Equation for ANSI 27 Undervoltage LAUN le Equation for ANSI 24 Overexcitation V Hz Where G Vif or Mut 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved a General Trip Curves Current IDMT Tripping Curves Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered to cover most applications m IEC curves SIT VIT LTI EIT m IEEE curves MI VI El m commonly used curves
219. der 63230 216 230B1 47 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric Metering Functions 48 63230 216 230B1 Machine Operation Assistance Third Harmonic Neutral Point and Residual Voltages Third Harmonic Neutral Point Voltage Operation Measuring the third harmonic component of the zero sequence voltage occurs at the neutral point of a generator or motor VOntH3 The value is used for implementing the third harmonic undervoltage protection function ANSI 27TN 64G2 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 2 to 30 of Vnt Units of Vnt Resolution 0 1 Accuracy 1 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Third Harmonic Residual Voltage Operation This is a measurement of the third harmonic component of the residual voltage The residual voltage is calculated by the vectoral sum of the phase to neutral voltages The value is used for implementing the third harmonic undervoltage protection function ANSI 27TN 64G2 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display by using the e icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 2 to 90 of Vi p Units fo Vi p Resolution 0 1 Accuracy 1 41 Refre
220. derfrequency ANSI Code 81L Description This function detects abnormally low frequency and compares it to the rated frequency in order to monitor power supply quality The protection can be used for overall tripping or load shedding The frequency is calculated using voltage Van or Vab when only one voltage is connected Otherwise the positive sequence voltage V1 is used to provide greater stability It is compared to the frequency set point Fs The protection function is blocked if the value of voltage used for calculations is below the adjustable set point Vs Protection stability is provided in the event of the loss of the main source and presence of remnant voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of the frequency The protection includes a definite DT time delay T Block Diagram Vbc m Vab Vi V3 V1 Vs F F lt Fs DE50861 delayed output T dF at gt dFs at pick up signal setting n without restraint with restraint Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Main channels Vit Additional channels Mu Fs Set Point Setting range 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz Accuracy 1 0 01 Hz Resolution 0 1 Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz Time Delay T Setting range 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings Vs Set Point Setting range 20
221. direction a c b V2 3 Van aVbn aVcn m or from the two main phase to phase voltages gt 1 2 gt D phase rotation direction a b c V2 3 Vab aVbc TT gt 1 2 D phase rotation direction a c b V2 3 Vab a Vbc The additional negative sequence voltage V 2 is calculated the same way m from the three additional phase to neutral voltages V an V bn and V cn m or from the two additional phase to phase voltages V ab and V ac Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the el key m a PC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 05 to 1 2 Vap 1 Units V or kV Resolution 1V Accuracy x2 at Vip Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 VNp primary rated phase to neutral voltage VNp V p 8 24 63230 216 230B1 gr d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Frequency Operation Frequency is measured by the following means m based on Vab or Van if only one phase to phase voltage connects to Sepam m based on positive sequence voltage in other cases Frequency is not measured if m the voltage Vab or Van or positive sequence voltage V1 is less than 40 of VLL m the frequency f is outside the measurment range The measurement of the frequency f is calculated according to the same
222. ds and detecting rotor Description locking Rotation speed is calculated by measuring the time between pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor at each passage of one or more cams driven by the rotation of a motor or generator shaft see a more in depth description in the Metering Functions chapter of this manual 1 05 Qs l H 2 Qs T l 8 Monitoring machine speed involves 5 0 050n m detecting machine underspeed after starting for process monitoring for example I m zero speed data for detection of locked rotor pick up The speed acquisition and zero speed detection parameters must be set on the on Particular characteristics screen of the SFT2841 software delayed ti S i output The Rotor speed measurement function must be assigned to logic input 1104 for the function to work The protection function picks up if the speed measured drops below the speed set point after having first exceeded the set point by 5 Zero speed is detected by unit 1 and is used by protection function 48 51 LR to detect rotor locking The protection includes a definite DT time delay T Block Diagram pick up 8 signal 8 Rotor Speed measurement Q zm zero speed for protectior 48 51LR Characteristics Settings Set Point Os Setting range 10 to 100 of Qn Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 105 Time Delay T Setting range 1 s to 300 s Accuracy 1 25 ms or 60000
223. dules 42 inputs and 23 outputs 182 63230 216 230B1 Description Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation The main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs outputs are assigned The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software which offers the following customization options m logic equation editor to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions m creation of personalized messages for local annunciation m creation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices m customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays LEDs and annunciation messages With the Logipam option Sepam provides the most varied control and monitoring functions programmed using the SFT2885 programming software that implements the Logipam ladder language Operating Principle The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into three phases 1 acquisition of input data m results of protection function processing m external logic data connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input output module m local control commands transmitted by the mimic based UMI m remote control commands
224. e A phase current vector plane is divided into two half planes that correspond to the line zone and bus zone The characteristic angle 0 is the angle of the perpendicular to the boundary line between the two zones and the polarization value Voltage Memory Should all the voltages disappear during a 3 phase fault near the bus the voltage level may be insufficient for the fault direction to be detected lt 1 5 Vii p The protection function therefore uses a voltage memory to reliably determine the direction The fault direction is saved as long as the voltage level is too low and the current is above the Is set point Closing on a Pre Existing Fault If the circuit breaker is closed when there is a pre existing 3 phase fault on the bus the voltage memory is blank As a result the direction cannot be determined and the protection does not trip In such cases a backup 50 51 protection function should be used 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 MT11128 DE50667 bus zone Fault tripping in line zone with 30 line 8 zone bus a la zone a bus 6 45 zone Vbc bus e zone Vac line zone Fault tripping in line zone with 0 45 H bus 8 zone bus zone Vca zone Fault tripping in line zone with 60 Tripping Logic In certain cases it is wise to select the two out of three phases tripping logic Such cas
225. e Shcecicat vorge Rec x Ren um LE Coppa ons FT pw Dose Deiere eee tern Pr 7 4 uc Na rame need cf the 2 carina T SI Mme 1 Convet Db Cac defirtion pont gt 3366 80925660 I 3 Cect Xe Rech defirtion po gt 18353 18195435 a Geng Trarulornen mactarce CS 86 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Loss of Field ANSI Code 40 SFT2841 Setting Help The SFT2841 software includes a setting assistance function to calculate the values of Xa Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine and transformer when applicable Data used W synchronous machine D synchronous reactance Xd in D transient synchronous reactance X d in m transformer D winding 1 voltage ViLN1 in V kV D short circuit voltage Viisc in H rated power in KVA MVA D copper losses in kQ MQ The proposed settings are circle one with a diameter ZN if Xd 2 20096 or a diameter Xd 2 in all other cases and circle two with a diameter Xd The two circles are offset from zero by X d 2 ZN the rated machine impedance VLL1 31B ZN Characteristics Settings Common Point Xa Setting range 0 02Vn lB lt Xa x 0 20VN IB 187 5 KQ or 0 001 Q Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Circle 1 Xb Setting range 0 20Vn lB lt Xa x 1 40VN IB 187 5 KQ Accuracy 1 45 Resolution 0 001 Q or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 105 of circle 1 diameter Circle 2 Xc Setting range 0 60VN IB x Xa lt 3VN IB 187
226. e Step 4 opening command D Free Step 1 closing command Free Step 2 closing command Free Step 3 closing command Free Step 4 closing command Free Step 1 external trip Free Step 2 external trip D Free Step 3 external trip D Free Step 4 external trip Free Capacitor step 1 VAR control D Free Capacitor step 2 VAR control D Free Capacitor step 3 VAR control D Free Capacitor step 4 VAR control D Free External capacitor step control block D Free Manual capacitor step control Free Automatic capacitor step control Free 186 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Logic Input Output Assignment Functions The table below lists the logic input assignment obtained with the SFT2841 configuration software by clicking on the standard assignment button Closed circuit breaker 1101 Al Open circuit breaker 1102 Al Blocking reception 1 1103 All except M8x Blocking reception 2 1104 All except S80 S81 T81 M8x B8x C86 Close enable ANSI 25 1104 S80 S81 T81 B8x SF6 pressure default 1105 Al Open command 1106 Al Close command 1107 Al Block recloser 1108 S80 S81 Buchholz trip 1108 T8x M88 G88 Thermostat trip 1109 T8x M88 G88 Pressure trip 1110 T8x M88 G88 Thermistor trip 1111 T8x M88 G88 Buchholz alarm 1112 T8x M88 G88 Thermostat alarm 1113 T8x M88 G
227. e direction see diagram The measurements are used when Sepam is commissioned to check voltage and current inputs for correct wiring When the phase to phase voltages Vab and Vbc are connected to Sepam and there is no measurement of residual voltage Vr the residual voltage is presumed to be zero The function does not operate when only the voltage Vab or Van is connected to Sepam This function recognizes the convention regarding the direction of energy flow in the outgoing and incoming circuits see Power measurements Therefore the angles qa qb and qc are adjusted 180 with respect to the values acquired by Sepam for the incoming circuits Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display through the amp icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 2 Refresh Interval 2 seconds typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Metering Functions Network Diagnosis Disturbance Recording Operation This function records analog signals and logical states Record storing is initiated by one or more events set using the SFT2841 software The stored event begins before the event based on the pre trigger programming and continues afterwards Recordings comprise the following information m values sampled from the different signals m date m characteristics
228. e of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user see Latching acknowledgement function m indication of the cause of tripping D locally by LEDs Trip and others and by messages on the display D remotely by remote indications see Indications function Closing with Sync Check 9 The Sync check function checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker to ensure safe closing It is put into service by parameter setting For sync check to operate one of the Close enable logic outputs of an MCS025 remote module must be connected to a Sepam logic input assigned to the Close enable function If itis necessary to close the circuit breaker without taking into account the synchronization conditions this may be done by a logic equation or by Logipam via the V CLOSE NOCTRL input Controlling Logic Outputs Logic commands from the Switchgear control function are used to control the Sepam logic outputs that control breaking device opening and closing Logic output control is set up to match the device to be controlled i e a circuit breaker or contactor Controlling Capacitor Banks The Sepam C86 Switchgear control function can control the breaking device and 1 to 4 capacitor step switches This particular function is described separately 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE52272 Control and Monitoring Switchgear Control Functions ANSI Code 94 69 Processin
229. e others are displayed as relative values compared to the modulus 1 value This display provides maximum angular resolution regardless of the measured values while maintaining the relative values between measurements m Display as values normalized to 1 all the measurements are normalized in relation to themselves and displayed with a modulus of 1 equal to full scale This mode provides optimal display of the angles between phasors but does not allow moduli to be compared Phasor diagram on SFT2841 m Displaying phase to phase voltage values in a triangle arrangement for a more common display of phase to phase voltage phasors m Displaying or eliminating the scale for better reading of displayed phasors Readout All the possibilities described above can be accessed via the SFT2841 setting and operating software Two predefined displays are available on the mimic based UMI m the three phase currents and three phase to neutral voltages of the main channels m the three phase currents of the main channels and the three phase currents of the additional channels Characteristics Diagram Display Options of an SFT2841 Phasor Diagram Measurements to be Displayed Multiple selection from la Ib Ic ir Ir 11 I2 Ir2 8 l a I b l c l r l E Van Vbn Vcn Vr Vab VbcX Vac V1 V2 Vr 3 V an V bn V cn V r V ab V bc V ac Reference Phasor Single choice from la Ib Ic Ir Ird l r l E Van Vbn Vcn Vr Vab Vbc Vac V an V bn V
230. e phase and has a definite or IDMT time delay m each of the eight units has two groups of settings Switching to setting group A or B can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control command depending on the settings m for better detection of distant faults the protection function can be confirmed by D undervoltage protection unit 1 or O negative sequence overvoltage protection unit 1 m the customized curve defined point by point may be used with this protection function m an adjustable timer hold definite time or IDMT can be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults m Set IDMT Trip Curves by Time delay T at I Iset 10 or TMS Factor like Time Dial Setting refer to topic General Trip Curves at the end of this section Tripping Curve Timer Hold Definite time DT Definite time Standard inverse time SIT Definite time Very inverse time VIT or LTI Definite time Extremely inverse time EIT Definite time Ultra inverse time UIT Definite time RI curve Definite time IEC inverse time SIT A Definite time or IDMT IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B Definite time or IDMT IEC extremely inverse time EIT C Definite time or IDMT IEEE moderately inverse IEC D Definite time or IDMT IEEE very inverse IEC E Definite time or IDMT IEEE extremely inverse IEC F Definite time or IDMT IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC extremely inverse Definite time o
231. e stored in Sepam s memory and are displayed in connected mode In disconnected mode the last messages stored in Sepam connected mode are displayed m The user messages are saved with the other Sepam parameters and protection settings and are displayed in connected and disconnected modes Message Processing on the Sepam Display When an event occurs the related message appears on the Sepam display The user presses the clear key to clear the message and enable normal consultation of all the display The user must press the key to acknowledge latched events e g protection outputs The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history A key in which the last 16 messages are stored The last 250 messages may be consulted with the SFT2841 software To delete the messages stored in the alarm history m display the alarm history on the display W press the clear key LED Indication The 9 yellow LEDs on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events LED Event Name on Label on Front Panel LED 1 Trip protection 50 51 unit 1 1551 LED2 Trip protection 50 51 unit 2 I gt gt 51 LED 3 Trip protection 50N 51N unit 1 lo 51N LED 4 Trip protection 50N 51N unit 2 lo gt gt 51N LED 5 Ext LED 6 LED 7 Circuit breaker open la02 0 Off LED 8 Circuit breaker closed la01 On LED 9 Trip by circuit breaker control Trip The default parameter setting can be personalized usin
232. e time UIT Definite time RI curve Definite time IEC inverse time SIT A Definite time or IDMT IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B Definite time or IDMT IEC extremely inverse time EIT C Definite time or IDMT IEEE moderately inverse IEC D Definite time or IDMT IEEE very inverse IEC E Definite time or IDMT IEEE extremely inverse IEC F Definite time or IDMT IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT EPATR B Definite time EPATR C Definite time Customized Definite time Block Diagram pick up signal and to 8 logic discrimination 3 Input Ir Input l r L Ir gt Isr delayed output Irx l rx Ir gt 15 A gt 15 A set point output EPATR curves only Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 125 amp Electric DE80070 DE80071 Protection Functions Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G EPATR B curves EPATR B tripping curves are defined from the following equations m forlsr lt Ir lt 6 4 A t BSB D m if6 4A lt Ir lt 200A MER gis m forlr gt 200A t T 1 l i l ji A L 1 0 1 0 6 Isr 56 4 200 Ir EPATR B standard curve log scales Curve 1 Isr 5 A and T 1s Curve 2 Isr 0 6 AandT 0 5s Curve Isr and T EPATR C Curves EPATR C tripping curves are defined from the following equations 72 T m forisr lt Ir lt 200 A X T t 107 3 10 m forir gt 200 A t T EPATR C standard curve log scales Curve 1 Isr 5 A a
233. ection function operates only if the neutral point H3 voltage before the fault is greater than 0 2 of the network phase to neutral voltage and if the positive sequence voltage is greater than 30 of the phase to neutral voltage Adjustment This function does not require any particular measurements but in certain cases it may be necessary to adjust the K setting The Sepam unit measures the neutral point H3 voltage V3nt and the H3 residual voltage VrH32 to facilitate adjustment of the protection function m V3ntis expressed in of the primary voltage of the neutral point VT s Vntp m V8ntz is expressed in of the primary voltage of the terminal side VT s Vinp If the primary voltages of the VTs are different VntH3 must be adapted to the terminal side primary voltage Vnp using the equation VntH3 Vinp V3nt Vntp x VP See the table on the following page np Block Diagram 240ms 0 kg gt 0 002V_ p instantaneous Va Vant output L va T 0 gt tripping V3nt output 240ms 0 E gt 0 002Vntp VI v1503Vup DE51546 Characteristics Settings Type of Set Point 63230 216 230B1 Setting range Adaptive Time Delay Setting range 0 5 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings K Set Point Setting range 0 1 to 0 2 Accuracy 1 1 Resolution 0
234. ed in the Logipam program are displayed Comments Closing Closing by switchgear control function By default on O3 Only available if switchgear control is in circuit breaker mode Tripping Tripping by switchgear control function Forced on O1 if switchgear control is in circuit breaker mode Block closing Block by switchgear control function By default on O2 Only available if switchgear control is in circuit breaker mode Contactor control Contactor control Forced on O1 if switchgear control is in circuit breaker mode Pick up Logic OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units with the exception of protection units 38 49T 48 51LR 49 RMS 64G2 27TN 66 Drop out A protection unit time delay counter has not yet gone back to 0 Zone Selective Interlocking Zone selective Interlocking trip Tripping command sent by zone selective interlocking function Only when zone selective interlocking function is used without switchgear control function Blocking send 1 Sending of blocking signal to next Sepam in zone selective interlocking chain 1 By default on 0102 Blocking send 2 Motor Generator Control Load shedding Sending of blocking signal to next Sepam in zone selective interlocking chain 2 Sending of a load shedding command By default on 0103 Motor application Genset shutdown Sending of a prime mover shutdown command Generator application De excitation Recloser Reclose
235. ed rapidly Circle 2 may concern faults other than field loss faults and its tripping time is longer m T1 70ms m T2 500 ms 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 230B1 87 ectric Protection Functions Phase unbalance protection for lines and equipment x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 034 to 0 336 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 067 to 0 666 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 008 to 0 075 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 124 to 1 237 IEEE moderately inverse 0 415 to 4 142 IEEE very inverse 0 726 to 7 255 IEEE extremely inverse 1 231 to 12 30 88 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 Description This function provides protection against phase unbalance which is detected by measuring negative sequence current m sensitive protection to detect 2 phase faults at the ends of long lines m protection of equipment against temperature rise caused by an unbalanced power supply phase inversion or loss of phase and against phase current unbalance This function enables if the negative sequence current is greater than the operation set point The time delay may be definite time or IDMT according to a standardized curve a specially adapted Schneider curve or an I R curve for generator protection Tripping Curve Sch
236. eider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE51017 DE51509 Control and Monitoring Functions Transferred Condition Closed Transition One Main Closed Two Mains Closed 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Return to Normal Condition DE52253 Automatic Transfer Main Main Operation Voluntary Return to Normal Without Interruption Description The voluntary return to normal without interruption involves two separate control functions m closing of the open incoming circuit breaker with or without sync check the two incoming circuit breakers are closed m then opening of the normally open circuit breaker designated by the NO circuit breaker selector These two functions may also be used to transfer the bus supply source without any interruption Mandatory Transfer Conditions These conditions are required to enable transfer m the incoming circuit breaker is open m the voltage is OK upstream of the incoming circuit breaker Optional Transfer Conditions These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled m the Auto Manual selector is in the Manual position the 2 Local Remote selectors are in the Local position the 2 main circuit breakers are racked in no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function ANSI 60FL to avoid transfer on the loss of voltage transformers m no blocking of transfer by V TRANS STOP by logic equations or by Log
237. en 12 21B 24 27TN 32Q genset shutdown V_SHUTDN_ORD 51V 64REF 67 67N 81L 81R 87M 87T e e ke e ke ke ke ke ke Ne Ne e ke ke Characteristics Settings Activity Setting range On Off Selection of Protection Functions Activating Genset Shutdown Setting range per protection unit Enabled disabled Genset Shutdown Time Delay Setting range 0 to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Genset shutdown V SHUTDOWN m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Genset shutdown V_SHUTDN_ORD D D Genset shutdown on V_SHUTDN_ON D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Generator Shutdown amp Tripping Functions De Excitation Operation Block Diagram This function available in generator applications is used to quickly cut off the er SC an internal UE Jri E fault when the generator is disconnected from the 5 TC36 end of genset J oj rg network 5 shutdown m de excitation of the generator inhibit remote control m electrical shutdown by tripping de excitation De excitation may be initiated in the following ways V DE EXCITATION m byacommand 50 51 H remote control command if enabled 50N 51N Lo 40 ms 0 H logic input if set up 59N y To
238. en circuit breaker block close conditions m no remnant voltage on the bus checking necessary when motors are connected to the bus If the normally open circuit breaker is the opposite side circuit breaker the NO circuit breaker closing command is transmitted by a Sepam logic output to a logic input of the opposite side Sepam where it is evaluated by the Switchgear control function see block diagram below If the normally open circuit breaker is the tie circuit breaker the NO circuit breaker closing command is transmitted by a Sepam logic output to close the circuit breaker directly without any intermediary Block Diagram Opposite Side Sepam Breaker open Selector on auto Automatic close order DE52255 logic input Breaker close ANSI 59 phase overvoltage unit 1 inst by switchgear voltage OK control is ready Internal close blocked V CLOSE EN V TRANS STOP ANSI 60FL VT fault Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Tie breaker racked out Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE51512 DE51631 DE51513 Control and Monitoring Functions 1 2 Voluntary return to normal with normally closed tie 1 Transferred condition 2 Closed Transition 3 Return to normal condition 1 2 Voluntary return to normal with normally open tie 1 Transferred condition 2 Closed transition 3 Return
239. ent origin l a l b l c m transformer feeder o cable fault thresholds 50 51 67N T 0 4 s DT Zone selective Interlocking group 1 these thresholds are set time wise in relation to relay E blocking send 1 to relay A The logic input and output settings for all the relays concerned are m blocking reception 1 on 1103 m blocking send 1 on O102 218 63230 216 230B1 gr d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50815 Zone Selective Interlocking Example Parallel Mains Substations supplied by two or more parallel mains may be protected using Sepam S82 T82 or G82 by a combination of directional phase 67 and ground fault 67N protection functions with the zone selective interlocking function Main 1 Main 2 67 51 51 51 51 t 67 peers kee Busbar Feeders 11 direction of protection function detection A direction of blocking signal orders To avoid both mains tripping when a fault occurs upstream from one main the main protection devices must operate as follows m protection function 67 of the faulty main detects the fault current in the line direction the protection tripping direction D sends a blocking signal to block the phase overcurrent protection functions 50 51 of both mains n and initiates tripping of the main circuit breaker
240. epam Series 80 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement instrument transformers required for applications Sepam G88 m main analog inputs available on all types of Sepam Series 80 H three phase current inputs la Ib Ic o one residual current input Ir H three phase voltage inputs Van Vbn Vcn H oneresidual voltage input Vr m additional analog inputs dependent on the type of Sepam Ir D three additional phase current inputs l a l b l c 3 V 2 U 3I o one additional residual current input l r o three additional phase voltage inputs V an V bn Vcn METIH 11 T8 o one additional residual voltage input V r di The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of T9 T16 Sepam Series 80 In A 31 Vntp Vnts c Vnt Inr c Ir Example of Sepam G88 instrument transformer inputs Phase current inputs Main channel la lb Ic la Ib Ic la Ib Ic la Ib Ic la Ib Ic la Ib Ic Additional channels l a lb le Residual current inputs Main channel Ir Ir Ir Ir Ir Ir Additional channels lr Ur Pr Pr Unbalance current l a l b Pc lr inputs for capacitor steps Phase voltage inputs Main channel Van Vbn Vcn Van Vbn Vcn Van Vbn Vcn Van Vbn Vcn Van Vbn Vcn Van Vbn Vcn or Vab Vbc or Vab Vbc or Vab Vbc or Vab Vbc or Vab Vbc or Vab Vbc Additional channels V an or V ab V a V b V c or V ab V bc Res
241. er contactor block closing conditions V CLOSECB Closing of circuit breaker contactor by the switchgear control function Used to generate a circuit breaker contactor close command based on a particular condition V SHUTDOWN Shutdown of genset prime mover Used to adapt cases of genset shutdown V DE EXCITATION Generator de excitation Used to adapt cases requiring generator de excitation V FLAGREC Data saved in disturbance recording Used to save a specific logic state in addition to those already present in disturbance recording V RESET Sepam reset V CLEAR Clearing of alarms present V BLOCK RESET LOCAL Block Sepam reset by UMI Reset key V CLOSE NOCTRL Breaking device closing enabled without sync check Used to adapt the Switchgear control function V TRIP STP1 to V TRIP STP4 Tripping of capacitor steps 1 to 4 Used to adapt the Capacitor step control function V CLOSE STP1 to V CLOSE STP4 Closing of capacitor steps 1 to 4 Used to adapt the Capacitor step control function V TRANS ON FLT Automatic transfer command on fault Used to adapt automatic transfer V TRANS STOP Stopping automatic transfer Used to adapt automatic transfer Type Syntax Example Meaning Local variables stored VL1 to VL31 The values of these variables are saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage and are restored when Sepam starts again Local variables not stored
242. er Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 230B1 249 Control and Monitoring Functions 250 63230 216 230B1 Local Indication ANSI Code 30 Personalized User Messages An additional 100 messages can be created using the SFT2841 software The user can link a message to a logic input to the result of a logic equation or to replace a predefined message by a user message User Message Editor in SFT2841 A user message editor is included in the SFT2841 software and can be accessed from the control matrix screen while in the connected or disconnected mode To access the message editor follow these steps 1 display the Event tab on the screen the user messages appear 2 double click on one of the messages displayed to activate the user message editor User Message Editor Functions The Message Editor allows the user to perform the following tasks m create and modify user messages in US English or the local language H bytext input or importing of an existing bitmap file bmp or by point to point drawing W delete user messages m assign predefined or user messages to an event defined in the control matrix O from the control matrix screen Events tab double click on the event to be linked to a new message D select the new predefined or user message from the messages presented D assign it to the event The same message may be assigned to several events with no limitations Message Display in SFT2841 m The predefined messages ar
243. ernal Command Circuit Breaker Contacts O1 Trip Normally open NO V TRIPPED O2 Close block Normally closed NC V_CLOSE_BLOCKED 03 Close Normally open NO V_CLOSED m the Trip command is always associated with output O1 If output O1 is set up for pulse type operation the pulse command duration may be set up m the optional Close block and Close commands may be assigned to any logic output Matrix Screen Logic Button Modification of the default internal command assignment to outputs O2 and O3 if necessary Setting the Capacitor Step Control Parameter The function is set up and adapted using the SFT2841 software Particular Characteristics Tab Setup of the capacitor bank with setting of the number of steps Control Logic Tab Setup of capacitor step control m activation of the Capacitor step control function m setting of capacitor step staggered opening times capacitor step discharge times and capacitor step switch control pulse duration Logic I Os Tab m assignment of the logic inputs required m definition of the behavior of logic outputs assigned to capacitor step control 63230 216 230B1 205 Control and Monitoring Functions Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Characteristics Settings Switchgear Control Setting range Device Type Setting range On Off Circuit breaker Tripping Pulse Duration Output O1 Setting range Contactor 200 ms to 300 s
244. erved Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor ANSI Code 48 51LR Characteristics Settings Is Set Point Setting range 50 to 500 of IB Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 Time Delay T Setting range ST 500 ms to 300 s LT 50 ms to 300s LTS 50 ms to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P48 51LR 1 101 m Motor re acceleration P48 51LR_1_102 m Protection blocking P48 51LR_1_113 m Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Protection output P48 51LR_1_3 Locked rotor P48 51LR_ 1 13 m D Excessive starting time P48 51LR 1 14 m Locked rotor at start up P48 51LR 1 15 m D Protection blocked P48 51LR 1 16 m LI Starting in progress P48 51LR 1 22 m 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 93 DE51548 Protection Functions Protection of cables against thermal damage caused by overloads t 10 1 0 TNN Cold curve 10 Na __ Hot curve 10 gt UR 0 5 10 Tripping curves 94 63230 216 230B1 Thermal Overload for Cables ANSI Code 49RMS Description This protection function is used to protect cables against overloads based on measurement of the current drawn The cu
245. es may occur when two parallel transformers Dy must be protected For a 2 phase fault on a transformer primary winding there is a 2 1 1 current distribution at the secondary end The highest current is in the expected zone operation zone for the faulty main no operation zone for the fault free main One of the lowest currents is at the edge of the zone According to the line parameters it may even be in the wrong zone There is therefore a risk of tripping both mains 63230 216 230B1 137 amp Electric Protection Functions Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 Block Diagram Ver gA 9 90 uA lt 0 90 bus line la 8 90 lt aA lt 6 270 choice phase a inst output DE52315 phase a delayed output I 1 phase a inst output in reverse zone a inst 1 0 8 Is gis inst output Phase a current la processing K Vca aB 8 90 lt aB lt 6 90 bus line Ib 06 90 oB lt 0 270 choice phase b inst output phase b delayed output phase b inst output I Is reverse zone 1 0 8 Is Ds b inst output Phase b current Ib processing j phase c inst output D Vab a 6 90 lt aC lt 8 90 bus line phase c delayed Ic 8 90 lt aC lt 6 270 choice output phase c inst output I gt Is reverse zone 1 gt 08 Is phase c inst output i I Phase
246. es to the phase overcurrent 50 51 directional phase overcurrent 67 ground fault 50N 51N and directional ground fault 67N protection functions definite time and IDMT Sepam Series 80 ZSI logic includes two logic groups Each group includes m logic thresholds protection units that send blocking signals BSIG and may be prevented from tripping by the reception of blocking signals m time based thresholds protection units that may not be prevented from tripping by blocking signals and do not send blocking signals They are used as backup for the logic thresholds When a fault occurs m the logic thresholds detecting the fault send blocking signals upstream m the logic thresholds detecting the fault send a tripping command if they are not blocked by blocking signals m the time based backup thresholds detecting the fault send a tripping command The logic and time based threshold assignments of the protection units depend on the type of application and the parameter setting of the logic inputs outputs The first logic group is active if one of the following two conditions is met m blocking reception 1 is assigned to a logic input Ixxx except for motors which do not have this input m blocking send 1 is assigned to an output Oxxx 0102 by default When the second logic group is present in the application it is active under one of the following two conditions m blocking reception 2 is assigned to a logic input Ixxx m blocking sen
247. eserved Function Settings Other Function Settings ANSI 87M Machine Differential Function number 6201 Setting Data Format Unit 1t03 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Ids threshold current 1A 6 Restraint on CT loss 0 no 1 yes ANSI 87T Transformer and Transformer Machine Unit Differential Function number 6001 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Ids set point 6 Id It set point 7 Restraint on CT loss 0 no 1 yes 8 Test mode 0 no 1 yes Other Function Settings ANSI 60 CT Supervision Function number 2601 CT supervision 2602 Supervision additional CTs Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Action on 21G 46 40 51N 32P 37P 32Q 78PS 0 none and 64REF functions 1 block 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 60FL VT Supervision Function number 2701 VT supervision 2702 reserved Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Use breaker position or voltage presence criterion 1 circuit breaker 2 voltage 6 Check loss of 3 V 2 Mu 0 no 1 yes 7 Test current 0 no 1 yes 8 Use V2 12 criterion 0 no 1 yes 9 Action on 21G 27 27S 27D 27TN 32P 32Q 37P 0 none 40 47 50 27 51V 59 59N and 78PS functions 1 block 10 Action on 67 function 0 non directional 1 block 11 Action on 67N function 0 non directional 1 blo
248. etting and predefined control functions adaptation m local or remote installation operation m programming specific functions Logipam m retrieval and display of disturbance recording data Easy Installation m light compact base unit m easy to integrate due to Sepam s adaptation capabilities D universal supply voltage and logic inputs 24 to 250 V DC o phase currents may be measured by 1A or 5A current transformers or LPCT Low Power Current Transducer type CTs H residual current calculated or measured by a choice of methods to fit requirements m the same easy to install remote modules for all Sepam units H mounted on DIN rail o connected to the Sepam base unit by prefabricated cords Commissioning Assistance m predefined functions implemented by simple parameter setting m user friendly powerful SFT2841 PC setting software tool used on all Sepam units to provide users with all the possibilities offered by Sepam Intuitive Use W integrated or remote advanced User Machine Interface UMI installed in the most convenient place for the facility manager m integrated mimic based User Machine Interface for local control of switchgear user friendly User Machine Interface with direct access to data W clear graphic LCD display of all data required for local operation and installation diagnosis m working language may be customized to be understood by all users 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved gr eed 63230
249. ettings Ssmin Set Point Setting range 1 to 90 of V3 Vitp IB Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 105 Vismin Positive Sequence Undervoltage Set Point Setting range 50 to 100 of Vitp Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 105 Characteristic Times 1 Operation time typically 140 ms from 2 Vs to 0 Overshoot time lt 65 ms Reset time lt 65 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P27TN 64G2 x 101 m Protection blocking P27TN 64G2 x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Tripping output P27TN 64G2 x 3 m Protection blocked P27TN 64G2_x 16 m Instantaneous output P27TN 64G2 x 23 m x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 230B1 amp Electric 77 DE50325 Protection Functions Third Harmonic Undervoltage ANSI Code 27TN 64G2 Adaptive Set Point Operation Adaptive Set Point The H3 voltage terminal end VrH3X is compared to the H3 voltage VntH3 measured on the neutral point end The protection function calculates the H3 residual voltage using the three phase to neutral voltages Use of the H3 residual voltage is the means to adapt the tripping set point according to the normal H3 voltage level Time delayed definite time DT tripping occurs when IVntH3 y 80 5 VrH32 The prot
250. fined Control Functions The Automatic transfer function is set up with the Switchgear control function in the Control logic tab of the SFT2841 software Switchgear Control Function m activating the Switchgear control function m activating the Sync check function if necessary Automatic Transfer Function m activating the Automatic transfer function and adjustment of associated parameters D voltage return time Tr typically 3 seconds H normal breaker position tie open VT Supervision Function Activate the VT supervision ANSI 60FL if necessary Protection Function Setting Protection Functions Phase undervoltage ANSI 27 Unit 1 Use Initialization of automatic transfer on detection of voltage loss Setting Information Voltage set point 60 Vi Np Delay 300 msec Phase overcurrent ANSI 50 51 Unit 1 instantaneous output Detection of downstream phase fault to block automatic transfer To be set according to coordination study the most sensitive set point Ground fault ANSI 50N 51N Unit 1 instantaneous output Detection of downstream ground fault to block automatic transfer To be set according to coordination study the most sensitive set point Phase overvoltage ANSI 59 Unit 1 Optional Protection Functions Remnant undervoltage Detection of phase voltage upstream of the circuit breaker To be assigned to a Sepam logic output in the control matrix Use
251. g Internal Switchgear Control Commands Block Diagram Voluntary open orders m by logic input m by remote control m by mimic based UMI Internal trip order Internal trip orders 0 T V TRIPPED m protection functions is 200 m ei OI m predefined control functions m programmed functions logic equations or Logipam NP External trip orders m by logic inputs Internal close inhibits Internal close inhibit m protection functions Logic m predefined control functions BLOSEINRIBITER Outputs 02 m programmed functions Control Logipam or logic equations Internal close inhibit by logic inputs GE reaker or magnetically Voluntary close orders held m by logic input m by remote control m by mimic based UMI Internal close Contactor order Sync V CLOSED Internal close orders Check m predefined control functions m programmed functions Closing without d Logipam or logic equations synchro check D 03 External close orders m by logic inputs V CLOSE NOCTRL Switchgear closed Control of Logic Outputs Controlling a Circuit Breaker or Contactor with Mechanical Latching The block diagram below represents the following parameter setting m type of switchgear Circuit Breaker output O1 trip output O2 close block output O3 close Internal close inhibit I O2 by default V_CLOSE_INHIBITED close inhibit DE51580 Internal trip order 1 O
252. g range 0 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Load shedding command V_LOADSH_ORD Li Load shedding on V_LOADSH_ON L 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE51608 Control and Monitoring Functions 27D unit 2 delayed voltage correct circuit breaker closed racked out circuit breaker 27D unit 1 delayed load shedding threshold 27D unit 2 pickup voltage correct 27D unit 1 pickup load shedding threshold 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved max dip duration Schneider Gf Electric Motor Auto Restart Operation This function enables motors to be automatically restarted after a shutdown caused by load shedding It allows staggered restarting of process motors as long as the voltage dip that caused load shedding was brief When tripping occurs due to a dip in the network supply voltage detected by 27D protection unit 1 two outcomes are possible m the voltage dip lasts for a period longer than the maximum voltage dip duration tripping is final External action is required for restart see example 2 m the voltage dip lasts for a period shorter than the maximum dip duration a restart command is given Delayed restart allows motor restart commands to be staggered to avoid network overload see example 3 E
253. g the SFT2841 software LEDs are assigned to events in the LEDs tab of the control matrix screen Editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the general characteristics Screen Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric PE50486 Control and Monitoring Functions Local control using the mimic based UMI 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Local Control Description Switchgear can be controlled locally using Sepam Series 80 units equipped with the mimic based UMI The control functions available are m Selecting the Sepam control mode m viewing device status on the animated mimic diagram m local control of the opening and closing of all Sepam controlled devices Selecting the Sepam Control Mode A key switch on the front of the mimic based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode Three modes are available Remote Local or Test In Remote mode remote control commands are taken into account Local control commands are disabled with the exception of the circuit breaker open command Remote mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_REMOTE 1 In Local mode remote control commands are disabled with the exception of the circuit breaker open command Local control commands are enabled Local mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_LOCAL 1 Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment as in during preventive maintenance operations All fun
254. g time and the protection unit reset time This system guarantees safety in downgraded operating situations faulty wiring or switchgear Pilot Wire Test Use the output relay test function in the SFT2841 software to test the pilot wires that carry interlocks between breaker relay functions Schneider a 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE51619 Control an Functions Logic Thresholds Blocking send 1 Blocking reception 1 Time based thresholds 1 By default Zone Selective Interlocking S80 S81 T81 B80 and B83 Applications d Monitoring Threshold Assignment Type of Unit Number Protection Time Based Send Logic Reception Logic Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2 50 51 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 50N 51N 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 67N 2 1 1 1 According to application Characteristics Settings Activity Setting range On Off Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Zone selective Interlocking trip V LOGDSC TRIP m CW Blocking send 1 V LOGDSC BL1 m Li Zone selective Interlocking on V LOGDSC ON D 1 Only if switchgear control is not in service Block Diagram Overcurrent unit 1 pickup unit 2 pickup BSIG1 Ground Fault ij o unit 1 pickup unit 2 pickup Directional Ground Fault unit 1 pickup 0 8 Is T 200 ms inhibit blocking send if fault not cleared output 0102 1 blocking send 1
255. gear control function Block Diagram Breaker closed Opposite side breaker closed AT breaker trip order Selector on NO breaker rakon into account Breaker racked out y switchgear control Opposite side breaker racked out V_2 3_TRIPPING Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE51600 Control and Monitoring Functions Automatic Transfer Main Main Implementation Connection NO CB 2 Main 1 upstream protection Main 1 Main 2 St upstream protection d d N a o o o s o a sl i zs amp 883 8 8 9 c E E o E o s Si e 2 E i 2 2 LoS l gt 8 gt L I S o 3 o o a o l l I l l o l o l l l i i l l l l l 22 __ i DUR RY uk dE EE N ee ne no I l Main 1 Sepam l iI Main 2 Sepam l Opposite side voltage OK o T T T l l t ANSI 59 1 voltage OK Oo ANSI 59 1 voltage OK rt Opposite side voltage OK External trip 10 Here External trip 1 l Selector on Manualo 4 Ce EE E pe eer gt 0 Selector on Manual l Selector on Autop S Ses 9 Selector on Auto l NO CB Selector on Main 10 9 NO CB Selector on Main
256. ghts Reserved 100 Stator Ground Fault ANSI Code 64G Description The 64G protection function is made of the two independent functions W protection function 64G1 which commonly corresponds to a neutral voltage displacement function at the fundamental frequency ANSI code 59N It may be implemented by a ground fault protection function ANSI code 51N when the ground fault current is sufficient m protection function 64G2 which corresponds to a third harmonic undervoltage function ANSI code 27TN whose operating principle depends on the type of connection of the generator terminal VTs When a single phase fault occurs the flow of the zero sequence current increases the potential of the neutral point detected by protection function 59N However given the natural unbalance of the three network phases the sensitivity set point for 59N cannot be set under 10 to 15 of the phase to neutral voltage If the single phase fault occurs on a stator winding near the neutral point the increase in the potential at the neutral point may be insufficient to trip protection function 59N The combination of functions 59N and 27TN is the means to protect 10096 of the stator winding Depending on the settings m protection function 59N protects 85 to 95 of the stator winding on the terminal side and W protection function 27TN protects 10 to 20 of the stator winding on the neutral point side To create a 100 stator ground fault protection function it
257. hed In this case it is impossible to determine the position of the switchgear Symbol Inputs Symbol State Graphic Representation Example nput 1 open 1 Open nput 2 closed 0 ire nput 1 open 0 Closed nput 2 closed 1 V N C nput 1 open 0 Unknown nput 2 closed 0 ii nput 1 open 1 Unknown nput 2 closed 1 Local Control Using a Symbol Controlled 1 input output and Controlled 2 inputs outputs symbols are used to control the switchgear corresponding to the symbol via the Sepam mimic based UMI Control Symbols with Two Outputs Controlled 2 inputs outputs symbols have two control outputs for opening and closing of the symbolized device An command on the mimic based UMI sends a 300 ms pulse on the controlled output Control Symbols with One Output Controlled 1 input output symbols have one control output The output remains in the last state to which it was commanded A new command results in a change in the output state Blocking Commands Controlled 1 input output and Controlled 2 inputs outputs symbols have two block inputs that when set to 1 block opening and closing commands This makes it possible to create interlocking systems or other command disabling systems that are taken into account by the UMI Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric PES0416 PES0415 Control and Monitoring Functions Local Control Symbol I
258. hneider General Trip Curves Problem 2 Given the type of IDMT the Is current setting and a point k Ik tk on the operation curve determine the time delay setting T On the standard curve ofthe same type read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current I Is 10 The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k Ik tk is tk T Ts10x isk MT10215 tsk Ts10 4 Another practical method the table below gives the values of K ts ts10 as a function of Us In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsk Ts10 on the line for Ik Is The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through point k Ik tk is T 2 tk k Example Data m type of time delay standard inverse time SIT m setpoint Is m a point k on the operation curve k 3 5 Is 4 s Question What is the time delay T setting operation time at 10 Is Reading the table SIT column line l Is 3 5 therefore K 1 858 Answer The time delay setting is T 4 1 858 2 15 s 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions General Trip Curves Problem 3 Another practical method Given the Is current and time delay T settings foratype the table below gives the values of K ts Ts10 as a function of l Is of time de
259. hout the time Atthe end of the step n dead time the n 1 step begins and the recloser commands the circuit breaker closed 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric Recloser ANSI Code 79 Description An automation device is used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or temporary faults on overhead lines The recloser automatically recloses the breaking device after a settable time delay Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter setting The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met m switchgear control function activated and recloser in service not blocked by the recloser blocking logic input W circuit breaker closed m the safety time is not running m none of the recloser blocking conditions is true trip circuit fault control fault SF6 pressure drop Recloser Steps The recloser will step under any of the following conditions m case of a fault that is not cleared following instantaneous or time delayed tripping by the protection unit activation of the dead time associated with the first active cycle At the end of the dead time a closing command is given which activates the reclaim time If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay a tripping command is given and the following reclosing step is activated After all the active shots have run a final trip command is given if the
260. hut down Max i Start Closing the z Van Vbn Ven synchronisation coupling Shutdown phase DE5083 Vs circuit breaker Tripping 50 27 Pick up order Inadvertent Energization ANSI Code 50 27 Description The protection function checks the generator starting sequence to detect inadvertent energization of generators that are shut down A generator which is energized when shut down operates like a motor A starting current occurs and produces significant heat rise that can damage machine windings The check on the generator starting sequence is carried out by an instantaneous phase overcurrent protection function confirmed by an undervoltage protection function The undervoltage protection function is set up with m anon time delay T1 to make the function insensitive to voltage sags m a timer hold T2 during which the function detects a generator starting current caused by inadvertent energization By taking into account the circuit breaker position it is possible to check the quality of synchronization Ifthe voltage and frequency differences are too high when the circuit breaker closes a current immediately appears that the element detects When the VT monitoring detects a measurement problem on the voltage channels the part concerning the voltages is blocked I I En gt T2 I LE Lo n 8 Block Diagram Bun monitoring Vab Vbc Vca breaker closed breaker open
261. ic DE51511 DE51514 Control and Monitoring Functions 2 Automatic transfer with normally open tie 1 Normal condition 2 Transfer condition 3 Transferred condition 1 2 Automatic transfer with normally closed tie 1 Normal condition 2 Transfer condition 3 Transferred condition 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Operation Definition The Main Tie Main M T M transfer is automatic and is suitable for substations with bus supplied by two mains and with a tie M T M Automatic transfer is made up of two functions 1 automatic transfer with bus supply interruption 2 voluntary return to normal without bus supply interruption Automatic Transfer with Supply Interruption Description This function transfers bus supply from one source to the other after detecting a voltage loss or a fault that is upstream of the source Automatic source transfer takes place in two steps 1 tripping the circuit breaker triggered by the detection of the loss of voltage or an external trip command trip command from upstream protection unit loss of bus supply 2 closing the normally open circuit breaker to resupply the bus According to the parameter setting the normally open circuit breaker may be one of the following m the tie circuit breaker when the tie is normally open m the opposite side circuit breaker when the tie is no
262. idual voltage inputs Main channel Vr Vr Vr vr Vr Vr Additional channel Vr Temperature inputs T1 to T16 T1 to T16 T1 to T16 on MET1482 module Note by extension an additional measurement current or voltage is a value measured via an additional analog channel 1 Available with phase voltage Vab Vbc 12 63230 216 230B1 Seat 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering Functions General Settings The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement instrument transformers Sepam connects to These settings also determine the performance of the metering and protection functions that Sepam uses The user can access these settings in the SFT2841 setting software General Characteristics CT VT Sensors and Particular Characteristics tabs IN In Rated phase current Two or three 1A 5A CTs 1 A to 6250 A instrument transformer primary current Three LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A 0 PN Unbalance current CT rating capacitor application CT1A 2A 5A 1 Ato 30 A lg Base current according to rated power of equipment 0 2 to 1 3 In l s Base current on additional channels Applications with transformer l s lg X Vi N1 V N2 not adjustable Other applications l s lg Inr I Nr Rated residual current Sum of three phase currents See IN I N rated phase current CSH120 or CSH200 zero seque
263. ie Main Implementation Connection for Normally Open Tie 244 Racked out Open Closed optional wiring 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric Maik NO CB Main 1 Coupling Main 2 Mode Main 2 ain ain upstream CH CH upstream protection 2 Li Li protection O O O 2 A o a o el l l o mw Re D nem eS 8 og jg 8 8 8 B SZ P 3 S EES Di E re o Jl E o o 2j o o Gi i 3 E o o I E o o o o los ZG z a o l o l le 3 le I e I 1 g e s o 8 jo l o o l o c i c L EL d ee I I l l l l l l l l l l l j l I I ete es ee l TRAR DRAAD R AREAS l l l l i lc chc ccc cca E Main 1 Sepam l i I i Main 2 Sepam l Opposite side voltage OK vz l ANSI 59 1 voltage OK o ANSI 59 1 voltage OK i i i gt Opposite side voltage OK External trip 1 og gt External trip 1 Selector on Manualo 4 7 H Selector on Manual Selector on Autoo 444 1 iT amp 0 Selector on Auto Selector on Breaker Main 1 0 l i g
264. ing THERMAL TRIP THERMAL TRIP Block closing START INHIBIT BLOCKED START Breaker failure 50BF BREAKER FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE Inadvertent energization 50 27 INADV ENERGIZ INADV ENERGIZ Phase overcurrent 50 51 PHASE FAULT 2 PHASE FAULT Ground fault 50N 51N EARTH FAULT GROUND FAULT Voltage restrained overcurrent 50V 51V O C V REST 2 O C V REST Capacitor bank unbalance 51C UNBAL STP 1 to 4 UNBAL STEP 1 to 4 Overvoltage 59 OVERVOLTAGE 1 OVERVOLTAGE 1 Neutral voltage displacement 59N Vo FAULT Vr FAULT Restricted ground fault 64REF RESTRIC EARTH RESTRIC GROUND FAULT FAULT Starts per hour 66 START INHIBIT BLOCKED START Directional phase overcurrent 67 DIR PHASE FAULT DIR PHASE FAULT 2 Directional ground fault 67N 67NC DIR EARTH FAULT DIR GROUND FAULT Pole slip 78PS POLE SLIP POLE SLIP Recloser 79 Cycle x CYCLE 1 to 4 6 SHOT 1 to 4 Reclosing successful CLEARED FAULT CLEARED FAULT Permanent trip FINAL TRIP FINAL TRIP Overfrequency 81H OVER FREQ OVER FREQ Underfrequency 81L UNDER FREQ UNDER FREQ Rate of change of frequency 81R ROCOF df dt Machine differential 87M DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL Transformer differential 87T DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL 1 With indication of the faulty phase when used with phase to neutral voltage 2 With indication of the faulty phase 3 With indication of the protection unit that has initiated the cycle phase fault ground fault Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneid
265. ing command can be issued by one or both criteria depending on the parameter settings Equal Area Criterion This function calculates the acceleration area when a fault appears and the braking area when the fault disappears The tripping command is issued if the braking area is smaller than the acceleration area The function calculates an average power over four seconds under steady state conditions This is called power before fault Pbf and corresponds to the electrical power supplied by a generator or drawn by a motor The function picks up when the instantaneous power is different than Pbf A time delay is available to delay tripping If a return to stability is detected during the time delay the function is reinitialized without tripping Equal Area Criterion Block Diagram start i calculate Pbf no calculate acceleration area calculate braking area amp Electric no yes acceleration area no braking area no yes loss of synchronism start time delay no BS yes time delay over return to stability yes tripping Schneider 63230 216 230B1 147 Protection Functions 148 63230 216 230B1 Pole Slip ANSI Code 78PS Power Swing Criterion This function detects a change in the active power sign Two power swings are counted for each 360 of phase displacement between the electromotive force of the machine and the network Power swings are de
266. instructions if there are any m if there are no utility instructions proceed as follows D if the maximum rate of change of frequency on the network under normal conditions is known dfs dt should be set above it D if no information on the network is available the low set point may be set according to generator data A good approximation of the rate of change of frequency after a utility failure resulting in a load variation AP is df AP x fn where Sn rated power dt 2xSnxH fn rated frequency H inertia constant Typical value of the inertia constant in MWs MVA 0 5 H 1 5 for diesel and low power generators x 2 MVA 2 lt H 5 for gas turbines and medium power generators x 40 MVA JxQ where J moment of inertia 2xSn Q machine speed Examples Rated power 2MVA 20 MVA Inertia constant 0 5 MWs MVA 2 MWs MVA Power variation 0 1 MVA 1 MVA df dt 2 5 Hz s 0 6 Hz s Low Set Point Delay Setting For good protection stability during short circuits or transient disturbances the recommended time delay is 300 ms or more If an automatic recloser is in service upstream of the installation the detection of an islanded generator operation and the opening of the inter tie circuit breaker should take place during the recloser isolation time High Set Point The second set point may be chosen so that the rate of change of frequency tripping curve remains below the under and overfrequency protection curves If the f
267. ion 50N 51N unit 3 14 Ins antaneous protection 50N 51N unit 4 15 De ayed protection 50N 51N unit 4 16 Ins antaneous protection 67N unit 1 17 De ayed protection 67N unit 1 18 Ins antaneous protection 67N unit 2 19 Delayed protection 67N unit 2 20 Instantaneous protection 67 unit 1 21 Delayed protection 67 unit 1 22 Instantaneous protection 67 unit 2 23 Delayed protection 67 unit 2 24 Instantaneous V_DECL logical equation Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Appendix Function Settings General amp Application Specific Parameters General Parameters These settings are read accessible only Function number D002 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Working language 1 English 2 other 2 Rated frequency 50 60 Hz 3 Active group of settings 1 group A 2 group B 3 selection by logic input 4 selection by remote control 4 Demand value integration period 5 10 15 30 60 minutes 5 Type of cubicle 1 main 2 feeder 6 Active energy increment 100 to 5000000 W 7 Reactive energy increment 100 to 5000000 var 8 Phase rotation direction 1 direction 123 2 direction 132 9 Temperature unit 1 6 2 F 10 Remote setting authorization 1 no 2 yes 11 Time synchronization mode 1 COMI port 2 COM p
268. ion contacts it does not check for circuit continuity or supply loss Trip unit supervision is considered unnecessary in this case The information is accessible in the matrix trip circuit message and by the remote indication TS1 Block Diagram 1 gt trip circuit kl supervision fault 0 TCS reset V TCS Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Trip circuit supervision fault V_TCS Li D Closing Circuit Supervision Operation This function monitors closing coil continuity It calls for the wiring diagram opposite connected to a logic input configured with the Closing coil supervision function The information is accessible in the matrix closing circuit message and via remote indication TS234 Block Diagram T 0 closing circuit S XXX cf x m supervision fault T 2s V CSS Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Closing circuit supervision fault V CCS L D Open and Close Supervision Operation After an open or close command to a circuit breaker occurs the system waits 200 milliseconds before checking for compliance If the circuit breaker status does not match the last command sent the system generates a Control fault message and a remote indication TS2 Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Control fault V_CTRLFAUT L D circuit breaker monitoring Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric
269. ions are predefined and available in two language versions m in English factory set messages not modifiable m inthe local language according to the version delivered The language version is chosen when Sepam parameters are set The messages are visible on the Sepam display and on the SFT2841 Alarms screen The number and type of predefined messages depend on the type of Sepam The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages Functions UK English US English Control and Monitoring ANSI Code External trip 1 to 3 EXT TRIP 1 to 3 EXTERNAL TRIP 1 to 3 Buchholz trip BUCHH GAS TRIP BUCHH GAS TRIP Buchholz alarm BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHHOLZ ALARM Thermostat trip THERMOST TRIP THERMOS TRIP Thermostat alarm THERMOST ALARM THERMOST ALARM Pressure trip PRESSURE TRIP PRESSURE TRIP Pressure alarm PRESSURE ALARM PRESSURE ALARM Thermistor trip THERMISTOR TRIP THERMISTOR TRIP Thermistor alarm THERMISTOR AL THERMISTOR AL Control fault CONTROL FAULT CB CNTRL FAULT Load shedding LOAD SHEDDING LOAD SHEDDING Genset shutdown GENSET SHUTDOWN GENSET SHUTDOWN De excitation DE EXCITATION DE EXCITATION Tripping command by automatic transfer AUTO TRANSFER AUTO TRANSFER Diagnosis ANSI Code SF6 fault SF6 LOW SF6 LOW MET1482 No 1 RTD fault RTD S FAULT MET1 RTD S FAULT NO 1 1 MET1482 No 2 RTD fault RTD S FAULT MET2 1 RTD S FAULT NO 2 1 VT supervision 60FL Phase VT supervision VT FAULT VT FAULT Residual VT supervision V
270. ipam Initializating the Return to Normal m voluntary incoming circuit breaker close command Closing an Open Circuit Breaker Description Circuit breaker closing is ensured by the Switchgear control function with or without sync check The AT function checks that all the required conditions are met and indicates to the user that the return to normal is possible Block Diagram Breaker open ANSI 59 phase overvoltage unit 1 inst voltage OK Internal close blocked V TRANS STOP ANSI 60FL VT fault Selector on manual Remote control blocked local Opposite side remote control blocked local Breaker close by switchgear control is ready V CLOSE EN Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Schneider 63230 216 230B1 233 Electric DE51510 Control and Monitoring Functions Nc NO Two Mains Closed 234 Return to Normal One Main Closed 63230 216 230B1 DE51586 Automatic Transfer Main Main Operation Opening a Normally Open Circuit Breaker Description This function controls the opening of circuit breakers that are designated normally open by the position of the NO circuit breaker selector when the two main circuit breakers are closed For those automatic control sequences that put the two sources in parallel it guarantees that only one circuit breaker of the two is closed at the end of the transfer The open command is taken into account by the Switch
271. is necessary to implement the 64G1 59N or 51N and the 64G2 27TN protection functions see each of these functions for more information Schneider 63230 216 230B1 188 amp Electric DE50747 Protection Functions Restricted Ground Fault Differential ANSI Code 6AREF Protection of 3 phase windings against He phase to ground faults 3 ido 3 105 ber Iro Tripping zone Description The restricted ground fault protection function detects phase to ground faults on three phase windings with grounded neutral This function protects generators 2 and transformers The protected zone depending on the measurement origin and the set parameters is between m thela Ib Ic CTs and the neutral point current measurement Ir m the l a l b l c CTs and the neutral point current measurement l r i 3 sr max Bio la Ib Ic lt Isr set point setting range Isr min x 0 054 I T gt Io IN 1 2 3 The function is based on the comparison of the residual current calculated using the 64REF d sum of the three phase currents and the neutral point current These two currents m differential residual current define the differential residual current and the restrained current Ur Prz Pr m restrained current or through residual current the value of the restrained current depends on detection of a fault outside the protected zone D without detection of an external fault Iro
272. ition of the NO circuit breaker selector when the three circuit breakers are closed For all automatic control sequences that put the two sources in parallel it guarantees that only two of the three circuit breakers are closed at the end of the transfer The open command is taken into account by the Switchgear control function Block Diagram AT breaker trip order taken into account by switchgear control Breaker closed V 2 3 TRIPPING Opposite side breaker closed Tie breaker closed Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Tie breaker racked out AT coupling breaker trip order taken into account Selector on NO tie breaker by switchgear control V TIE TRIPPING Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE52257 Control and Monitoring Functions Necessary Conditions for Coupling Closing Breaker closed Opposite side breaker closed Selector on NO tie breaker Opposite side voltage OK Tie breaker or NO close blocked V_TRANS_STOP ANSI 60FL VT fault Selector on manual Remote control blocked local Opposite side remote control blocked local Tie breaker remote control blocked local Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Tie breaker racked out Tie breaker open Tie Breaker Closing Voluntary coupling close command a T Close enable by sync check ANSI 25 Ts o 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Automatic Transfer M
273. l Is 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 100 General Trip Curves IAC Curves DE50870 1000 100 CH OPERATE TIME S o 0 01 MT10207 100 Schneider Electric IAC VIT 10 IA 63230 216 230B1 100 181 182 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Sat 63230 216 230B1 183 lectric 184 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Description Definition of Symbols Logic Input Output Assignment Switchgear Control Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control Latching Acknowledgement TC Switchgear Position Discrepancy Disturbance Recording Trigger Switching Groups of Settings Zone Selective Interlocking Load Shedding Motor Auto Restart Generator Shutdown amp Tripping Automatic Transfer Automatic Transfer Main Main Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Local Indication Local Control Control Matrix Logic Equations Customized Functions Using Logipam Schneider 63230 216 230B1 D Electric 182 183 184 188 199 207 208 209 210 211 222 223 225 229 231 239 248 251 254 256 260 181 PE50249 Control and Monitoring Functions Maximum Sepam series 80 configuration with 3 MES120 mo
274. l logic outputs according to the type of device to be controlled Processing Internal Switchgear Control Commands The Switchgear control function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions based on protection functions configured to trip the breaking device breaking device status data remote control via the communication link local control commands by logic input or mimic based UMI internal control commands created by logic equation or Logipam specific predefined control functions for each application recloser genset shutdown de excitation load shedding sync check automatic transfer H capacitor step control nouum The function also blocks breaking device closing according to the operating conditions 188 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Anti Pumping Function To prevent simultaneous breaking device open and close commands and to give priority to open commands breaker device close commands are of the pulse type Switchgear Control with Lockout Function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be ensured by Sepam using the Switchgear control function with latching of all the tripping conditions protection function outputs and logic inputs Sepam performs the following functions m grouping the tripping conditions and breaking device control m latching the tripping command with closing block until the caus
275. lay standard inverse very inverse extremely In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsA Ts10 inverse find the operation time for a current value IA on the line for IA Is the operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings On the standard curve of the same type read the is tA z K T operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative Example current IA Is and the operation time Ts10 that Data corresponds to the relative current Us 10 m type of time delay very inverse time VIT The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and m set point Is T settings is tA tsA x T Ts10 m time delay T 0 8 s ts Question What is the operation time for the current IA 6 Is Reading the table VIT column line I Is 6 therefore k 1 8 Answer The operation time for the current IA is t 1 80 x 0 8 1 44 s Ld Ils Table of K Values Vis SIT VIT LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE El IACI IAC VI IAC El andIEC A andIEC B and IEC C IEC D IEC E IEC F 1 0 3 062 62 005 62 272 200 226 1 1 24 700 0 90 000 1 471 4290 2 534 22 461 136 228 330 606 19 033 45 678 122 172 1 2 12 901 45 000 225 000 545 905 2 216 11 777 65 390 157 946 9 413 34 628 82 899 1 5 5 788 18 000 79 200 179 548 1 736 5 336 23 479 55 791 3 891 17 539 36 687 2
276. lector on auto Transfer Initialization ANSI 27 phase undervoltage unit 1 delayed External trip 1 V_TRANS_ON_FLT Closing Opposite Side Breaker Breaker open Tie close blocked or NO ANSI 27R remanent undervoltage unit 1 delayed 232 63230 216 230B1 i 4 N o 4 p z P Automatic Transfer Main Main Operation Block Diagram AT breaker trip command taken into account by switchgear control V_AT_TRIPPING DE52254 Order for automatic closing of opposite side breaker V_CLOSE_NO_ORD Closing the Opposite Side Circuit Breaker The following conditions are required to command the closing of the opposite side circuit breaker m the circuit breaker is open m no opposite side circuit breaker block close conditions m no remnant voltage on the bus checking necessary when motors are connected to the bus The opposite side circuit breaker closing command is transmitted by a Sepam logic output to a logic input of the opposite side Sepam It is taken into account by the Switchgear control function of the opposite side Sepam Block Diagram Opposite Side Sepam Breaker open Selector on auto Automatic close order logic input Breaker close ANSI 59 phase overvoltage unit 1 inst _ Tr 0 by switchgear voltage OK control is ready Internal close block V_CLOSE_EN V_TRANS_STOP ANSI 60FL VT fault Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Schneider 2007 Schn
277. liary power supply V_VAUX_ON D monitoring on High threshold alarm V_VAUX_HIGH D L Low threshold alarm V VAUX LOW D Li Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 55 amp Electric Metering Functions 56 63230 216 230B1 Switchgear Diagnosis Cumulative Breaking Current Number of Operations Cumulative Breaking Current Monitoring Operation This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges It is based on measuring the fundamental component on main channels I The current ranges displayed are m 0 lt I lt 2INn 2IN lt I lt 5IN 5IN I 10 IN 10 IN 40 IN 40 IN Each value is monitored by an adjustable set point When the set point is exceeded an alarm is sent and is available in the matrix and by the remote indication TS235 These values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power loss The initial values can be set using the SFT2841 software tool to take into account the actual state of a breaking device used The higher number of trips at the higher currents causes more wear on breaker contacts and decreases their life Refer to switchgear documentation for contact wear specifications Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Cumulative breaking current measured Range 0 to 65535 kA Units primary kA Resolution 1 KA Accuracy 1 10 1 digit Alarm se
278. loss restraint field loss stator ground fault H against network and process faults pole slip speed control inadvertent energization sync check between two networks before closing tie breaker measurement of harmonic distortion current and voltage to assess network power quality 42 inputs 23 outputs for comprehensive equipment control mimic based UMI for local switchgear control SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software a simple and complete tool that is indispensable for all Sepam users H assisted preparation of parameter and protection settings H complete information during commissioning H remote equipment management and diagnostics during operation logic equation editor built into the SFT2841 software to adapt the predefined control functions optional SFT2885 programming software Logipam to program specific control and monitoring functions two communication ports to integrate Sepam in two different networks or redundant architectures removable memory cartridge to get equipment in operation again quickly after the replacement of a faulty base unit battery backup to save historical and disturbance recording data Selection Guide The Sepam Series 80 family includes 16 types to offer the right solution for each application Specific Protection Functions Available Applications General Performance Substation Transformer Motor Generator Bus Capacitor Non directional phase and ground faults S
279. lt P87M_1_7 D D Phase b fault P87M _1_8 D Li Phase c fault P87M 1 9 D D Protection blocked P87M_1_16 D Li High set point P87M 1 33 D Li Percentage based set point P87M 1 34 D Li CT loss P87M_1_39 D Li 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric phase la Ib Ic 5 gt 3 8 Test mode Vector shift 0 x SFT2841 ViLN1 INT Vi N2 IN2 a I la Ib Amplitude Ic and phase la matching lb lc a b c a b de Restraint on closing P87T_1_118 a b c cl Protection Functions Phase to phase short circuit protection for transformers and transformer machine units 2 windings Operation This protection function protects the zone between the CTs for the main currents la Ib Ic on the one hand and the CTs for the additional currents l a l b l c on the other It adjusts both the amplitude and phase of the currents in each winding according to the vector shift and the transformer rated power as well as the set voltage and current values It then compares the matched currents phase by Transformer Differential ANSI Code 87T According to the current measurement convention shown in the diagram and respecting the recommended wiring system the differential currents Id and through currents It are calculated using the matched currents Im and I m m Differential current Idx
280. ltages are measured by two phase VTs VOVTs m 67 A residual voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 59N m 67N 67NC The behavior of the protection functions in the event of a Phase voltage fault or Residual voltage fault is to be set up and the following choices are proposed m for protection functions 21B 27 27D 27TN 32P 32Q 37P 40 47 50 27 51V 59N 59 78PS blocking or no blocking m for protection function 67 blocking or non directional operation 50 51 m for protection function 67N 67NC blocking or non directional operation 50N 51N Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 51 Metering Functions 52 63230 216 230B1 Switchgear Diagnosis VT Supervision ANSI Code 60V Setting Advice The partial loss of voltages is based on detecting the presence of negative sequence voltage and the absence of negative sequence current By default m the presence of negative sequence voltage is detected when V2 gt 10 V p Vs2 m the absence of negative sequence current is detected when 12 lt 5 IN Is2 m time delay T1 is 1 second These default settings ensure the stability of the VT supervision function in the event of short circuits or transient phenomena on the network The Is2 set point may be raised for highly unbalanced networks Time delay T1 is to be set shorter than the voltage and power protection function tripping times Time
281. lution 1 Refreshinterval 1 second typical Schneider 63230 216 230B1 35 amp Electric Metering Functions Network Diagnosis Negative Sequence Current Unbalance Operation This function gives the negative sequence component T I2 IB or T l 2 l B The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents m three phases 1 e 2 o phase rotation direction a b c 1 2 3 i ara Ib al c P gt 1 gt gt 2 o phase rotation direction a c b I 2 3 la al P alc m two phases E VM 1 P rd D phase rotation direction a b c 2 a la alc gt 1 gt gt D phase rotation direction a c b li 2l x li a al cl 3 When there are no ground faults the formulas for 2 phase currents are equivalent to those for 3 phase currents Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the e icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 10 to 500 Units IB or l B Resolution 1 Accuracy 2 Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 36 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Gf Electric Network Diagnosis Current Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Current Total Harmonic Distortion Ithd Operation
282. m Application Options Window DEUERE gt m OR Sepam hardware Dered characterishos CIT sensors CIVT Supenason Particulr charactesitics PE50424 zT Particular characteristics Capacitor banks Capace step rali Number of capacitor Capacitor 1 Capacitor 2 Type ol connection Star zj Ci D 1 Capacitor Disconnected Batterie CA Capectors CES Parameter setting of capacitor bank step ratio Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS Example Given a 350 kVAR capacitor bank with three steps and no harmonic filters for a voltage of 2 kV The capacitor step ratio is 1 2 2 The rated current of the capacitor bank is IB 31 FQ V3 VLLN 350000 v3 x 2000 101 A According to the manufacturer data this capacitor bank can operate continuously with an overload current of 120 IB and for 20 minutes with an overload of 140 IB The protection settings are Itrip 120 IB 121 A Is 140 IB 141 A Ts 20 min Steps 1 and 2 closed Steps 1 and 2 are closed in the sequence in progress The sequence current is 1 2 0 2 1 24 2 1B 761A IBseq For a current of 125 IBseq 76 A and an initial heat rise of 100 the value of k in the tripping curve tables is k 2 486 The tripping time is t k x Ts 2 486 x 20 50 mn All the steps closed When all the steps are closed the sequence current is the rated current of the capacitor bank 142242 1 24 2 P7 101A IBseq For
283. mation 0 none 1 neg seq overvoltage 2 undervoltage 6 Group A tripping curve 7 Group A Is threshold current 0 1 A 8 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Group A timer hold curve 3 10 Group A timer hold 10 ms 11 Group B tripping curve 12 Group B Is threshold current 0 1 A 13 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 14 Group B timer hold curve 3 15 Group B timer hold 10 ms ANSI 50N 51N Ground Fault Function number 06xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 8 xx 08 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Group A tripping curve 6 Group A Isr threshold current 0 1 A 7 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Group A timer hold curve 9 Group A timer hold 10 ms 10 Group A H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no 11 Group B tripping curve 12 Group B threshold current 0 1 A 13 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 14 Group B timer hold curve 3 15 Group B timer hold 10 ms 16 Group B H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no ANSI 50V 51V Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Function number 19xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Tripping curve 6 Threshold current 0 1 A 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Timer hold curve 3 9 Timer hold 10 ms ANSI 59 Overvoltage Function number 28xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 6 Threshold
284. minal End hen a single phase fault occurs in the stator winding near the machine terminals he HS voltage increases on the neutral point end V3nt V3rx al Neutral point Terminals DES1616 WAN E The third harmonic undervoltage protection function detects the drop in the VH3 voltage caused by a single phase fault on the neutral point end Two types of tripping set points are available according to the VTs connected m fixed set point tripping for VH3 neutral point undervoltage The setting requires preliminary measurements m adaptive set point tripping for VH3 neutral point undervoltage depending on a set point whose value depends on the VH3 residual voltage The setting does not require preliminary measurements Availability of Set Points Depending on the VTs Used Voltage Measurements Available Types VT Neutral Point VT Terminals 27TN Fixed Set Point 27TN Adaptive Set Point All wiring D Van or Vab Vab Vbc Van Vbn Vcn Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50326 Protection Functions oge E 3 V 2 V 64G N O DE51545 Third Harmonic Undervoltage ANSI Code 27TN 64G2 Fixed Set Point Operation Fixed Set Point The delayed trip DT command is issued if the neutral point VntH3 voltage set point Vent is less than the Vs set point The protection function operates only if
285. n Tie Breaker tripping Control of Capacitor Banks Tripping of capacitor step x Tie tripping command for automatic transfer function Capacitor step x tripping output Closing of capacitor step x Capacitor step x closing output Capacitor step x position fault Capacitor step x positions mismatched Automatic capacitor step control Capacitor steps in automatic control mode Manual capacitor step control Capacitor steps in manual control mode 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 amp Electric 255 Control and Monitoring Logic Equations Functions Adaptation of the predefined control and Use monitoring functions by the addition of This function can be used to configure simple logic functions by combining data received from the protection functions logic inputs remote control command s or the mimic based UMI By using logic operators AND OR XOR NOT and timers new processing operations and indications may be added to the existing ones The logic functions produce outputs that can be used m inthe matrix to control output relays switch on a LED or display new messages m inthe protection functions to create for example new block or reset conditions m inthe main predefined control and monitoring functions to complete processing operations or add new cases of tripping or genset shutdown for example m for mimic diagram animation simple logic functi
286. n The user determines the regular intervals at which peak demand is calculated for active or reactive power These intervals generally range from 5 to 60 minutes during which the current demand amount is calculated and compared with the most recent saved value The larger of the two values is stored in memory until the next demand interval The peak value is saved in the event of power loss Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with SFT2841 software m communication link Resetting to Zero Access to zero reset is by one of the following m via the clear button on the Sepam display if a peak demand is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control command TC5 Characteristics Demand Active Power Demand Reactive Power Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MW 1 1 5 Sn at 999 MVAR 1 Units kW MW kvar MVAR Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Accuracy 1 typical 1 typical 9 Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Integration period 5 10 15 30 60 minutes 5 10 15 30 60 minutes 1 SN v3V p In 2 At IN V p cos o gt 0 8 under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 At IN Wup cos p lt 0 6 under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Power Factor cos 70 Operation The power factor is defined by Pf P p2 Q hb expresses the phase displacement bet
287. n 40 Sn and 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 kW Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 004 Sn Ps x 100 Time Delay T Setting range 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time lt 90 ms at 2 Ps Overshoot time lt 40 ms at 2 Ps Reset time lt 105 ms at 2 Ps Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P32P_x_101 m a Protection blocking P32P_x_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P32P_x_1 a D Delayed output P32P x3 m D D Protection blocked P32P x 16 m Positive active power P32P_x 19 m D Negative active power P32P_x 20 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Sn v3 Vit IN 80 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE50773 Protection Functions Directional Reactive Overpower ANSI Code 32Q Protection against field loss on synchronous The protection function picks up if the reactive power Q flowing in one direction or machines the other supplied or drawn is greater than the set point for reactive power It includes a definite time delay T and is based on the two or three wattmeter method of measurement depending on the connection conditions m Van Vbn Vcn and la Ib Ic three wattmeters Description m Van Vbn Vcn and la Ic two wattmeters This two way protection is based on calculated re
288. n V SYNC ON D Li Sync check close request in V SYNC INPROC L D process Sync check close request stop V_SYNC_STOP Li Li Sync check close request V SYNC OK L L successful Sync check close request failure V NOSYNC Li Li Sync check close request failure V NOSYNC DU D D Voltage difference too high Sync check close request failure V NOSYNC DF D L Frequency difference too high Sync check close request failure V NOSYNC DPHI L D Phase difference too high 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 198 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE51558 Control and Monitoring Functions Predefined function for the control of circuit breakers protecting capacitor banks and the switches of each capacitor bank step This function only concerns Sepam C86 units L ant AA AA L Inn Av TA AM Example of a Sepam C86 application circuit breaker protection of a 4 step capacitor bank 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Operation The Sepam C86 Switchgear control function performs m control of the circuit breaker protecting the capacitor bank circuit breaker with normally open NO or normally closed NC contacts m control of the capacitor bank step switches maximum of 4 steps with processing of D voluntary ma
289. n a fault I x 5ON 51N unit 1 I S instantaneous a T I Protection time delay 50N 51N unit 1 RENE 7 T 500 ms Ground fault Circuit breaker Permanent tripping open message Recloser ready Remote indication final tripping Example 4 No extension of dead time Ground fault TRIP JL Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 Circuit breaker RF rs N open E 8 Circuit breaker t m Recharging time charged Example 5 Extension of dead time Ground fault h TRIP Ya Maximum additional dead time Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 gt Circuit breaker gt open Va Gireuiibreaker t K Normal recharging time j charged m DE50789 DE50790 154 63230 216 230B1 gr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Detection of abnormally high frequencies 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50791 Overfrequency ANSI Code 81H Description Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency to monitor power supply quality or protect a generator against overspeeds The frequency is calculated using voltage Van or Vab when only one voltage is connected Otherwise the positive sequence voltage V1 is used to procure greater stability It is compared to the Fs set point The protection function is blocked if the voltage used for calculations is under the adjustable set point Vs
290. nabling restart is detected after the delayed output of protection 27D unit 2 drops out This threshold allows the return of voltage to be detected independently with respect to the load shedding threshold The typical setting is 50 V N The restart command is given by the switchgear control function Block Diagram restart V_RESTARTING restart de Characteristics Settings Activity Setting range On Off Maximum Voltage Dip Duration Setting range 0 to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution Restart Delay Setting range 10 ms or 1 digit 0 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Restart command V_RESTARTING D Restart on V_RESTART_ON D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 63230 216 230B1 223 Control and Monitoring Motor Auto Restart Functions Example 1 Voltage Dip with Restart Command Vd A E 27D unit 2 ii threshold 27D unit 1 threshold l l 27D unit 1 ee E I I i pickup m Ee EN 27D unit 1 geg EEN delayed i 27D unit 2 pickup 27D unit 1 ee a delayed m A pop E T I I T l I I I Load shedding order Circuit breaker Circuit breaker gt k circuit breaker tripping closing Be F position 1 I I l I T M oo or Auto hold I E Le Res
291. nce CT 2 Aor 20 A rating 1A 5A CT 1 A to 6250 A Zero sequence CT ACE990 the zero sequence CT According to current monitored ratio 1 n must be such that 50 x n x 1500 and use of ACE990 Vun Rated primary phase to phase voltage Vnp rated 220 V to 250 kV V up primary phase to neutral voltage Vnp Vuy v3 Vus Rated secondary phase to phase voltage 3 VTs Van Vbn Vcn 90 to 230 Vi Vus 2 VTs Vab Vbc 90 to 230 Vi 1 VT Vab 90 to 230 Vi 1 VT Van 90 to 230 Vi Vus0 Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Vu4 3 or V V3 Vue sequence voltage Vua Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage 220 V to 250 kV generator application Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage 57 7 V to 133 V generator application IN Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Phase rotation direction a b c or a c b Integration period for demand current and peak 5 10 15 30 60 min demand current and power Pulse type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0 1 KWh to 5 MWh Increments reactive energy 0 1 kVARh to 5 MVARh P Rated transformer power 100 kVA to 999 MVA VuM Rated winding a voltage 220 V to 220 kV main channels I VLLN2 Rated winding b voltage 220 V to 400 kV additional channels l INT Rated winding a current not adjustable Ina P V3 ViLN1 IN2 Rated winding b current not adjustable Inb P V3 V N2 Transformer vector shift Oto 11 ON Rated speed motor generator 100 to 3600 rpm R N
292. ndT 3s Curve 2 Isr 0 6 A and T 0 1 s Curve 3 Isr and T 126 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Tripping Curve Setting range Isr Setting Definite time Setting range Ir Ir Irx sum of the main phase channels Ir sum of the additional phase channels See previous page 0 01 Inr lt Isr 15 Inr min 0 1 A expressed in amperes Sum of CTs 0 01 IN lt Isr lt 15 IN min 0 1 A With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 1 to 30 A 20 A rating 0 2 to 300 A CT 0 01 INr Isr 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT ACE990 0 01 Inr lt Isr 15 Inr min 0 1 A IDMT 0 01 INr x Isr lt INr min 0 1 A expressed in amperes Setting range Sum of CTs 0 01 IN lt Isr lt IN min 0 1 A With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 1t02A 20 A rating 0 2 to 20 A CT 0 01 INr lt Isr lt Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT 0 01 INr lt Isr lt Inr min 0 1 A ACE990 EPATR CSH sensor 0 6t05A Setting range 20 A rating Zero sequence CT 0 6105A with ACE990 and 15A lt INr lt 50 Accuracy 1 5 or 0 004 InO Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 005 INr Isr x 100 Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Isr Setting range Definite
293. nds Its fault current is equal to 3 times its rated current After the 3 10 seconds have elapsed the fault current drops to 0 5 times the rated current The generator is protected m against network electrical short circuits by a phase overcurrent protection function 50 51 and a backup protection function 50V 51V m against internal faults in generators by a generator differential protection function 87M m against ground faults by a ground fault protection function 50N 51N when the generator is connected to the bus and by a neutral voltage displacement protection function when the generator is not connected m against overloads by a thermal overload protection function 49RMS against unbalance by a negative sequence unbalance protection function 46 m against frequency variations by underfrequency and overfrequency protection functions 81L and 81H m against voltage variations by undervoltage and overvoltage protection functions 27 and 59 m against field loss by a protection function 40 m against faults due to the prime mover by a reverse active power protection function 32P m against loss of synchronization of the main network by a protection function 78PS Setting Genset Shutdown and De Excitation The participation of these protection functions in circuit breaker tripping genset shutdown and de excitation depends on the type of faults detected W circuit breaker tripping against network faults D 50 51 50V 51V 50N 51N 49RMS 46
294. ne pushbutton per circuit breaker H Breaker closing pushbutton o Closing ready LED Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE51017 Control and Monitoring Functions Normal Condition Transfer Condition Transferred Condition Automatic Main Main Transfer Automatic Transfer Main Main Operation Definition The automatic main main transfer is suitable for substations supplied by two mains with no tie This automatic transfer has two functions m automatic transfer with bus supply interruption m voluntary return to normal without bus supply interruption Automatic Transfer with Supply Interruption Description The function transfers bus supply from one source to the other after detecting a voltage loss or fault upstream from the source Automatic source transfer takes place in two steps W circuit breaker tripping triggered by detecting the loss of voltage or an external trip command from upstream protection units loss of bus supply m closing the opposite side circuit breaker to resupply the bus when motors are connected to the bus it is necessary to check for remaining voltage on the bus using the ANSI 27R Remnant undervoltage function Mandatory Transfer Conditions These conditions are always required to enable transfer m the incoming circuit breaker is closed m no phase to phase fault detected by the main on the bus or downstream m no phase to ground faul
295. neider IDMT IEC inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F I R curve Block Diagram DE50839 Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Tripping Curve Setting range Is Set Point Setting range definite time delayed output pick up Signal Main channels I Additional channels I See list above 10 to 500 of IB or l B Schneider IDMT 10 to 50 of IB or I B IEC or IEEE IDMT 10 to 100 of IB or l B PR curve 3 to 20 of IB or I B Accuracy 1 5 or 0 004 IN Resolution 196 Drop out pick up ratio 93 596 5 or gt 1 0 005 IN Is x 100 Time Delay T Setting range definite time 100 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 1 s or TMS 2 Accuracy 1 definite time 2 or 25 ms IDMT 5 or 35 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit K l22t Curve Only Setting range 1 to 100 Resolution 1 Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 55 ms at 2 Is Overshoot time lt 50 ms at 2 Is Reset time lt 55 ms at 2 Is Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P46 x_101 m D Protection blocking P46 x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P46_x 1 D D Delayed output P46_x_3 D D D
296. ng Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Set point 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 21B Underimpedance Function number 7401 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Zs set point mQ 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 24 Overexcitation V Hz Function number 75xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 VT connection 0 delta 1 wye 6 Tripping curve 0 definite21 Type A 22 Type B23 Type C 7 Voltage frequency threshold 0 01 pu 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 27 Undervoltage Function number 32xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Tripping curve 0 definite 19 IDMT 6 Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 7 Threshold voltage Vp 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 27D Positive Sequence Undervoltage Function number 38xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1t04 Common settings 5 Threshold voltage Vp 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 27R Remanent Undervoltage Function number 35xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1to4 Common settings 5 Threshold voltage Vp 6 Tripping time delay 10 ms Schneider 265 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 Appendix 266 Function Settings Protection Settings ANSI 32P Directional Active Overpower
297. ng of transfer by V TRANS STOP by logic equations or by Logipam Initializating the Return to Normal m voluntary incoming circuit breaker close command Closing the Open Circuit Breaker Description Circuit breaker closing is ensured by the Switchgear control function with or without sync check The AT function checks that all the required conditions are met and indicates to the user that the return to normal is possible Block Diagram Breaker open Breaker on opposite side closed Tie breaker closed Selector on NO breaker DE80146 ANSI 59 phase overvoltage Unit 1 delayed Voltage OK TO Breaker close V_TRANS_V_EN i by switchgear control is ready Internal close blocked V_CLOSE_EN V_TRANS_STOP ANSI 60FL VT fault Selector on manual Remote control blocked local Opposite side remote control blocked local Tie breaker remote control blocked local Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Tie breaker racked out Schneider 63230 216 230B1 241 amp Electric DE51529 DE51589 Control and Monitoring Functions Return to normal with normally closed tie Return to normal with normally open tie 242 63230 216 230B1 Selector on NO breaker Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Operation Opening the Normally Open Circuit Breaker Description This function controls the opening of the circuit breaker that is designated normally open by the pos
298. ng trigger V_OPG_TRIGGED TC20 V_OPG_MANUAL of disturbance TC18 Inhibition SFT28414 4 recording trigger V_OPG_INHIBIT Validation se 14 of disturbance TC19 recording trigger LV_OPG_VALID Disturbance recording Manual SFT28414 trigger inhibited disturbance TC20 V OPG INHIBITED recording trigger V OPG MANUAL Characteristics Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Blocks disturbance recording V OPG BLOCK D function Validates disturbance recording V_OPG_VALID D function Manual trigger of disturbance V_OPG_MANUAL D recording function Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Disturbance recording function V_OPG_TRIGGED D triggered Disturbance recording function V_OPG_BLOCKED D D blocked Disturbance recording on V_OPG_ON D Schneider 63230 216 230B1 209 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 210 63230 216 230B1 DE50807 Switching Groups of Settings Operation There are two groups of settings A and B for the phase overcurrent ground fault directional phase overcurrent and directional ground fault protection functions Switching from one group to another makes it possible to adapt the protection characteristics to suit the electrical environment of the application change of grounding system changeover to local power generation Switching settings is global and applies to all the units of the protection functions mentioned above The
299. nitoring the calculated active power flows for two reasons 1 to adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the network load power demand 2 to create an isolated system in an installation with its own generating unit The protection function enables if the active power flowing in one direction or the other supplied or drawn is less than the power set point Ps It includes a definite time delay T and is based on the two or three wattmeter method of measurement depending on the connection conditions m Van Vbn Ven and la Ib Ic three wattmeters Van Vbn Vcn and la Ic two wattmeters Vab Vbc with Vr and la Ib Ic three wattmeters Vab Vbc with Vr and la Ic two wattmeters Vab Vbc without Vr two wattmeters other cases protection function unavailable The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or Main parameter according to the convention For the feeder circuit m power supplied by the bus is positive normal direction m power supplied to the bus is negative flow direction DE50769 For the main circuit m power supplied to the bus is positive normal direction m power supplied by the bus is negative DE50770 direction H Bi Block Diagram normal reverse flow selection delayed output pick up signal Characteristics Settings Tripping Direction Setting range Normal reverse Ps Set Point Setting range 5 of Sn to 100 of Sn 2
300. nk Under steady state conditions it is equal to E C x 100 as a Scbneider 63230 216 230B1 99 amp Electric DE51555 Protection Functions 100 step position Thermal Overload for Capacitors ANSI Code 49RMS Operation curve The protection function gives a trip command when the current drawn is greater than the overload current with respect to the rated current of the sequence Tripping time is set by assigning a hot tripping time to a setting current This setting is used to calculate a time factor 1 msi IB where In natural logarithm N ioe IB IB The tripping time with an initial heat rise of 0 is then given by s t CxIn Ts where In natural logarithm er Aph n Itrip 2 mecs Let kxTs The tripping time with an intial heat rise of 100 is then given by cb Ibseq t Cx In xTs where In natural logarithm Iph ch Itrip y Ibseq Ibseq kxTs The tripping curve tables give the values of k for an inital heat rise from 0 to 100 The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Block Diagram Itrip step 1 closed step 2 closed am step 3 closed s step 4 closed lalarm 2 alarm and indication Bsd gt x 100 ww output i IBseq heat rise Iph 4 Iph 2 At t Ek n Ba llBsegl Cx Ts Cx Ts 63230 216 230B1 Itrip p 3 gt IBseq 100 tripping and indication output
301. nly initiate tripping of the circuit breaker if it is validated by an input The input comes from a relay which gives a very accurate measurement of the neutral point current V TRIPCB P50N 51N 1 3 AND 1210 7 Block circuit breaker closing if thermal alarm thresholds are overrun The temperature protection function 38 49T supplies 16 alarm bits If one of the first three bits is activated 1 state the user wishes to block circuit breaker closing V BLOCKCLOSE P38 49T 1 10 OR P38 49T 2 10 OR P38 49T 3 10 8 Remote control command to block protection 50 51 unit 1 VL1 SR TC63 TC64 TC63 set block TC64 reset blocking P50 51 1 113 VL1 VL1 is stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved eed 63230 216 230B1 259 ectric Control and Monitoring Customized Functions Functions Using Logipam The SFT2885 programming software Logipam can be used to enhance Sepam by programming specific control and monitoring functions Only the Sepam Series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080 option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by Logipam Operating principle Signal El Eod Control matrix ana amps 2 inputs amp 8 ae Predefined control and Messages Mimic diagram monitoring functions PHASE FAULT keys Predefined 1 19 messages Mimic diagram Personalized Control
302. nment in the Control Matrix The assignment of the logic outputs required for the AT function takes place in two 1 declaring the required logic outputs Used indicating the control mode of each output in the SFT2841 Logic I Os screen 2 assigning each predefined output associated with the AT function to a Sepam logic output in the SFT2841 Control matrix screen The predefined outputs associated with the AT function are as follows Protection button 59 1 Logic button NO circuit breaker closing Description Delayed output of the Phase overvoltage function ANSI 59 Unit 1 Description Predefined output V CLOSE NO ORD of the AT function Use Indication for the opposite side Sepam voltage OK upstream of the incoming circuit breaker Use Automatic closing command of normally open circuit breaker Tie closing Predefined output Tie close command V TIE CLOSING of the AT function Tie tripping Predefined output Tie open command V TIE OPENING of the AT function Breaker closing ready Predefined output V CLOSE EN of the AT function LED indication the return to normal conditions are met neglecting the sync check Tie closing ready Predefined output V TIE CLOSE EN of the AT function LED indication the tie close conditions are met neglecting the sync check Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Functions
303. nputs Outputs Depending on the desired operation of the mimic based UMI Sepam variables must be assigned to the inputs of animated symbols and the inputs outputs of controlled symbols Sepam Variables Assigned to Symbol Inputs Sepam Variables Name Use Logic inputs Ixxx Symbol animation directly based on device positions Outputs of predefined Switchgear control V_BLOCK_CLOSE Circuit breaker operation disabled functions Position of key on the front V_MIMIC_LOCAL m Representation of key position panel of Sepam V_MIMIC_REMOTE m Operation disabled depending on the control mode V_MIMIC_TEST Logic equations or Logipam V_MIMIC_IN_1 to m Representation of Sepam internal status conditions program V_MIMIC_IN_16 m Cases where operation is disabled Sepam Variables Logic outputs Sepam Variables to be Assigned to Symbol Outputs Name Oxxx Use Direct control of devices Inputs of predefined functions Switchgear control V_MIMIC_CLOSE_CB V_MIMIC_OPEN_CB Circuit breaker control using the switchgear control function via the mimic based UMI Logic equations or Logipam program V_MIMIC_OUT1 to V_MIMIC_OUT16 Command processing by logic functions interlocking command sequence etc Liste d tats Nom Aper u ouvert N ferm inconnu A entr e n 1 ouvert entr e n 2 ferm sortie n 1 ouvert sortie n 2 ferm inhibition ouvert inhibition ferm Liste d entr
304. nt of m the main phase to neutral voltages Van Vbn and Vcn measured on phases a b andc m the additional phase to neutral voltages V an V bn and V cn measured on phases a b andc Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement Range 0 05 to 1 2 Virnp 0 Units Vor kV Resolution 1V Accuracy 0 5 96 typical 2 main channels 1 typical additional channels 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Vj p 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 MAD Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 Van primary rated phase to neutral voltage V Ln p Vu Div 2 At V p under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 21 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric Metering Functions 22 63230 216 230B1 Residual Voltage Neutral Point Voltage Residual Voltage Operation This function provides the following values gt gt gt gt m main residual voltage Vr Van Vbn Ven v K v v m additional residual voltage V r V an V bn V cn Calculating residual voltage occurs in one of two ways m by an broken wye delta voltage transformer VT m by taking the internal vector sum of the three phase voltages Measure the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component of the voltages to
305. nt voltage on the bus during automatic transfer Two solutions are proposed m protecting the two mains with Sepam B80 to O measure the three phase voltages upstream of the circuit breaker and detect the loss of phase voltage O measure one additional phase voltage on the bus and detect the presence of remnant voltage m protecting the two mains with another type of Sepam Series 80 and checking the remaining voltage on the bus with Sepam B21 Local Control of Automatic Transfer Local control of automatic transfer requires the following components m one NO circuit breaker selector ANSI 10 2 or 3 position selector which designates the circuit breaker that remains open at the end of voluntary transfer without interruption m one optional Manual Auto selector ANSI 43 o in Auto mode automatic transfer is enabled o in Manual mode automatic transfer is disabled D when this optional selector is not included all the automatic transfer functions are enabled m as many as three optional Local Remote selectors one selector for the function or one selector per circuit breaker D in Remote mode automatic transfer on voltage loss is enabled and the other functions are disabled o in Local mode automatic transfer on voltage loss is disabled and the other functions are enabled D when these optional selectors are not included all the automatic transfer functions are enabled m two or three optional pushbuttons with LEDs o
306. ntaneous output pick up P67N_x_1 Delayed output P67N x3 m Li D Drop out P67N_x 4 m L Instantaneous output reverse zone P67N_x 6 m L Protection blocked DIN x 16 m Li Instantaneous output at 0 8 IsO P67Nx_21 m L D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE51173 Protection Functions Lim 1 Isr set point Tripping zone 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Directional Ground Fault Type 3 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Type 3 Operation This protection operates like a ground fault protection function ANSI 50N 51N with an added angular direction criterion Lim 1 Lim 2 It is suitable for distribution networks in which the neutral grounding system varies according to the operational Vr mode The tripping direction may be set at the bus end or line end Residual current is the current measured at the Sepam Ir input It has a definite time delay DT constant By choosing 0 as an Isr set point the protection function behaves like a neutral voltage displacement protection function ANSI 59N Simplified Schematic DE80142 CSH ZSCT CT2A ir gt Isr Fe Lim 1 Lim 2 time delayed Lim 1 lt or lt Lim 2 bus line output lt L choice Van Vbn Vcn Vr Tum pick up signal and J to zone selective un interlocking Definite Time Operation Isr corresponds to the operating set point expressed in amps and T corresponds to the
307. ntil acknowledgement takes place The Latching acknowledgement function associated with the Switchgear control function can be used to perform the ANSI 86 Lockout relay function Block Diagram DE52251 Acknowledgement by UMI Reset key V INHIB RESET LOCAL Reset by remote control TC3 Inhibit remote control Reset by SFT2841 External reset by logic input V RESET Characteristics Hr JHE Acknowledgement by UMI Reset key V_KEY_RESET Reset requested V_RESET_ORD Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Blocking UMI Reset key V_BLOCK_RESET_LOCAL m Acknowledgement by logic V RESET D L equation or Logipam Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Reset requested V RESET ORD Acknowledgement by UMI V KEY RESET D Reset key Schneider Gf Electric 63230 216 230B1 207 Control and Monitoring Functions 208 63230 216 230B1 DE51637 TC Switchgear Position Discrepancy Operation This function detects any discrepancy between the last remote control command received and the actual position of the circuit breaker or contactor The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS3 Block Diagram Breaker open 1102 TC2 close TC1 open Inhibit remote control Q_T TO switchgear T 1s position discrepancy V_TC CBDISCREP TC2 close TC1 open Breaker closed 1101
308. nual control commands D automatic control commands received from reactive energy regulators Control of Logic Outputs The logic commands from the Switchgear control function are used to control the Sepam logic outputs which control m opening and closing of the circuit breaker m opening and closing of each capacitor step switch Logic output control is set up to match the type of device to be controlled like a circuit breaker or capacitor step switch Schneider 63230 216 230B1 199 amp Electric DE52274 Control and Monitoring Functions Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Processing Internal Switchgear Commands Block Diagram Voluntary open orders All capacitor steps open Switchgear control Internal trip order V_TRIPPED 0 T Internal trip orders Tom External trip orders Internal close inhibit V CLOSE INHIBITED Control Internal close inhibit of logic 02 outputs Close inhibit by logic inputs i All capacitor steps not open i Internal close order Breaker 9 V CLOSED amp Voluntary close orders closed Internal close orders D I i External close orders E 7 S 2 d 7 7 E 7 7 7 7 7 Er b 7 1 Capacitor step 4 control A I S 2 amp x 3 pad Capacitor step 3 control E a S 2 2 2 i P E e T i Lou Capacitor step 2 control x T 2 2 a 5 5 2 S E x P
309. number of starts hot cold total starts per hour The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal overload protection function for cables capacitors or machines The time depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m aSepam display through the e icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 999 min Units min Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 min Refresh Interval 1 second typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50671 Metering Functions Measured starting current A TE E E 222 onen gt t Starting ee l 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Machine Operation Assistance Counter Starting Current and Starting Time Running Hours and Operating Time Counter The counter gives the total running time the protected device motor generator or transformer has been operating that is whenever a phase current is over 0 1 IB For capacitor applications up to four counters are available for the running time of steps 1 to 4 These counters total the time that a capacitor step has been connected to the network capacitor step switch closed The initial counter value can be modified using the SFT2841 software The counters are saved in case auxiliary power fails Readout Measurements are accessed via m the Sepam
310. o its value at point B the electromotive force reduces its lead on the network voltage the electrical power supplied to the network increases slightly At a constant level of mechanical power do Pr eg P a de The machine slows because the derivative of the velocity is negative Electrically speaking the electromotive force reduces its lead and consequently the angle 6 until it returns to point A When the machine passes point B racing occurs When a fault occurs assuming it is a three phase dead short across the generator terminals the voltage across the machine terminals is equal to zero Consequently the electrical power supplied to the network is zero 3VEsin _ 3x0xEsin The regulation systems do not have enough time to react and the mechanical power across the machine terminals remain constant The fault results in an unbalance between the electrical power supplied to the network and the mechanical power do Pn P dt Jo If the derivative of the velocity is positive the machine accelerates and the electromotive force begins to lead with respect to the voltage of the network As long as the fault continues the machine accelerates The variation in velocity is fodo 3 P dt where me to gt 0 the steady state conditions before the fault to o o the fault clearing conditions ti 1 51 t The integral Pact is proportional to the acceleration t of the machine It is commonly called the
311. o neutral and phase to phase voltages 20 63230 216 230B1 Phase to Phase Voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component of m the main phase to phase voltages gt gt gt o Vab Va Vb voltage between phases a and b gt gt gt D Vbcz Vb Vo voltage between phases b and c gt gt gt o Vca Vc Va voltage between phases a and c m the additional phase to phase voltages 7 Wa ow o V ab V a V b voltage between phases a and b gt gt gt o V bcz V b V c voltage between phases b and c 3 ge 2 Hn V acz V a V c voltage between phases a and c Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with SFT2841 software m communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vi p Units V or kV Resolution 1V Accuracy 0 5 96 typical main channels 1 96 typical 2 additional channels 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Mu 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 Vit Display format 3 significant digits Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Set in the general settings 2 At V p under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Metering Functions Phase to Neutral Voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz compone
312. obtain the residual voltage value Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with SFT2841 software m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 015 to 3 V 0 Units V or kV Resolution 1V Accuracy 1 from 0 5 to 3 Vi 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 m 5 from 0 02 to 0 05 Nu e Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 V p primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vi 4p Vunyp Y3 Neutral Point Voltage Operation This function gives the value of the zero sequence voltage Vnt measured at the neutral point of a generator or motor by a dedicated VT gt gt gt gt Vnt Van Vbn Vcn 3 Readout Access the measurements through m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 015 to 3 Vip 1 Units V or kV Resolution 1V Accuracy 1 from 0 5 to 3 V_ p 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 Vp 5 from 0 02 to 0 05 V p Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 V 4p is an abbreviation that refers to neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Positive Sequence Voltage Operation This function calculates
313. of phase b Loss of phase c Characteristics Time Delay Setting 0 15 s to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Blocking Protection Functions 21B 32P 32Q 37P 40 46 51N 64REF 67N 78PS Setting No action block Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Block function PCTS x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Delayed output PCTS_x_3 D D L Phase a fault PCTS x 7 m Phase b fault PCTS_x_8 D D Phase c fault PCTS_x_9 D Function blocked PCTS x 16 m D Note x unit number x 1 main channels x 2 additional channels I Schneider 63230 216 230B1 53 amp Electric DE10365 DE10364 Metering Functions DE50111 1102 5 pa b Connection when trip circuit Connection when trip circuit is wired with NO contacts is wired with NC contacts box Connection for closing circuit supervision 54 63230 216 230B1 Switchgear Diagnosis Trip and Closing Circuit Supervision ANSI Code 74 Trip Circuit Supervision and Open Closed Matching Operation This supervision function operates with trip circuits that use either normally open NO or normally closed NC trip units It blocks breaker operation under false conditions With NO units the function detects W circuit continuity m supply loss m mismatching of position indication contacts With NC units the function only detects a mismatch of position indicat
314. of the recorded channels The naming convention for logic input and output data that Logipam uses is also used in disturbance recording for ease of reading The duration and number of recordings may be set using the SFT2841 software tool The files are recorded in First In First Out FIFO type shift storage when the maximum number of recordings is reached the oldest recording is erased when a new recording is triggered Transfer Files will transfer in one of two ways m locally by using a PC connected to the front panel and includes the SFT2841 software tool m remotely by using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system Recovery The SFT2826 software gives the user the ability to recover a recording Block Diagram stored record X triggering event Characteristics MT10181 Recording content Set up file date channel characteristics measuring chain transformer ratio Sample file recorded signals Sampling frequency 1 12 or 36 samples per network period Analog signals recorded 2 la Ib Ic Ir l a l b I c l r current channels Van Vbn Vcn or Vab Vbc V an V bn V cn V ab V bc phase voltage channels Vr VNt or V r residual voltage channels Logical states recorded 1 3 Maximum 32 of the following data m all logic inputs outputs m pick up signal m 1 data item configurable by the logic equation editor or 15 data items configurable by Logipam V FLAGREC V_FLAGREC2
315. ogipam Phase VT fault PVTS_x_103 m D Blocking function PVTS x 113 m D Voltage presence PVTS_x_117 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Function output PVTS_x_3 D D D Function blocked PVTS x 16 m D Note x unit number x 1 main channels V X 2 additional channels V Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE10415 Switchgear Diagnosis CT Supervision ANSI Code 60C Operation The Current Transformer CT supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase current measurement chain m phase CTs 1A 5A CTs or LPCTs m phase current CT connection to Sepam m Sepam phase current analog inputs There are two units for the function one for supervising the main current channel CTs I and the other for supervising the additional current channel CTs I The function is inactive if only two phase CTs are connected The Main CT fault or Additional CT fault information disappears automatically when three phase currents are measured and have values greater than 10 of IN If a phase current is lost the following protection functions can be blocked to avoid nuisance tripping m 21B 46 40 32P 37P 32Q 78PS 64REF m 51N and 67N if Ir is calculated by the sum of the phase currents Block Diagram Sen CT fault Ic 55 IN PCTS_x_3 Loss
316. oint Setting range 2 to 80 Vu p Accuracy 1 5 or 0 005 Vup Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 006 Vitp Vsr x 100 Sector Setting range 86 83 76 Accuracy 1 2 Memory Time Tr mem Setting range 0 0 05 to 300 s Resolution Memory Voltage Vr mem Setting range 10 ms or 1 digit 0 2 to 80 of Vun Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 1 Pick up lt 55 ms at 2 Isr Overshoot time lt 45 ms at 2 Isr Reset time lt 50 ms at Tr mem 0 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P67N x 101 m Protection blocking P67N x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P67N_x_1 a Delayed output P67N x 3 m Drop out P67N_x_4 Instantaneous output reverse zone P67N_x_6 Protection blocked P67N x 16 m Instantaneous output at 0 8 Isr P67N x 21 m x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Standard Setting The settings below are given for usual applications in different grounding systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Isolated neutral Isr setting Set according to coordination study Impedant neutral Set according to coordination study Compensated neutral Set according to coordination study Characteristic angle 00 90 0 0 amp Electric Time delay
317. oint I Id It2 max 100 i zd Id It2 7 Id It2 min S 274 7 dit max ripping zone 2 50 vu 2 Id it Ids max A A S Id It min Ids le 0 3 Ids min I 1 EES 1 2 3 4 5 18 It In1 d change point Self Adaptive Restraint The self adaptive restraint is particularly suitable for transformers where finr lt 8 tan 8IN where finr is the peak tripping current In is the rated peak current In is the rated transformer current This neutral network restraint ensures stability in the event of an external fault by analyzing the second and fifth harmonic factors the differential currents and the through currents It ensures stability in the event of the following m transformer closing m an asymmetrical fault outside the zone that saturates the CTs m the transformer operating on a voltage supply that is too high overexcitation Detecting the presence of harmonics and monitoring the through and differential currents the restraint automatically increases the low set point and the percentage based slopes It is also more sensitive than the high set point Using the high set point is unecesseary when this restraint is active Also as the restraint integrates the stabilization slope for high through currents which can saturate the CTs slope Id It2 does not have to be activated Conventional Restraint The conventional restraint comprises a second harmonic set point
318. oltage difference Switchgear control wi func ion h sync check Closing failed out of sync cause dPHI Breaker closing blocked because sources are out of sync due to an excessive phase difference Switchgear control wi func ion h sync check Closing failed out of sync cause dF Breaker closing blocked because sources are out of sync due to an excessive frequency difference Switchgear control wi func ion h sync check Stop closing with sync check Automatic Transfer Tie closing with sync check failed A sync checked circuit breaker close request has been interrupted The tie close request initiated by automatic transfer has failed because the sources are out of sync Switchgear control wi func ion h sync check Tripping by automatic transfer Breaker tripping initiated by automatic transfer tripping is performed by the switchgear control function Tripping by 2 3 or 1 2 logic Breaker tripping initiated by 2 3 or 1 2 logic tripping is performed by the switchgear control function NO circuit breaker closing Normally open circuit breaker close command for automatic transfer function Breaker closing ready Indication that breaker closing is possible to return to normal operation Tie closing Tie closing command for automatic transfer function Tie closing ready Indication thattie breaker closing is possible to return to normal operatio
319. oltage is higher than a set point It includes a definite time DT delay The protection function operates if m the positive sequence voltage is greater than 5096 of the rated phase to neutral voltage m the network frequency is between 42 2 Hz and 56 2 Hz for 50 Hz networks and between 51 3 Hz and 65 Hz for 60 Hz networks Block Diagram positive df dt negative df dt de51554 pick up signal delayed output invalid frequency invalid voltage Characteristics Settings dfs dt Set Point Setting range 0 1 to 10 Hz s Accuracy 1 5 or 0 1 Hz Resolution 0 01 Hz Drop out pick up ratio 93 Temporization Setting range 0 15 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 10 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times 1 Operation time Pick up 150 ms typically 130 ms Overshoot time 100 ms Reset time 100 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P81R x 101 m L Protection blockingblock P81R x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P81R x 1 L L Tripping output PBIRx3 m L D Protection blocked P81R_x 16 m D Invalid voltage P81R_x 42 m D Invalid frequency P81R_x 43 m L Positive df dt P81R_x 44 m D Negative df dt P81R_x_ 45 m L x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s 2007 Schneider Ele
320. om 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings Tripping Direction Setting range Tripping Logic Setting range Timer Hold T1 Setting range definite time Bus line One out of three two out of three 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20s Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit pick up lt 75 ms at 2 Is typically 65 ms Inst lt 90 ms at 2 Is confirmed instantaneous typically 75 ms Overshoot time lt 45 ms at 2 Is Reset time lt 55 ms at 2 Is for T1 0 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P67_x_101 Protection blocking P67_x_113 L D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P67 x 1 L L Delayed output P67 x 3 L D D Drop out P67_x 4 D Instantaneous output reverse P67_x_6 L D zone Phase a fault P67_x_7 Phase b fault P67_x 8 Phase c fault P67_x 9 L Protection blocked P67_x_16 D Instantaneous output at 0 8 Is P67_x_21 1 out of 3 delayed output P67_x_36 L D 2 out of 3 delayed output P67_x_37 D D amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 139 Protection Functions Directional Ground Fault Type 1 ANSI Code 67N 67NC Ground fault protection with selective Description tripping according to fault current direction In order to adapt to all types of applications and all grounding system
321. onal Ground Fault unit 2 pickup 0 8 Is Overcurrent unit 1 delayed unit 2 delayed Ground Fault unit 1 delayed unit 2 delayed Blocking reception 1 and 3 Directional Ground Fault unit 1 delayed Directional Overcurrent 2 unit 1 delayed blocking reception 1 logic input Overcurrent unit 5 delayed unit 6 delayed Ground Fault unit 5 delayed unit 6 delayed Directional Ground Fault unit 2 delayed Directional Overcurrent unit 2 delayed blocking reception 2 logic input Time based thresholds Overcurrent unit 3 delayed unit 4 delayed unit 7 delayed unit 8 delayed Ground Fault unit 3 delayed unit 4 delayed unit 7 delayed unit 8 delayed 1 By default 2 According to application Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved output 0102 1 blocking send 1 BSIG2 7 o output O103 1 blocking send 2 T 0 i T 200 ms inhibit blocking send if fault not cleared Zone sequence interlocking trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP 63230 216 230B1 215 Control and Monitoring Zone Selective Interlocking Functions S82 S84 T82 T87 G82 G87 and G88 Applications Threshold Assignment Type of Unit Number Protection Time Based Send Logic Reception Logic Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2 50 51 3 4 7 8 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 50N 51N 3 4 7 8 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 670 1 2 1 2 67N 1 1 2 1 2
322. onnected m winding 2 corresponds to the circuit to which the additional currents l a I b l c are connected The transformer electrical parameters must be set on the Particular characteristics screen in the SFT2841 software m winding 1 voltage VitN1 m winding 2 voltage ViuN2 m vector shift m transformer rated power S To assist during the setup procedure the screen shows m the transformer rated current value for windings 1 and 2 IN1 IN2 m the value set on the CT VT screen for the base current IB of winding 1 m the value calculated using the transformation ratio for the base current I B of winding 2 164 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Transformer Differential ANSI Code 87T Matching Principle The currents in windings 1 and 2 cannot be compared directly due to the transformation ratio and the phase displacement introduced by the power transformer Sepam does not use matching CTs It uses the rated power and winding voltage data to calculate the transformation ratio and therefore to match current amplitude The vector shift is used to match the phase currents Winding 1 Current Matching Winding 1 is always matched in the same way whatever the vector shift of the transformer The matching is made by clearing the zero sequence current in order to make the protection function immune to external ground faults gt gt gt gt iim _ Ja Ja lb Ic 7 IN 3IN1 2 fastb f a lb Ic 12m I
323. ons Logic a Signal lamps 8 inputs Control matrix E EE Messages Mimic diagram Predefined control and PHASE FAULT keys monitoring functions Circuit breaker contactor control Predefined Mimic diagram 1 0 EP SEH messages Personalized messages Protection functions Logic outputs Animated Logic He equations mimic diagram L Logic Function Configuration Logic functions are entered in text format in the SFT2841 equation editor Each line includes a logic operation the result of which is assigned to a variable Example Va P5051_2_3 OR la02 The variable Va is assigned the result of the logic OR operation involving the value from protection function 50 51 and logic input la02 The variables may be used for other operations or as outputs to produce actions in the control matrix protection functions or predefined control and monitoring functions SETZBA Sepam series 80 Den station LOLOG SE7 PE50460 A program is a series of lines executed sequentially every 14 ms A data input assistance tool provides quick access to each equation editor operator and variables Description of Operations Operators pe Ee em x m assignment of a result SFT2841 logic equation editor Nor e INb is assigned the value of VL3 logic inversion Jens VL1 NOT VL2 VL1 is assigned the opposite logic state of VL2 E Protection Inputs Remote control Variables
324. ontrol and Monitoring Functions Sepam hardware General characteristics CT VT sensors CTAT Supervisi PE50456 Predefined control logic Switchgear control iv On Circuit breaker Contactor Logic discrimination On SFT2841 Switchgear conrtol parameter setting Sepam hardware General characteristics CT VT sensors CT PE50455 Logic input output assignment Used Charact Pulse Oi Yes no O2 Yes NC O3 ies NO O4 Mo OS es NC Pulse d Fa m SFT2841 default parameter setting of logic outputs assigned to Switchgear control Capacitor step control 5 W On D Stagger time Discharge time Capacitor step 500 ms H 100 Capacitor step 1 e 100 f Capacitor step 15 s 21 100 D Open and close control pulse fo m 4 SFT2841 Capacitor step control functionis parameter setting 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Gf Electric Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Setting the Circuit Breaker Control Parameter The function is set up and adapted to match the type of circuit breaker to be controlled using the SFT2841 software Control Logic Tab W activation of the Switchgear control function m type of device to be controlled Circuit breaker Logic I Os Tab m assignment of the logic inputs required m definition of logic output behavior By default the following outputs are used Logic Output Associated Int
325. ontrol commands TC1 to TC64 Pulse type value duration of one 14 ms cycle of remote control commands received Predefined control function outputs V TRIPPED Tripping command present at switchgear control function output V BLOCK CLOSE Block closing command present at switchgear control function output V CLOSED Closing command present at switchgear control function output Mimic based UMI outputs Output Variables V MIMIC OUT 1 to V MIMIC OUT 16 Variables that may be assigned to the mimic diagram symbol outputs and that change values when control commands are transmitted from the mimic based UMI V MIMIC LOCAL V MIMIC TEST V MIMIC REMOTE Position of the key on the mimic based UMI Type Syntax Example Meaning Outputs to matrix V1 to V20 They may initiate LEDs logic outputs or messages in the matrix Protection function inputs Pnnnn x y P50N 51N 6 113 Protection 50N 51N unit 6 block command nnn ANSI code The protection function output data numbers are given in the x unit characteristics of each function and may be accessed using the y data data input assistance tool Predefined control function inputs V TRIPCB Tripping of circuit breaker contactor by the switchgear control Local Variables Constants function Used to adapt tripping and recloser activation conditions V BLOCKCLOSE Block circuit breaker contactor closing by the switchgear control function Used to add circuit break
326. or local control of the device in complete safety m Optional Logipam programming software for programming dedicated functions DE51734 DE51735 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Introduction Sepam Protective Relays Overview Standard Specific Substation Bus Transformer Motor Generator Capacitor Current protection Breaker failure S23 T23 M20 Voltage and B21 frequency protection Disconnection B22 ROCOF Current voltage and S40 T40 G40 frequency protection Directional S41 M41 ground fault Directional S42 T42 ground fault and phase overcurrent Current voltage and S80 B80 frequency protection Directional S81 T81 M81 ground fault Directional ground fault S82 T82 G82 and phase overcurrent Disconnection ROCOF S84 Current voltage and Transformer or machine T87 M88 G88 frequency protection transformer unit differential Machine differential M87 G87 Current voltage and Voltage and B83 frequency protection frequency protection for two sets of busses Current voltage and Capacitor C86 frequency protection bank unbalance 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 3 amp Electric PE50278 Introd
327. or Ground Fault 133 Restricted Ground Fault Differential 134 Starts per Hour 136 Directional Phase Overcurrent 137 Directional Ground Fault Type 1 140 Directional Ground Fault Type 2 143 Directional Ground Fault Type 3 145 Pole Slip 147 Recloser 151 Overfrequency 155 Underfrequency 156 Rate of Change of Frequency df dt 157 Machine Differential 160 Transformer Differential 163 General 172 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 59 amp Electric Protection Functions Setting Ranges ANSI 12 Overspeed ANSI 14 Underspeed ANSI 21B Underimpedance Impedance Zs ANSI 24 Overexcitation V Hz 100 to 160 of Qn 10 to 100 of Qn 0 05 to 2 00 VN IB 1 to 300s 1 to 300 s Tripping curve Definite time IDMT type A B or C Gs set point 1 03 to 2 pu Definite time 0 1 to 20000 s ANSI 25 Sync Check Measured voltages Phase to phase Rated Primary Phase to Phase Voltage ViapSynct Vin sync1 Viipsyne1 V3 220 V to 250 kV Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT 0 1 to 1250s Phase to neutral 220 V to 250 kV Vip sync2 Vi npsync2 Viupsync2 V3 220 V to 250 kV Rated Secondary Phase to Phase Voltage Vias sync1 90 V to 120 V 220 V to 250 kV 90 V to 230 V Vits Sync2 Sync Check Setpoints dUs set point 90 V to 120 V 3 to 30 of Vii p synci 90 V to 230 V 3 to 30 of Vinp sync1 dfs set point 0 05 to 0 5 Hz 0 05 to 0 5
328. or this transformer 11 6 A lt IN x 290 A and 230 A x I N lt 5 75 kA Taking these two restrictions into account the values selected are those standardized by ANSI IN 150 A and lN 2 3 kA The tripping current is finr sin so for both winding 1 and winding 2 Inn 5 x 2 x 116 820 A finr2 5 x 2 x 2 3 kA 16 3 kA These tripping currents must be compared with the rated current of the current sensors in order to select the accuracy limit factor A A lint _ 820A _ linr2 _ 16 3 kA 2N 2x150A OO TE and pn 7 ONS kA The accuracy limit factor is therefore 20 with a rated burden of VAcr gt Rw in2 The following sensors are selected m for winding 1 150 A 1 A 5P20 where VAcT1 m for winding 2 3 kA 1 A 5P20 where VAcra2 Setting the Percentage based Curve and the Maximum Threshold As this transformer does not feature a tap changer or an auxiliary winding the tripping threshold is therefore set to a minimum value Ids 30 and the slope to Id It 15 3 8 lt 6 7 As the ratio between the closing current and the rated current is less than 8 V2 the self adaptive harmonic restraint is selected The second slope on the percentage based curve and the maximum threshold are not necessary and are not therefore used 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE52178 Protection Functions VuN1 20 8 kV In1 69A S 2 5 MVA Dyn11 Changer 15 VuN2 420 V
329. ort 3 input 1103 5 none 12 Remote control mode 1 SBO mode 2 direct mode 13 Reserved 14 Monitoring of auxiliary power 1 inactive 2 active 15 Rated auxiliary voltage 24 to 250 V DC 16 Aux voltage alarm low set point rated Vaux min 20 V 17 Aux voltage alarm high set point rated Vaux max 275 V 18 Logic inputs ignored on loss of Vaux 1 inactive 2 active 19 Base current IB 0 2 to 1 3 IN A 20 Rated current IN 1 to 6250 A 21 Number of phase CTs 1 2 CTs 2 3 CTs 22 Phase CT rating 1 1A 2 5 A3 LPCT 23 Rated residual current Inr 10 to 62500 dA 24 Residual current measurement mode 1 CSH2A 3 CSH 20 A 4 CSH CT1A 6 CSH CT5A 8 ACE990 range 1 9 ACE990 range 2 11 not measured 25 Reserved 26 Rated primary voltage Vup 220 to 250000 V 27 Rated secondary voltage Vi s 100 110 115 120 200 230 V 28 VT wiring 1 3 Viw 2 2 Nu 3 1 Mu 4 1 Vin 29 Residual voltage mode 1 none 2 23V 3 VT Vus 3 4 VT Vs 3 30 Neutral point residual voltage measurement 1 none 2 present 31 Neutral point rated voltage V p 220 to 250000 V 32 Neutral point rated voltage Vi s 57V to 133 V 33 Reserved 34 Reserved 35 Additional rated current l n 1to 6250A 36 Number of additional phase CTs 1 2CTs 2 3 CTs3 none 37 Additional phase CT rating 1 1A 2 5 A3 LPCT 38 Additional rated residual current l Nr 10 to 62500 dA 39 Additional residual current measurement mode Idem 24 40 Reserved 41 Reserved 42 Reserved 438 Reserved 44 Reserved 45 Reserve
330. osed circuit breaker D Li D Li D D D D D D 1101 Open circuit breaker L D D D L D D D D D D D D 1102 Synchronization of Sepam internal s D D D L D D D D D D D D 1103 clock via external pulse Switching of groups of settings A B D D L D D D D D D D D D Free External reset D D D D D D a Free Grounding switch closed L D D D L D D D D D D Free Grounding switch open Li D D Li D D D D D D Free External trip 1 D D D D D D D D D Free External trip 2 D D D D D D D Free External trip 3 L D D D L D D D D D D D D Free End of charging position D D D L D D D D Free Block remote control Local L D L D L D D D D D D Free SF6 pressure default Li Li D Li D D D D D D Free Block closing D D D D D D D D D Free Open command Li D D Li D D D D D Free Close command L D L D D D D D D D D Free Phase VT fuse blown D D D D D D D Free Vr VT fuse blown D D D D D D D D Free External positive active energy meter D D D D D E D D D Free External negative active energy meter m Li D D D D D D D D Free External positive reactive energy meter m Li D D D D D D a D D Free External negative reactive energy meter m D D a D D D D Free Racked out circuit breaker Li LI D Li D D D D D D D D Free Switch A closed D D D D D D D D D D D Free Switch A open Li Li D Li D D D D D D Free Switch B closed L D D D D D D D D D D Free
331. otors A time constant is estimated for each group of thermal settings Readout Measurements are accessed via m the Sepam display by means of the key m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 5 to 600 min Units min Resolution 1 min Accuracy 5 Display Format 3 significant digits Schneider 63230 216 230B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 41 Metering Functions 42 63230 216 230B1 Machine Operation Assistance Operating Time Before Tripping Waiting Time After Tripping Remaining Operating Time Before Overload Tripping Operation ANSI code 49RMS requires time for the motor to cool sufficiently before allowing a start attempt ANSI code 66 is a setting that limits the total number of starts hot cold total starts per hour Thermal capacity used is calculated by using the thermal overload protection function for cables capacitors or machines The time depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m aSepam display via the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 999 min Units min Display Format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 min Refresh Interval 1 second typical Waiting Time After Overload Tripping Operation ANSI code 66 is a setting that limits the total
332. outputs and logic inputs Under these conditions Sepam performs the following m grouping all tripping conditions and circuit breaker control m latching the trip command with blocking of closing until the cause of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user see Latching acknowledgement function m indicating the cause of tripping D locally by LEDs Trip and others and by messages on the display H remotely by remote indications see Indications function Schneider 63230 216 230B1 201 amp Electric Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Control and Monitoring Functions DE52276 Open by remote control TC1 Open order Ix Open by mimic based UMI V_MIMIC_OPENCB Processing Internal Switchgear Commands Block Diagram Internal voluntary capacitor step open order Breaker closed 1101 Capacitor step 1 open Ix Capacitor step 2 open Ix Capacitor step 3 open Ix Capacitor step 4 open Ix Internal trip order V_TRIPPED 0 T T 200 ms Breaker open 1102 a 0 T NEM Trip by protection ANSI 27 27D 38 49T 49RMS 50 51 50N 51N 59 59N configured to trip circuit breaker V_TRIPCB Internal capacitor step trip on fault order External trip 1 Ix External trip 2 Ix External trip 3 Ix Trip circuit supervision fault V TCS V INHIBCLOSE Internal close inhibit V CLOSE INHIBITED Close inhibit Ix Circuit breaker charged 9 end
333. oy ot Capacitor step 1 control MEE Voluntary open orders m 1 f Lo Trip orders by logic inputs gt Li i Internal trip orders Internal trip order i F F 2 V_STP1_TRIPPING Internal capacitor step trip gt 0 Timp p Oxxx on fault order CC L Internal voluntary capacitor LIII Step open order i T 0 Techi 7 control Er Internal close order _ of logic V STP1 CLOSING gt outputs Pod Close inhibit Oxxx oy Voluntary close orders Capacitor step matching fault LUE V STP CTRLFLT1 200 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Capacitor Bank Switchgear Control ANSI Code 94 69 Controlling the Circuit Breaker This function comprises two parts 1 processing of internal circuit breaker control commands m open circuit breaker 1 2 3 m close circuit breaker 6 7 8 m block circuit breaker closing 4 5 2 executing internal commands by control logic outputs according to the type of device to be controlled Processing Internal Circuit Breaker Control Commands The Switchgear control function processes all the circuit breaker close and trip conditions based on m protection functions configured to trip the circuit breaker m circuit breaker and capacitor step switch status data W remote control
334. p lt 35 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P51C x 101 m L Protection blocking P51C x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output P51C x 1 D L Tripping output P51C x 3 D Protection blocked P510 x 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Protection against phase to neutral or phase to phase overvoltages Description Protection against overvoltages or checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer the protection function is single phase and operates with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage it includes a definite time delay T in phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Operation with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage depends on the connection selected for the voltage inputs 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Overvoltage L L or L N ANSI Code 59 Connection conditions Type of Van Vbn Ven Vab Vbc Vr Vab Vbc Vab Van 1 connection Phase to neutral YES YES NO NO On Van only operation Phase to phase YES YES YES On Vab only NO operation 1 With or without Vr Block Diagram DE51626 Vab or Van gt Virs or Vins
335. peration time 38 ms to 2 Ps Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P78PS 1 101 m Protection blocking P78PS_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P78PS_1_1 Delayed output P78PS_1_3 Li Protection blocked P78PS 1 16 m 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Ps the maximum number of Poles slipped Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50639 DE50640 Protection Functions Example of Setting Consider a 3 15 MVA generator in an industrial installation connected to a network with a high short circuit Protection against losing synchronization is set up to trip according to the equal area criterion and the power swing criterion m tripping according to the equal area criterion 300 ms m number of 360 displacements allowed 2 m the maximum time between two swings is 10 seconds Principle of Transient Stability There are three types of stability in an electrical network m steady state stability concerns small variations in load and power It is monitored by the power regulation functions m dynamic stability concerns larger variations It is ensured by the network regulation functions m transient stability concerns major variations in power such as during faults It is monitored by action on the network such as load shedding source disconnection or independent operation of
336. phase Reactive power total or per phase 0 008 Sn to 999 MVAR 1 D Apparent power total or per phase 0 008 Sn to 999 MVA 1 D Peak demand active power 0 008 Sn to 999 MW 1 D Peak demand reactive power 0 008 Sn to 999 MVAR 1 D Power factor 1 to 1 CAP IND 0 01 B Calculated active energy 0 to 2 1 x 108 MWh 1 1 digit oo Calculated reactive energy 0 to 2 1 x 108 MVARh 1 1 digit oo Temperature 30 C to 200 C 1 C from 20 D or 22 F to 392 F to 140 C Rotation speed 0 to 7200 rpm 1 rpm Network Diagnosis Assistance Tripping context D Tripping current 0 02 to 40 IN 5 D Number of trips 0 to 65535 d oo Negative sequence unbalance 1 to 500 of x2 Total harmonic distortion current O to 100 1 Total harmonic distortion voltage 0 to 100 1 Phase displacement r between Vr and Ir 0 to 359 2 Phase displacement qa qb pc between V and 0 to 359 2 Disturbance recording D Amplitude difference Oto 1 2 V synci 1 Frequency difference Oto 10 Hz 0 5 Hz Phase difference 0 to 359 2 Out of sync context D m available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o o saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage even without battery D saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy see details on subsequent pages 14 63230 216 230B1 gr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering Functions Characteristics Machine Ope
337. point equal to 25 without cross blocking Idmax 2x 2x9 6In1 13 6 In1 63230 216 230B1 171 Protection Functions General Trip Curves Presentation of tripping curve operation and Definite Time Protection settings for protection functions using The tripping time is constant The time delay is started when the set point is overrun m definite time m DMT m timer hold MT10911 Definite time protection principle IDMT Protection The operation time depends on the protected value phase current ground fault current etc in accordance with standards IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 Operation is represented by a characteristic curve e g m t f l curve for the phase overcurrent function m t f Ir curve for the ground fault function The rest of the document is based on t f I the reasoning may be extended to other variables Ir etc The curve is defined by m its type standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse etc W current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve m time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for 10 Is These three settings are made in order of type Is current and time delay T Changing the time delay T setting by x changes all of the operation times in the curve by x 1 12 10 20 Vs IDMT protection principle The tripping time for I Is values less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve selected Name of Curve Type Stan
338. potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided minor or moderate injury or property damage Important Notes Restricted Liability Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this manual This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons Device Operation The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are suitable for its application The user is responsible for reading and following the device s operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or maintain it Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and constitute a hazard for people and property Protective Grounding The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to
339. principle from V 1 or V ab or V an Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Main Channels Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Range 25 to 65 Hz Resolution 0 01 Hz Accuracy 2 0 01 Hz Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval Additional Channels Rated Frequency fn 1 second typical 50 Hz 60 Hz Range 45 to 55 Hz fn 50 Hz 55 to 65 Hz fn 60 Hz Resolution 1 0 01 Hz Accuracy 2 0 05 Hz Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 On SFT2841 2 At V p under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider d Electric 63230 216 230B1 25 Metering Functions Active Reactive and Apparent Power Operation Power values are calculated from the phase currents la Ib and Ic m active power V3 V p l cos 20 m reactive power V3 Mupl sin Z m apparent power V3 V p l S Power calculations can be based on the two or three wattmeter method see table below depending on the CTs used The two wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current It is not applicable if the neutral is distributed The three wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation of 3 phase and phase by phase powers in all cases whether or not the neutral
340. pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor at each passage of one or more cams driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft see a more in depth description in the Metering Functions chapter of this manual The speed acquisition parameters must be set on the Particular characteristics screen of the SFT2841 software The Rotor speed measurement function must be assigned to logic input 1104 for the function to work The protection activates if the measured speed exceeds the speed set point The protection includes a definite time delay T Block Diagram pick up 3 signal Rotor Speed measurement Q Q gt Qs Le See 1104 Characteristics Settings Set Point Qs Setting range 100 to 160 of Qn Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 95 Time Delay T Setting range 1 s to 300 s Accuracy 1 25 ms or 60000 Qs x DD ms Resolution 1s Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P12 x 101 m D Protection blocking P12 x 113 m Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P12 x 1 L L Delayed output P12X3 m D D Protection blocked P12x 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Qs in rpm 3 R Number of pulses cam per rotation Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Underspeed ANSI Code 14 Monitoring underspee
341. quency and phase differences and out of sync context can be accessed via m Sepam display by using the amp icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Amplitude Difference Measurement Range 0 to 120 of Vi synct or Vi synct Unit 96 of Vi sync1 or V synct Resolution 0 1 Accuracy 2 Refresh Interval Frequency Difference 1 second typical Measurement Range 0 to 10 Hz Unit Hz Resolution 0 01 Hz Accuracy 0 05 Hz Refresh Interval Phase Difference 1 second typical Measurement Range 0 to 359 Unit 2 Resolution 1 Accuracy x2 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Metering Functions Machine Operation Assistance Thermal Capacity Used Cooling Time Constant Thermal Capacity Used Operation Thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal overload protection function for cables capacitors or machines The thermal capacity used is related to the load The thermal capacity used measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity E is the calculated heat rise Es is the heat rise setting Saving Thermal Capacity Used Values The thermal capacity used values are saved in the event Sepam loses power The saved value is used again after the outage Readout Measurements are accessed via m the Sepam display
342. r D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Protection against loss of field on synchronous motors or generators 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50306 DE50825 Loss of Field ANSI Code 40 Description The protection function is made up of two circular tripping characteristics on the impedance plane R X It enables when the positive sequence impedance Z1 enters one of the circular tripping characteristics 3 VI Zi T 11 X R gt Xa N i 2 R2 Xc Circular Tripping Characteristics m Case of a generator main or motor feeder Circle 1 Circle 2 Center C1 Xa Xb 2 C2 Xa Xc 2 Radius R1 Xb Xa 2 R2 Xc Xa 2 m Case of a generator feeder or motor main the tripping characteristics are symmetrical with respect to the R axis Circle 1 Circle 2 Center C1 Xa Xb 2 C2 Xa Xc 2 Radius R1 Xb Xa 2 R2 Xc Xa 2 Block Diagram circle 1 inst output Z1 in circle 1 with diameter Xa Xb Nu V1 V1 0 1 VN Vi d ee delayed n Zi R1 jX1 output n 11 gt 011B Z1 in circle 2 with diameter Xa Xc circle 2 inst output Schneider 63230 216 230B1 85 amp Electric PE50148 Protection Functions Mactine Cha SCC fyncheonous reactance KA EH Trarciert meactince fra s x Mamat Jetzen Netwence te B ma 7 stane m
343. r Electric All Rights Reserved This is single phase protection It enables when the Vab or Van voltage is less than the Vus set point The protection includes a definite time delay Block Diagram Vab or Van DE50768 Vu Vus Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Vas Set Point Setting range T Io mn delayed output EE pick up signal Main channels Vit Additional channels Vu 5 to 100 Vip Accuracy 1 5 or 0 005 Viip Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 Time Delay T Setting range 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 45 ms from 1 1 Vus to 0 9 Virs Overshoot time lt 35 ms from 1 1 to 0 9 Viis Reset time lt 35 ms from 0 9 to 1 1 Vis Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P27R x 101 m L Protection blocking P27R x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P27R x 1 Delayed output P27R x3 m L D Protection blocked P27R_x 16 m Li x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider Gf Electric 63230 216 230B1 T5 Protection Functions Generator protection against insulation faults This function should be combined with 59N or 51N to ensure 100 stator ground fault protection 64G Description This f
344. r IDMT Customized Definite time Block Diagram DE50782 la l a pick up signal and to zero selective interlocking T 0 Ib l b 1 ls delayed Ic l c SS Confirmation optional Schneider 63230 216 230B1 123 amp Electric Protection Functions Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Tripping Curve Setting range Is Set Point Setting range Main channels I Additional channels l See previous page Definite time 0 05 In lt Is lt 24 IN expressed in amperes IDMT 0 05 In lt Is lt 2 4 IN expressed in amperes Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 IN Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Drop out pick up ratio 93 596 5 or gt 1 0 015 IN Is x 100 Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Is Setting range Definite time Inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS 2 Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Advanced Settings Confirmation Setting range Timer Hold T1 Setting range By undervoltage unit 1 By negative sequence overvoltage unit 1 None no confirmation Definite time 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20s Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is confirmed instantaneous typically
345. r Van Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Vs1 Set Point Setting range V1 lt 0 1 Mu Vab gt 0 8 Vi pick up signal delayed output rotation message Main channels VL Additional channels Nu 15 Vii p to 60 Vip Accuracy 1 2 or 30 005 ViLp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 Time Delay T Setting range 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms from1 1 Vsd to 0 9 Vsd Overshoot time lt 40 ms from1 1 Vs1 to 0 9 Vs1 Reset time lt 50 ms from 0 9 Vs1 to 1 1 Vs1 Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P27D_x_101 m D Protection blocking P27D x 113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P27D x 1 n n Delayed output P27D x3 am D D Protection blocked P27Dx 16 m D x unit number 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Remnant Undervoltage ANSI Code 27R Detecting the remnant voltage sustainedby Description This protection ensures that the remnant voltage sustained by rotating machines has been cleared before allowing the bus supplying the machines to be re energized This is to avoid electrical and mechanical transients rotating machines 2007 Schneide
346. r in service Sending of a de excitation command The recloser is in service Generator application Reclosing successful The recloser has successfuly reclosed Pulse type output Permanent trip The circuit breaker is permanently open after the reclosing cycles Pulse type output Recloser ready The recloser is ready to operate Recloser step 1 Step 1 in progress Recloser step 2 Step 2 in progress Recloser step 3 Step 3 in progress Recloser step 4 Step 4 in progress Closing by recloser A closing command is given by the recloser 254 63230 216 230B1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Functions Control Matrix Logic Button Meaning Diagnosis TCS fault Trip circuit fault CCS fault Closing circuit fault TC breaker position discrepancy Discrepancy between the last state commanded by the remote monitoring and control system and the position of the circuit breaker Breaker monitoring A circuit breaker or contactor open or close command has not been executed Reverse phase rotation Reverse voltage rotation due to a wiring error Additional phase reverse rotation Reverse rotation of additional phase voltages due to a wiring error Disturbance recording blocked Disturbance recording blocked Cumulative breaking current monitoring Overshooting of the cumulative breaking
347. r to topic General Trip Curves at the end of this section Ip I x a LL 92 3 VLLN Trip Curve Timer Hold Definite time DT Definite time Standard inverse time SIT Definite time Very inverse time VIT or LTI Definite time Extremely inverse time EIT Definite time Ultra inverse time UIT Definite time RI curve Definite time EC inverse time SIT A Definite time or IDMT EC very inverse time VIT or LTI B Definite time or IDMT EC extremely inverse time EIT C Definite time or IDMT EEE moderately inverse IEC D Definite time or IDMT EEE very inverse IEC E Definite time or IDMT EEE extremely inverse IEC F Definite time or IDMT AC inverse Definite time or IDMT AC very inverse Definite time or IDMT AC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT Customized Definite time Block Diagram z Vab Ig Vbc Vac P la l a T 0 Ib b 1 gt 1 SE Ic l c pick up signal Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Voltage Restrained Overcurrent ANSI Code 50V 51V Characteristics Settings Measurement Origin Setting range Tripping Curve Setting range Is Set Point Main channels I Additional channels l See previous page Setting range Definite time 0 5 IN lt Is lt
348. ral operation NO On Van only Voltage Mode Phase to phase operation On Vab only NO Setting range 1 With or without Vr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Tripping Curve Setting range Vits or Vins Set Point Setting range delayed output Vab or Van delayed output Vbc or Vbn delayed output Vca or Ven delayed output pick up signal phase a fault phase b fault phase c fault instantaneous output Vab or Van instantaneous output Vbc or Vbn instantaneous output Vca or Vcn Main channels Vit Additional channels Wu Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Definite IDMT 5 of Vu p or Vinp to 100 of Vui p or Vinp Accuracy 1 2 or 30 005 Vup Resolution 196 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 Time Delay T Tripping Time for Zero Voltage Setting range 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution Characteristic Times Operation time 10 ms or 1 digit Pick up lt 40 ms from 1 1 Vits Vins to 0 9 Viis Vins typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms from 1 1 Vus Vins to 0 9 Vus Vins Reset time lt 50 ms from 0 9 Vus Vins to 1 1 Vus Vins Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P27 x 101 m Protection blocking P27 x 113 m Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P2
349. rating Assistance Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 1 D oo 100 for phase l Remaining operating time before overload tripping 0 to 999 min 1 min Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 min 1 min Running hours counter operating time 0 to 65535 hours 1 or 0 5h oo Starting current 1 2 Ib to 40 IN 5 D Starting time 0 to 300s 300 ms D Number of starts before blocking 0 to 60 Start block time 0 to 360 min 1 min Differential current 0 015 to 40 IN 1 Through current 0 015 to 40 IN 1 Phase displacement 0a 0b 6c between and I 0 to 359 x2 Apparent impedance Z1 Zab Zbc Zac 0 to 200 kQ 5 96 Third harmonic neutral point voltage VntH3 0 2 to 30 of Vip 1 Third harmonic residual voltage VrH3 0 2 to 90 of Vip 1 Capacitance 0 to 30 F xb Capacitor unbalance current 0 02 to 40 PN 5 Switchgear Diagnosis Assistance Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA 10 oo Number of operations 0 to 4 x 109 oo Operating time 20 to 100s 1 ms oo Charging time 1to20s 0 5 s oo Number of rackouts 0 to 65535 oo m available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o o saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage even without battery o saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy See details on subsequent pages 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 2
350. ration Assistance Differential Current Through Current Differential Current Operation The differential current Id is calculated to facilitate the implementation of the ANSI 87T and ANSI 87M differential protection functions m fora rotating machine ANSI 87M it is calculated for each phase by gt gt gt Pal P r m when a transformer is used ANSI 87T the Id calculation takes into account the vector shift and transformation ratio p eL li d lire l ree The Id value is expressed with respect to IN1 the rated current of the main channels Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display by using the icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loade m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 015 to 40 IN Units A or kA Resolution 0 1A Accuracy 1 5 96 Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 At In under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Through Current Operation The through current It is calculated to facilitate the implementation of the ANSI 87T and ANSI 87M differential protection functions m fora rotating machine ANSI 87M it is calculated for each phase by R o 2 r r 2 m when a transformer is used ANSI 87T the It calculation takes into account the vector shift and transformation ratio i max irec l rec The It value is expressed with respect to In1 the rated current
351. rce is long In this example if the fault clearing time for the protection unit furthest downstream is Xs 0 2 s the fault clearing time at the source is T Xs 0 9 s 1 1 s l T Xs 0 10 r N O o T Xs NO NO ra Essen Xs NO p No NO HOI wl BSIG o NO No v Example radial distribution with use of zone selective interlocking T protection setting time As an approximation for definite time curves this is assumed to be equal to the protection tripping time When a fault appears the protection units that detect it block the upstream protection units The protection unit furthest downstream trips since it is not blocked by another protection unit The delays are to be set in accordance with the device to be protected In this example if the fault clearing time for the protection device furthest downstream is Xs 0 2 s the fault clearing time at the source is T Xs 0 1 s 0 1 s 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50810 Schneider Electric Zone Selective Interlocking Principle Operation This function significantly reduces the tripping time of the circuit breakers closest to the source It can be used for zone selective interlocking ZSI in closed ring networks It appli
352. ree Opposite side closed D D D D D D D D Free Selector set to Manual ANSI 43 D D D D D D D D L Li Free Selector set to Auto ANSI 43 D D D D D Li Li D Free Selector set to Circuit breaker ANSI 10 D D D D D D D L D D Free Selector set to Tie Breaker ANSI 10 a D w D L Free Opposite side circuit breaker disconnected m D D D D D L Ci D Free Tie Breaker circuit disconnected D D D D D Free Tie Breaker close command D D D D D D Free Opposite side voltage OK D D D D D D D D a D Free Block closing of tie breaker D D D D D a D D Free Automatic closing command D D D 5 a D D Free External closing command 1 D Free External closing command 2 D D Free Additional phase voltage transformer fuse D Free blown Additional Vr voltage transformer fuse blown Free Scbneider 185 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 Control and Monitoring Functions Logic Input Output Assignment Assignment Table of Logic Inputs by Application Capacitor step 1 open D Free Capacitor step 1 closed D Free Capacitor step 2 open D Free Capacitor step 2 closed Free Capacitor step 3 open Free Capacitor step 3 closed D Free Capacitor step 4 open Free Capacitor step 4 closed D Free Step 1 opening command D Free Step 2 opening command Free Step 3 opening command D Fre
353. requency protection units are set to fn 0 5Hz and the low set point of the rate of change of frequency is T the high set point may be set to 0 5 T High Set Point Delay Setting No particular recommendantions Setting recommendations when no other information is available Generator Power 2to 10 MVA gt 10 MVA Settings Low set point dfs dt 0 5 Hz s 0 2 Hz s i 500 ms 500 ms High set point dfs dt 2 5 Hz s 1 Hz s T 150 ms 150 ms 158 63230 216 230B1 EE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Rate of Change of Frequency df dt ANSI Code 81R Operating Precautions When the generator connects to the network power oscillations may occur until the generator becomes fully synchronized The df dt protection function senses this phenomenon so it is advisable to block the protection unit for a few seconds after circuit breaker closing Load Shedding Application The df dt protection function may also be used for load shedding in combination with underfrequency protection In such cases it is used on the installation bus Only negative frequency derivatives are to be used Two principles are available m Acceleration of load shedding The rate of change of frequency protection functions controls load shedding It acts faster than underfrequency protection functions and the value measured df dt is directly proportional to the load to be shed m Load shedding block This principle is in
354. riables are maintained constantly at 1 after being initially set They are reset to 0 when Sepam is reset reset button external input or remote control command The LATCH function accepts as many parameters as the number of variables that the user wishes to latch It applies to the entire program whatever the position of LATCH in the program For easier reading it is advisable to put it atthe beginning of the program LATCH V1 VL2 VV3 V1 VL2 and VV3 are latched Once they are set to 1 only a Sepam reset can set them back to 0 m x TON y t on delay timer The variable x goes to 1 t ms after variable y goes to 1 V1 TON 1102 2000 used to filter input 1102 which must be present for 2 s to be taken into account in V1 m x TOF y t off delay timer The variable x goes to 0 t ms after variable y goes to 0 VL2 TOF VL1 100 VL2 stays at 1 for 100 ms after VL1 goes back to 0 m x PULSE s i n time tagger Used to generate n periodic pulses separated by an interval i as of the starting time s s is expressed in hours minutes seconds i is expressed in hours minutes seconds nis a whole number n 1 repeated until the end of the day V1 PULSE 8 30 00 1 0 0 4 will generate 4 pulses at 1 hour intervals at 8 h 30 9h 30 10 h 30 and 11 h 30 This will be repeated every 24 hours The pulses last for a 14 ms cycle V1 is assigned the value of 1 during the cycle If necessary V1 may be extended using the
355. ring the fundamental component Four types of residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and CTs connected m two residual currents Ir and l rZ which are calculated by the vectoral sum of the three phase currents m two measured residual currents Ir and l r Different types of CTs can be used to measure residual current m CSH120 or CSH200 specific zero sequence CT m conventional 1A or 5A current transformer m any zero sequence CT with an ACE990 interface Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m aSepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range IE or l E 0 005 to 40 IN Ir or l r measured by CSH zero sequence CT Rating Inr 2A 0 005 to 20 Inr D INr 20 A 0 005 to 20 Inr D Ir or l r measured by zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 005 to 20 Inr 1 Ir or l r measured by CT 0 005 to 20 Inr D Units A or kA Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Accuracy 2 1 typical at InO 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 Inr 5 from 0 1 to 0 3 Inr Display format 3 significant digits Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 In Inr nominal rating set in the general settings 2 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 excluding CT accuracy 18 63230 216 230B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Metering Functions
356. rmally closed When motors are connected to the bus it is necessary to check for remnant voltage on the bus using the remnant undervoltage function ANSI 27R Mandatory Transfer Conditions These conditions are always required to enable transfer m the incoming circuit breaker is closed m according to the tie setup D the opposite side circuit breaker is closed and the tie circuit breaker is open when the tie is normally open D orthe opposite side circuit breaker is open and the tie circuit breaker is closed when tie breaker is normally closed m no phase to phase fault detected by the main on the bus or downstream m no phase to ground fault detected by the main on the bus or downstream m voltage OK on the opposite main Optional Transfer Conditions These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled m the Auto Manual selector is in the Auto position m thethree Local Remote selectors are in the Remote position m the three circuit breakers are racked in m no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function ANSI 60FL to avoid transfer on the loss of voltage transformers m no blocking transfer by V TRANS STOP by logic equations or by Logipam Initializing Transfer Any of the following events can trigger automatic transfer m loss of voltage detected on the main by the Phase undervoltage function ANSI 27 m orthe detection of a fault by the protection units upstream of the main with a tripping command
357. rotection Button Description Use 59 1 Delayed output of the Phase Indication for the opposite side overvoltage function ANSI 59 Sepam the voltage is OK Unit 1 upstream of the incoming circuit breaker Logic Button Description Use NO circuit breaker closing Predefined output Automatic closing command of V_CLOSE_NO_ORD opposite side circuit breaker of the AT function Breaker closing ready Predefined output LED indication V_CLOSE_EN the return to normal conditions of the AT function are met neglecting the sync check Schneider 63230 216 230B1 237 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Automatic Transfer Main Main Functions Characteristics Setting Activity Setting range On Off Voltage Return Time Setting range 0 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 msec to 25 msec Resolution 10 msec or 1 digit Normal Tie Breaker Position Setting range No tie Normally open Normally closed Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Transfer command on fault V TRANS ON FLT m Transfer off command V_TRANS_STOP D D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Automatic transfer on V_TRANSF_ON Tripping by 2 3 or 1 2 logic V_2 3_TRIPPING D D Tripping by automatic V_AT_TRIPPING D transfer NO circuit breaker closing V_CLOSE_NO_ORD D L Breaker closing ready V CLOSE EN Li 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 238 63230 216 230B1 gr d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectr
358. rrent measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current which factors harmonics up to the 13th level The highest current of the three phases is used to calculate for heat rise Iph max la Ib Ic The calculated heat rise proportional to the square of the current drawn depends on the current drawn and the previous temperature status Under steady state conditions it is equal to Iph E ph x100 in IB The protection function issues the trip command when the phase current is greater than the permissible current for the cable The value of the base current IB must absolutely be less than the permissible current la By default we use IB la 1 4 The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T 2 TE LY lay De Om o ton B Hot curve IN IE 7laY where IN natural logarithm m GR The present heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Cold curve where IN natural logarithm 1 Block Diagram IB 3 T a alarm and heat rise E gt 100 d outpu Iph g _ phfat L A EEEa t ELE Ea S la E 23 x 100 B tripping and indication thermal overload output inhibition logic input User Information The following information is available for the user m heat rise m time before tripping with constant current Characteristics Settings Permissible Current la Setting range lt 1 to 1 73 IB Accurac
359. rved gend 63230 216 230B1 109 ectric Protection Functions switching g thermal settings logic input DES K ph calculation of the equivalent 12 current ambient temperature 110 selection group of leq gt Is Settings Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Block Start The thermal overload protection can block the closing of the motor control device until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting This value addresses the heat rise produced by motor startup The block function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection function and the indication BLOCK START informs the user Saving the Heat Rise Information The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Blocking Tripping Tripping of the thermal overload protection can be blocked by the logic input Block thermal overload when required by the process Use of Two Operating Modes The thermal overload protection function may be used to protect equipment with two operating modes for example m transformers with two ventilation modes with or without forced ventilation ONAN ONAF m two speed motors The protection function comprises two groups of settings and each group is suitable for equipment protection in one of the two operating modes Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is done without losing the hea
360. s the protection function operates according to three different types of characteristics m type 1 the protection function uses Ir vector projection This projection method is suitable for radial feeders in resistive effectively ungrounded or compensated neutral systems designed to compensate for system capacitance using a tuned inductor in the neutral This is not common in North America m type 2 the protection function uses the Ir vector magnitude and operates like a ground fault protection function with an added direction criterion This projection method is used with closed ring distribution networks with directly grounded neutral m type 3 the protection function uses the Ir vector magnitude and complies with Italian specification ENEL DK5600 It operates like a ground fault protection function with an added angular direction criterion Lim 1 Lim 2 This protection method is suitable for distribution networks in which the neutral grounding system varies according to the operational mode Tripping direction The direction of the residual current is qualified as bus direction or line direction according to the following convention bus direction Y line direction DE51557 NO The tripping zone is set for tripping in the bus zone or in the line zone The reverse zone is the zone for which the protection function does not trip The detection of current in the reverse zone is used for indication 140 63230 216 230B1 gr d 20
361. s a definite time delay DE50529 Tis I l I l 0 0 015 Is Is Block Diagram a I lt Is H DE50777 1 gt 0 015 IN Characteristics This protection function may be blocked by a logic It can be remotely reset by a remote control command delayed output pick up signal Settings Is Set Point Setting range 5 Ib to 100 IB Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 106 Time Delay T Setting range 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 50 ms Overshoot time lt 40ms Reset time lt 40ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P37 1 101 m D Protection blocking P37 1 118 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P37_1_1 a D Delayed output P37_1_3 D D D Protection blocked P37_1_16 D D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 82 63230 216 230B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE51382 DE51383 Protection Functions Check on active power flow Q Trip gt P Tripping zone normal direction Q Tripping zone reverse direction 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50824 Schneider Lp Electric Directional Active Underpower ANSI Code 37P Description This two way protection is based on mo
362. s set point 0 5 to 5 IB ST starting time 0 5 s to 300 s LT and LTS time delays 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload for Cables Admissible current 1 to 1 73 IB Time constant T1 1 to 600 min ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload for Capacitors Alarm current 1 05 IB to 1 70 IB Trip current 1 05 IB to 1 70 IB Positioning of the hot tripping curve Current setting 1 02 x trip current to 2 IB Time setting ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload for Machines Accounting for negative sequence component 1 to 2000 minutes variable range depending on the trip current and current setting Mode 1 Mode 2 0 2 25 4 5 9 Time constant Heating T1 1t0 600 min T1 1 to 600 min Cooling T2 5 to 600 min T2 5 to 600 min Alarm and tripping set points Es1 and Es2 0 to 300 of rated thermal capacity Initial thermal capacity used EsO 0 to 100 Switching of thermal settings condition by logic input by Is set point adjustable from 0 25 to 8 IB Maximum equipment temperature 140 F to 392 F 60 to 200 C Measurement origin ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Presence of current Main channels I or additional channels l 0 2 to 2 IN Operating time 0 05sto3s ANSI 50 27 Inadvertent Energization Is set point 0 05 to 4 IN Vs set point 10 to 100 Vip T1 0to10s T2 0to10s ANSI 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping
363. s signal is of the pulse type at the recloser output If required by operating conditions it may be latched as follows LATCH V1 V1 may be latched V1 P79 1 204 recloser permanent trip output V1 may then control a LED or output relay in the matrix 2 Latching an LED without latching the protection function Certain operating conditions call for the latching of indications on the front panel of Sepam without latching of the tripping output O1 LATCH V1 V2 V1 and V2 may be latched V1 P50 51 1 1 OR P50 51 3 1 tripping units 1 and 3 of protection 50 51 V2 P50 51 2 1 OR P50 51 4 1 tripping units 2 and 4 of protection 50 51 V1 and V2 must be configured in the matrix to control 2 front panel LEDs 3 Circuit breaker tripping if input 1113 is present for more than 300 ms V TRIPCB TON 1113 300 4 Live line work example 1 If work is underway with power on indicated by input 1205 the relay behavior is to be changed as follows a circuit breaker tripping by the instantaneous output of protection 50 51 unit 1 or 50N 51N unit 1 AND if input 1205 is present V TRIPCB P50 51 1 1 OR P50N 51N 1 1 AND 1205 b Block recloser P79 1 113 1205 5 Live line work example 2 The user wishes to block protection functions 50N 51N and 46 by an input 1204 P50N 51N 1 113 1204 P46 1 113 1204 6 Validation of a 50N 51N protection function by logic input 1210 50N 51N protection function with a very low threshold must o
364. sh Interval 1 second typical 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Machine Operation Assistance Capacitance Operation This operation provides the user with the total capacitance for each phase of the connected capacitor bank steps The user can then monitor the condition of the capacitors It covers wye and delta connections a parameter that is set in the Particular characteristics screen of the SFT2841 setting and operating software For this measurement the installation is considered a perfect capacitance without considering the resistances added by connecting the capacitor bank steps For capacitances measured for wye connected capacitor bank steps m Ca total capacitance phase a m Cb total capacitance phase b m Cc total capacitance phase c For capacitances measured for delta connected capacitor bank steps m Cab total capacitance between phases a and b m Cbce total capacitance between phases b and c m Cac total capacitance between phases a and c Readout The capacitance measurements can be accessed via m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 30 F Unit UF mF or F Resolution 0 1 uF Accuracy 5 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Accuracy The measurement accuracy is
365. stantaneous output Detection of downstream phase fault to block automatic transfer To be set according to coordination study the most sensitive set point Ground fault ANSI 50N 51N Unit 1 instantaneous output Detection of downstream ground fault to block automatic transfer To be set according to coordination study the most sensitive set point Phase overvoltage ANSI 59 Unit 1 Optional Protection Functions Remnant undervoltage Detection of phase voltage upstream of the circuit breaker To be assigned to a Sepam logic output in the control matrix Use Detection of no remnant Voltage set point 90 Vj Np Delay 3 sec Setting Information Voltage set point 30 Vj Np amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 ANSI 27R voltage on the bus to which the Delay 100 msec Unit 1 motors are connected Schneider 245 PE50459 Control and Monitoring Functions H 891 Sepa series 80 Som station 482 NT SFT2841 standard AT function 246 men Acc en men assignment of the inputs required for the 63230 216 230B1 Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Implementation Logic I Os screen steps Logic Input Assignment The logic inputs required for the AT function are assigned in the SFT2841 The Standard assignments button suggests an assignment of the main inputs required for the AT function The other inputs are assigned manually Logic Output Assig
366. stored in memory Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the amp icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m the communication link Tripping Current Operation This function gives the RMS value of currents at the time of the last trip m Tripla phase a current main channels Triplb phase b current main channels Triplc phase c current main channels Tripl a phase a current additional channels Tripl b phase b current additional channels Tripl c phase c current additional channels The measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1 It is based on measuring the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display through the icon m a PC with SFT2841 software loaded m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 1 to 40 IN Units A or kA Resolution 01A Accuracy x5 1 digit Display Format 3 significant digits 1 In rated current set in the general settings Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Network Diagnosis Number of Phase Fault Trips Number of Ground Fault Trips Number of Phase Fault Trips Operation This function counts the network phase faults that cause circuit breaker tripping It
367. sured neutral zero sequence or ground fault tank ground leakage protection current m the protection function has a definite or IDMT time delay m each ofthe eight units has two groups of settings Switching to setting group A or B can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control command depending on the settings m The protection function includes settable second harmonic restraint which provides greater stability when transformers are energized m the customized curve defined point by point may be used with this protection function m an adjustable timer hold definite or IDMT can be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults m each unit can be independently set to one of the two measurement channels Ir or l r or to the sum of the phase currents on the main or additional channels By mixing the possibilities on the different units it is possible to have H different dynamic set points D different applications like zero sequence and tank ground leakage protection m SetIDMT Trip Curves by Time delay T at I Iset 10 or TMS Factor like Time Dial Setting refer to topic General Trip Curves at the end of this section Tripping Curve Timer Hold Curve Definite time DT Definite time Standard inverse time SIT Definite time Very inverse time VIT or LTI Definite time Extremely inverse time EIT Definite time Ultra invers
368. t Imax Ib 1 1 The thermal overload parameters are determined as in the previous example Setting the Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax IB 120 Setting the Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 I IB 0 95 The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after 100 seconds point 1 With t T1 0 069 I IB 2 and Es2 120 gt T1 100 sec 0 069 1449 sec 24 min The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to UT1 0 3567 gt t 24 min x 0 3567 513 sec point 2 This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 sec point 2 If the time constant T1 is lowered the thermal overload protection will trip earlier below point 2 The risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with Vit 0 9 Vit The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve In this example the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 sec starting from the cold state The following equation is used to obtain the EsO value 2 necessary 2 EsO lprocessed e T x lprocessed Es2 lg B where t necessary tripping time necessary starting from a cold state I processed equipment current 1 When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1
369. t 0 Selector on Breaker Main 2 Selector on tie breaker o gt 0 Selector on Tie Breaker Tie breaker rem ctrl blocked local 14 i Foe o9 Tie breaker rem ctrl blocked local O Coupling close ready Tie breaker close ready Coupling close order 0 1 A 0 Tie breaker close command Opposite side remote controlo Hp 4H gt 0 Remote control blocked local blocked local Breaker close ready 0 Close command Remote control blocked local gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 79 Opposite side remote control O Breaker close ready blocked local Close command wegl o NO breaker close l Opposite side breaker closed 0 gt Breaker closed l Opposite side breaker open Q lt Breaker open l Opposite side breaker racked out 4 0 Breaker racked out Trip Selector on tie breaker Close NO breaker close Breaker closed o 0 Opposite side breaker closed l Breaker open o gt 0 Opposite side breaker open I Breaker racked out 0 1 H 0 Opposite side breaker racked out o Trip o 4 l l o Close o I Tie breaker close blocked l Tie breaker close blocked closed o oTie breaker closed ie breaker open vg T gt Tie breaker open I Tie breaker rackedouto Er FE ferma eot n 1 7 Tie breaker racked out
370. t 10 Is B basic tripping curve value at DE50754 Constant timer hold Customized Tripping Curve Defined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool application menu this curve may be used to solve all special cases involving protection coordination or installation renovation It offers between 2 and 30 points whose coordinates must be m increasing on the I Is axis m decreasing on the t axis The two end points define the curve asymptotes There must be at least one point on the horizontal coordinate 10 I Is to serve as a reference point to set the function time delay by curve shifting Schneider 63230 216 230B1 175 amp Electric Protection Functions Implementing IDMT curves examples of problems to be solved Problem 1 Given the type of IDMT determine the Is current and time delay T settings Theoretically the Is current setting corresponds to the maximum continuous current It is generally the rated current ofthe protected equipment cable transformer The time delay T corresponds to operation at 10 Is on the curve This setting is determined by factoring the constraints involved in discrimination with the upstream and downstream protection devices The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve IA tA like the point that corresponds to the maximum fault current for the downstream protection device 176 63230 216 230B1 Sc
371. t T2 m maximum steady state current m Imax IB 1 05 Setting the Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax IB 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 1 18 0 95 The manufacturer s hot cold curves 1 may be used to determine the heating time constant T1 The method consists of placing the Sepam hot cold curves below those of the motor Figure 1 Motor thermal withstand and thermal overload tripping curves A motor cold curve d Sepam cold curve 665 motor hot curve Sepam hot curve 70 time before tripping s gt VIb 112 63230 216 230B1 Schneider Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples For an overload of 2 IB the value t T1 0 0339 2 In order for Sepam to trip at point 1 t 70 s T1 is equal to 2065 sec 34 min With a setting of T1 34 min the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state point 2 Here it is equal to t T1 0 3216 gt t 665 sec that is 11 minutes which is compatible with the motor thermal withstand when it is cold The negative sequence factor K is calculated using the equation defined on page 109 The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set They are not considered by default Example 3 Motor The following data are available m motor thermal withstand in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 2 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state curren
372. t detected by the main on the bus or downstream W voltage present on the opposite main Optional Transfer Conditions These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled m the Auto Manual selector is in the Auto position m thetwo Local Remote selectors are in the Remote position m thetwo incoming circuit breakers are racked in m no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function ANSI 60FL to avoid transfer on the loss of voltage transformers m no block of transfer by V TRANS STOP by logic equations or by Logipam Initializing Transfer Any of the events below can trigger automatic transfer W loss of voltage detected on the main by the Phase undervoltage function ANSI 27 W detection of a fault by the protection units upstream of the main with intertripping command on the External tripping 1 logic input m V_TRANS_ON_FLT initialization of transfer by logic equations or by Logipam 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 231 amp Electric DE51584 Control and Monitoring Functions Necessary Conditions for Transfer ANSI 50 51 phase overcurrent unit 1 inst ANSI 50N 51N earth fault unit 1 inst V_TRANS_STOP ANSI 27 phase undervoltage unit 1 inst Remote control blocked local Opposite side remote control blocked local Breaker racked out Opposite side breaker racked out Breaker closed Opposite side voltage OK ANSI 60FL VT fault Se
373. t point Setting 0 to 65535 kA Resolution 1 kA 2 Accuracy 1 10 1 digit Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Cumulative breaking current V_MAXBRKCUR D D threshold overrun 1 At IN under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Number of Operations Operation The function also gives the total number of breaking device operations It is activated by tripping the 01 contact The number of operations is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure It may be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with the SFT2841 software m communication link Characteristics Range 0 to 4 10 Units None Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric MeteringFunctions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switchgear Diagnosis Operating Time Charging Time Operating Time Operation This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device 1 and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the 1102 input 2 The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed by one of the following m aSepam display through the amp icon m aPC with SFT2841 software m communication link 1 Refer to the vendor provided documenta
374. t rise information It is controlled m either via a logic input assigned to the switching of thermal settings function m or when the phase current reaches an adjustable Is set point to be used for switching of thermal settings of a motor with locked rotor The base current of the equipment used to calculate heat rise also depends on the operating mode m for logic input switching in mode 2 the base current IB mode 2 a specific thermal overload protection setting is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment m inall other cases the base current IB defined as a general Sepam parameter is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment User Information The following information is available for the user m heat rise m learned cooling time constant T2 m time before restart enabled in case of blocking starting m time before tripping with constant current See the section on measurement and machine operation assistance functions Block Diagram Es1 Es2 63230 216 230B1 heat rise E gt Es1 4 alarm amp indication 2 leq At E Ep JS E max E gt Es2 thermal trip amp indication correction by overload ambient inhibition temperature logic input block closing Block Start amp indication Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Characteristics Thermal Overload for Machines Code ANSI
375. t tripping or opening after circuit breaker opening Capacitor Step Opening Any opening of a capacitor step whether voluntary or by tripping activates a discharge time delay which blocks closing to ensure that the step capacitors discharge correctly m voluntary open manual or automatic capacitor step switch control command m trip triggered by o ANSI 51C unbalance protection units associated with the capacitor step and configured to trip the step 13 n Tripping of step x logic input one input per capacitor step 12 D logic equation or Logipam 13 Latched trip commands block capacitor step closing until the commands are reset 14 Open commands must be at least as long as the duration of open and close control pulses Capacitor Step Closing 15 Close commands are always voluntary for manual and automatic control They are as long as the duration of open and close control pulses Capacitor step switches only close after the capacitor step discharge time delay has run out and after the circuit breaker has closed if there is no protection fault or blocking Capacitor Step Switch Matching Fault 16 This function checks for capacitor step switch positions matching when the positions are set up on logic inputs Ix In the event of a capacitor step switch matching fault the switch close command is blocked Schneider 63230 216 230B1 203 amp Electric DE52277
376. tart y Ci Restart order 1 Example 2 Voltage Dip without Restart Command vi 8 27D unit 2 i threshold 27D unit 1 threshold T l l t I l l l Load shedding order Circuit breaker E circuit breaker tripping position uu SE I 27D unit 1 lt delay e l 27D unit 1 1 delayed i 27D unit 2 i pickup 27D unit 2 delayed 1 A T B l E ER D Cc Le Max dip x duration T l D 1 l E Restart order 224 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE50636 Control and Monitoring Functions Operation This function controls the following m shutdown of the driving machine m tripping of the breaking device m interruption of the generator excitation supply in case of H detection of an internal generator fault H receipt of a genset shutdown command on a logic input or via the communication link ao E 0 Generator shutdown and tripping involve CDtripping of the circuit breaker connecting the machine to the network tripping of the excitation circuit breaker shutdown of the prime mover The combination of these three commands determines four types of shutdown and tripping commands m total shutdown simultaneous tripping W generator tripping m generator separation m sequential tripping Total Shutdown This type of control function gives the following commands simultaneously
377. tation is made by the motor or generator shaft two cams 180 apart pass a proximity sensor Each cam generates a pulse that is transmitted by the sensor The time between the two pulses determines the frequency or rotation speed of the motor or generator The number of pulses per rotation is set in the particular characteristics screen of the SFT2841 software The proximity sensor is connected to logic input 1104 1 2 MES120 Ti 1 Rotor with two cams 2 Proximity sensor Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Range 0 to 7200 rpm Resolution 1 rpm Accuracy 1 rpm Refresh Interval 1 second typical Pulses per Rotation R 1 to 1800 with On R 60 lt 1500 Qn rated speed in rpm Proximity Sensor Pass band in Hz gt 2 0N R 60 Output 24 to 250 V DC 3 mA minimum Leakage current lt 0 5 mA in open status Voltage dip in closed status lt 4 V with 24 V DC power supply Pulse duration 0 status gt 120 us 1 status gt 200 us 32 63230 216 230B1 gr d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric PE50453 Metering Functions Phasor Diagram Operation The phasor diagram displays a vectoral picture of the fundamental component of the raw current and voltage measurements acquired by Sepam This enables the user to check
378. tected by comparing the sign of the instantaneous power with that of the power 14 ms before Pp If the signs are different a swing is counted The trip command is issued if the number of 360 displacements measured is equal to the set number A time delay may be used to set a maximum time between two swings This makes the function insensitive to low frequency power oscillations Power Swing Criterion Block Diagram Pr P gt 0 g A e re N N 1 H n 2nt gt tripping p P 0 output SCH AL reset 0 T time between two pang 360 displacements Current Transformers Current transformers should be defined by a knee point voltage Vk 2 Rot Rw 20 INS where Rcr CT internal resistance Rw wiring resistance CT rated secondary current Characteristics Settings Tripping Type Selection Setting range Equal area criterion Power swing criterion Equal area criterion and power swing criterion Equal Area Criterion Time Delay Setting range 100 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Number of 360 Displacements Setting range 1 lt number of 360 displacements lt 30 Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 360 displacement Maximum Time Between Two 360 Displacements Setting range 1s lt T lt 300s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 1 s or 1 digit Characteristic Times O
379. tection P67N_x_101 m L Block protection P67N x 113 m L Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P67N_x_1 Delayed output P67N x3 m L D Drop out P67N_x 4 m Li Instantaneous output reverse zone P67N_ x 6 m D Protection blocked P67N_x_16 m L Instantaneous output at 0 8 IsO P67N_x 21 m Li 1 Tripping zone Lim 2 Lim 1 should be 10 or more 2 For Isr 0 the protection function behaves like a neutral voltage displacement protection function 59N 3 INr k n where n the zero sequence CT ratio and k coefficient to be determined according to the wiring of the ACE990 0 00578 lt k x 0 04 Standard Tripping Zone Setting Line End The settings below are given for the usual applications in different types of neutral grounding system The shaded boxes represent default settings Lim 1 angle 190 100 100 Lim 2 angle 350 280 280 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Protecting synchronous generators and motors against loss of synchronism 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50857 Pole Slip ANSI Code 78PS Description This function provides protection against synchronization loss on synchronous machines It is based on calculated active power The function is composed of two independent protection modules based on m the equal area criterion m the power swing criterion The tripp
380. tection based on calculated active power m Vab Vbc with Vr and la Ib Ic three wattmeters for the following applications m Vab Vbc with Vr and la Ic two wattmeters W active overpower protection to detect overloads m Vab Vbc without Vr two wattmeters and allow load shedding m other cases protection function unavailable W reverse active power protection The function is enabled only if the following condition is met O against generators running like motors when P28 1 Q the generators draw active power This provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits D against motors running like generators when The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or main parameter the motors supply active power according to the convention For the feeder circuit m power supplied by the bus is positive iiw m power supplied to the bus is negative direction For the Main circuit m power supplied to the bus is positive e flow reverse power overpower 7 A 5 A lt m power supplied by the busses is negative B direction Block Diagram overpower reverse power 8 gt P gt Ps a T 0 delayed P lt Ps direction pick up signal Operating zone Characteristics Settings Tripping Direction Setting range Overpower reverse power Ps Set Point Setting range 1 of Sn to 120 of Sn Accuracy 1 0 3 Sn for Ps between 1 Sn and 5 Sn 5 for Ps between 5 Sn and 40 Sn 3 for Ps betwee
381. teps gt 1 and capacitor step ratio are set in the particular characteristics the thermal overload protection function takes into account the participation of each step in the calculation of heat rise The rated current of step x IBgx is equal to the fraction of current that the step represents in relation to the rated current of the capacitor bank IB IBgx U ip n X Kgx xz1 where IB is the rated current of the capacitor bank x is the step number nis the total number of steps between 2 and 4 Kgx is the capacitor step ratio value of step x The rated current of the sequence of steps IBseq is calculated It is the sum of the rated currents IBgx of the steps closed during the sequence n IBseq K p x IBgx x 1 where x is the step number n is the total number of steps between 2 and 4 p x is the position of the step x m p x 1 when the step switch x is closed m p x 0 when the step switch x is open The heat rise is proportional to the square of the current in relation to the rated current of the sequence Under steady state conditions it is equal to _ _Iph_ 2 E need x100 asa If the closed positions of the steps are not acquired or if the number of steps set in the particular characteristics is 1 the rated current of the sequences is equal to the rated current of the capacitor bank In such cases the heat rise is proportional to the drawn current in relation to the rated current of the capacitor ba
382. the value of the main positive sequence voltage V1 m from the three main phase to neutral voltages gt 1 gt gt 22 a phase rotation direction a b c V1 3 Van aVbn a Ven i 8 gt 1 gt 22 gt D phase rotation direction a c b V1 3 Van a Vbn aVcn m from the two main phase to phase voltages gt e 20 D phase rotation direction a b c V1 3 Vab a Vbc gt 1 2 E o phase rotation direction a c b V1 3 x Vab aVbc 2T I with x e The additional positive sequence voltage V 1 is calculated the same way m from the three additional phase to neutral voltages V an V bn and V cn m from the two additional phase to phase voltages V ab and V bc Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 05 to 1 2 V p 1 Units Vor kV Resolution 1V Accuracy 2 at Vip Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 V p primary rated phase to neutral voltage V p V p V3 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 amp Electric 23 Metering Functions Negative Sequence Voltage Operation This function calculates the value of the main negative sequence voltage Vi m from the three main phase to neutral voltages 2 1 2 20 gt D phase rotation direction a b c V2 3 Van a Vbn aVcn 7 2 1 2 2 22 o phase rotation
383. thermal alarm set point 12 Group 1 thermal tripping set point 13 Group 1 heating time constant min 14 Group 1 cooling time constant min 15 Group 1 initial heat rise 16 Group 2 thermal alarm set point 17 Group 2 thermal tripping set point 18 Group 2 heating time constant min 9 Group 2 cooling time constant min 20 Group 2 initial heat rise 21 Group 2 base current for group 2 0 1A 22 Current threshold 0 1A 23 Associated time constant min Nota parameters 1 to 21 concern the machine thermal overload the common protection settings and parameters 22 and 23 concern the cable thermal overload ANSI 50 27 Inadvertent Energization Function number 7301 Setting Data Format Unit 1t03 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Is set point 0 1A 6 Vs set point Vip 7 T1 time 10 ms 8 T2 time 10 ms 9 Use of breaker position inputs 0 no 1 yes ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Function number 9801 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Common settings 2 Reserved 3 Common settings 4 Reserved 5 Use of breaker closed input 0 no 1 yes 6 Is set point 0 1 A 7 Time 10 ms Schneider 63230 216 230B1 267 amp Electric Appendix Function Settings Protection Settings ANSI 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Function number 01xx Unit 1 xx 01 to unit 8 xx 08 Setting Data Format Unit 1to 4 Common settings 5 Confir
384. thout forced ventilation ONAN mode the main operating mode of the transformer IB 240 A with forced ventilation ONAF mode atemporary operating mode to have 20 more power available Setting the base current for ventilation operating mode 1 IB 200 A to be set in the Sepam general parameters Setting the base current for ventilation operating mode 2 IB2 240 A to be set among the specific thermal overload protection settings Switching thermal settings by the logic input to be assigned to switching thermal settings function and to be connected to the transformer ventilation control unit Settings related to each ventilation operating mode Es set points time constants etc are determined according to transformer characteristics provided by the manufacturer Schneider 63230 216 230B1 113 amp Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload for Machines ANSI Code 49RMS Trip Curves Cold Curves for Es0 0 VIB 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 50 0 6931 0 6042 0 5331 0 4749 0 4265 0 3857 0 3508 0 3207 0 2945 0 2716 0 2513 0 2333 0 2173 0 2029 0 1900 0 1782 0 1676 55 0 7985 0 6909 0 6061 0 5376 0 4812 0 4339 0 3937 0 3592 0 3294 0 3033 0 2803 0 2600 0 2419 0 2257 0 2111 0 1980 0 1860 60 0 9163 0 7857 0 6849 0 6046 0 5390 0 4845 0 4386 0 3993 0 3655 0 3360 0 3102 0 2873 0 2
385. time period T It is not applied to the high set point Restraint of Ita Itb Max Ita Itb Itc gt Isinr i BUI 0 T percentage based WE characteristic on Restraint on closing closing P87T 4 118 Ad Restraint on CT Loss CT loss can distort the differential current and cause nuisance tripping This restraint detects a measurement dropping to zero abnormally by analyzing sampled differential and through currents Sizing Phase Current Transformers IN Rw The primary rated current of the current transformers is governed by the following iN rule RCT m for winding 1 0 1 x e ylNy2 5x VLLn1 x3 VLLn1 x3 m for winding 2 0 1 x on ylNy2 5x o VLLn2 x 3 VLLn2 x 3 s 87T where IN is the primary rated current of the CT iN is the secondary rated current of the CT Rct is the internal resistance of the CT Rw is the resistance of the wiring and the CT load 63230 216 230B1 gr d 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Transformer Differential ANSI Code 87T Characteristics Settings Low Set Point Ids Setting range 30 to 100 of INT Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Percentage Based Characteristic Id It Setting range 15 to 50 Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Percentage Based Characteristic Id It2 Set
386. ting range None 50 to 100 Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Slope Change Point Setting range None IN1 to 18 IN1 Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 0 1 Ina Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Test Mode Setting range Advanced Settings Selection of restraint Restraint on CT Loss Setting range Restraint on Closing Setting range Active Not active Conventional Self adaptive Active Not active Active Not active Magnetization Setting range 1 to 10 current set point Accuracy 1 5 Isinr Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 90 5 or 0 5 IN1 Time delay Setting range 0 to 300s Accuracy 1 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms High Set Point Idmax Setting range Conventional restraint 3 to 18 IN1 Self adaptive restraint None 3 to 18 IN1 Accuracy 1 2 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Second Harmonic Set Point for Conventional Restraint Setting range None 5 to 40 Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 90 5 Second Harmonic Restraint for Conventional Restraint Setting range Phase specific Global Fifth Harmonic Set Point for Conventional Restraint Setting range None 5 to 40 Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 90 5 Fifth Harmonic Restraint for Conventional Restraint Setting range Characteristic Times Phase specific Global
387. ting range 200 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times 1 Operation time pick up lt 35 ms from infinite to Zs 2 typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P21B_1_101 m D Protection blocking P21B_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Instantaneous output pick up P21B_1_1 Delayed output P21B_1 3 m D D Protection blocked P21B 1 16 m D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Protection Setting Calculate the rated generator impedance to set the protection function m B S V3 VuN1 289A m ZN Vunt V31B 12 59 Q The tripping parameter is typically set to 30 of the rated generator impedance Zs 0 30 x ZN 3 77 Q This protection function is used to back up other protection functions Its setting must ensure discrimination with the other protection functions T 0 9 s for example for a network where faults are cleared in 0 6 s Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Protection of magnetic circuits in transformers and generators 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE51541 Overexcitation V Hz ANSI Code 24 Description This protection monitors the overexcitation of transformer or generator magnetic circuits by calcula
388. ting the ratio between the greatest phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage divided by the frequency Overexcitation of magnetic circuits is caused by machine operation with excessive voltage or insufficient frequency It provokes saturation of the magnetic materials and results in temperature rise In severe cases a major flux leakage can occur and seriously damage the materials around the magnetic circuit The protection function picks up when the V11 f or Vin f ratio depending on VT configuration exceeds the set point The function is delayed definite time DT or IDMT according to three curves see tripping curve equation on page 173 The typical tripping set point is 1 05 pu Block Diagram Van V Vbn Max 1 Ven XL Vab Vbc Max O G Gs x Gn T Le delayed Vca outpu fri MH pick up signal whereG Vu f or Vin f depending on VT configuration Gn Vun fn or Vinn fn depending on the voltage Gs the set point phase to neutral voltage see the table below 2 phase to phase voltage see the table below Voltage Transformer Configuration This setting adapts the function voltage measurement to the magnetic circuit tie breaker depending on the measurements made possible by Sepam wiring Voltage Used by the Protection Function VT Wiring 3V 2V L Vr 2V r 1V r Vr Nu 1V Vr 1V Pli o9 o OO dii OO OO OO Schneider 63230 216 230B1 69 amp Electric DE50718 DE50635
389. tion on the switchgear used for operating time parameter specifications 2 Optional I O module Characteristics Measurement Range 20 to 100 Units millisecond ms Resolution 1ms Accuracy 1 ms typical Display Format 3 significant digits Charging Time Operation This function gives the charge time value of the breaking device operating mechanism This value is determined by the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam logic inputs 2 The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the Sepam display via the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to the vendor provided documentation on the switchgear used for operating time parameter specifications 2 Optional 1 0 module Characteristics Measurement Range 1 to 20 Units seconds Resolution 1 second Accuracy 0 5 second Display Format 3 significant digits Schneider 63230 216 230B1 57 amp Electric Metering Functions 58 63230 216 230B1 Switchgear Diagnosis Number of Racking Out Operations Operation This function keeps a count of circuit breaker or contactor rackouts or disconnects The information can be used for breaking device maintenance The breaking device s racked out or disconnected position contacts must be wired to a logic inp
390. to normal condition 1 2 Closing the Open Circuit Breaker 1 One Main open 2 Two Mains closed 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3 Automatic Transfer Main Tie Main Operation Voluntary Return to Normal without Interruption Description The voluntary return to normal without interruption involves two separate control functions 1 closing the open circuit breaker with or without sync check The three circuit breakers are closed 2 opening the normally open circuit breaker designated by the NO circuit breaker selector These two functions may also be used to transfer the bus supply source without any interruption Mandatory Transfer Conditions These conditions are required to enable transfer m the incoming circuit breaker is open m the opposite side circuit breaker and the tie circuit breaker are closed m The voltage is OK upstream of the incoming circuit breaker This voltage is detected either by function ANSI 59 or by a processing operation in Logipam using V TRANS V EN Optional Transfer Conditions These conditions are required when the associated optional functions are enabled m the Auto Manual selector is in the Manual position m the three Local Remote selectors are in the Local position m the three circuit breakers are racked in m no VT fault detected by the VT Supervision function ANSI 60FL to avoid transfer on the loss of voltage transformers m no blocki
391. tor K is determined as follows K 2x x dt 1 where Cn Cd rated torque and starting torque d gx n IB 11 base current and starting current IB g rated slip Learning the Cooling Time Constant T2 The time constant T2 may be learned from the temperatures measured in the equipment by temperature sensors connected to the MET1482 module number 1 T2 is estimated m after a heating cooling sequence H heating period detected by ES 7096 H followed by a shutdown detected by leq 1096 of Ib m whenthe machine temperature is measured by RTDs connected to MET1482 module number 1 o RTD 1 2 or 3 assigned to motor generator stator temperature measurement o RTD 1 3 or 5 assigned to transformer temperature measurement After each new heating cooling sequence is detected a new T2 value is estimated Following estimation T2 can be used in two manners m automatically where each new calculated value updates the T2 constant used m manually by entering the value for the T2 parameter Measurement accuracy may be improved by using RTD 8 to measure the ambient temperature Because the function has two operating modes a time constant is estimated for each mode For generator transformer unit or motor transformer unit applications it is advised to connect the rotating machine RTDs to MET1482 module number 1 to take advantage of T2 learning on the rotating machine rather than on the transformer 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Rese
392. tors ANSI Code 49RMS Curves for Initial Heat Rise 100 Is 1 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 ltrip IBseq 1 05 2 5249 1 4422 1 0000 0 7585 0 6064 0 5019 0 4258 0 3679 0 3226 0 2862 0 2563 0 2313 0 2102 0 1922 0 1766 1 10 1 624 1 000 0 720 0 559 0 454 0 381 0 3257 0 2835 0 2501 0 2229 0 2004 0 1816 0 1655 0 1518 1 15 1 000 0 645 0 477 0 377 0 310 0 2621 0 2260 0 1979 0 1754 0 1570 0 1417 0 1288 0 1177 Is 1 2 IB Iph IBseq 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 ltrip IBseq 1 05 0 1630 0 1511 0 1405 0 1311 0 1020 0 0821 0 0677 0 0569 0 0486 0 0421 0 0368 0 0325 0 0289 0 0259 1 10 0 1398 0 1293 0 1201 0 1119 0 0867 0 0696 0 0573 0 0481 0 0410 0 0354 0 0310 0 0273 0 0243 0 0217 1 15 0 1082 0 0999 0 0926 0 0861 0 0664 0 0531 0 0436 0 0366 0 0312 0 0269 0 0235 0 0207 0 0184 0 0165 Is 1 3 IB Iph IBseq 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Itrip IBseq 1 05 4 1639 2 3784 1 6492 1 2509 1 0000 0 8276 0 7021 0 6068 0 5320 0 4719 0 4226 0 3815 0 3467 0 3170 0 2913 1 10 2 9020 1 7875 1 2878 1 0000 0 8123 0 6802 0 5823 0 5068 0 4470 0 3984 0 3583 0 3246 0 2959 0 2713 1 15 2 0959 1 3521 1 0000 0 7901 0 6498 0 5493 0 4737 0 4148 0 3676 0 3291 0 2970 0 2699 0 2468 1 20 1 5014 1 0000 0 7541 0 6039 0 5017 0 4274 0 3708 0 3264 0 2905 0 2610 0 2364 0 2
393. ts 1 and 2 of the directional protection functions should be alternated between line and bus Example of setting of the different Sepam relays linked to zone selective interlocking Substation 1 Sepam S82 No R11 Sepam S82 No R12 m Logic input output assignment m Logic input output assignment 1103 blocking reception 1 1103 blocking reception 1 1104 blocking reception 2 0102 blocking send 1 0102 blocking send 1 0103 blocking send 2 0103 blocking send 2 m 67 67N unit 1 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction bus tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line tripping direction bus Substation 2 Sepam S82 No R22 Sepam S82 No R21 m Logic input output assignment m Logic input output assignment 1103 blocking reception 1 1103 blocking reception 1 1104 blocking reception 2 0102 blocking send 1 0102 blocking send 1 0103 blocking send 2 0103 blocking send 2 m 67 67N unit 1 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction bus tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line tripping direction bus 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 221 amp Electric DE51607 Control and Monitoring Functions circuit breaker closed racked out circuit breaker logic input load shedding request T 27D unit 1 delayed load shedding threshold 27D unit 2 delayed voltage correct 222 63
394. ttings This is the standard operating mode m test mode the protection function controls tripping and indication outputs based on test mode settings This mode is accessed only by the SFT2841 software once it is connected and the Protection setting password entered The system returns to normal mode when the software is disconnected Note Transfer from normal mode to test mode can result in nuisance tripping if the protected transformer is energized Test mode settings s m VLLN1 IN x 3 VLLN2 IN x 3 m vector shift 0 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions High Set Point A non restrained differential current set point will ensure fast tripping in the event of significant fault currents This threshold must be set to a value higher than that of the inrush current 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DES2174 Schneider Gf Electric Transformer Differential ANSI Code 87T Percentage Based Curve The percentage based curve is made up of the following m alow set point Ids W two straight lines crossing zero and with adjustable slopes Id It and Id It2 m the slope change point The curve must be set to protect itself against current transformer measurement errors and transformation errors attributable to the tap changer Also the protection function must be immune to power shunts on auxiliary windings Win Setting zone for 1 slope change p
395. uction The Sepam range of protection relays is designed for operating machines the electrical distribution networks of industrial installations and utility substations at all levels of voltage The Sepam family includes m Sepam Series 20 m Sepam Series 40 m Sepam Series 80 to cover all needs from the simplest to the most complete Sepam Series 80 with integrated advanced UMI Presentation Sepam Series 80 Intelligent Solutions for Custom Applications Specially designed for demanding customers on large industrial sites Sepam 7 Series 80 provides proven solutions for electrical distribution and machine protection Main Characteristics The Sepam Series 80 offers these features protects closed ring networks or networks with parallel mains by means of directional protection and zone selective interlocking directional ground fault protection for impedance grounded and effectively ungrounded or compensated neutral systems designed to compensate for system capacitance using a tuned inductor in the neutral This is not common in North America complete protection of transformers and machine transformer units D stable sensitive differential protection with neural network restraint D linked to all necessary backup protection functions complete protection of motors and generators D against internal faults stable sensitive machine differential protection with starting and instrument transformer
396. umber of pulses per rotation for speed acquisition 1 to 1800 Qn x R 60 lt 1500 Zero speed set point 5 to 20 of Qn Number of capacitor steps 1to4 Connection of capacitor steps Wye Delta Capacitor step ratio Step 1 1 Step 2 1 2 Step 3 1 2 3 4 Step 4 1 2 8 4 6 8 1 In values for LPCT in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 13 Metering Functions Characteristics Metering Phase current 0 02 to 40 IN 40 5 D Residual current Calculated 0 005 to 40 IN 1 D Measured 0 005 to 20 Inn 1 D Demand current 0 02 to 40 IN 0 5 Peak demand current 0 02 to 40 IN 40 5 D Phase to phase voltage Main channels V 0 05 to 1 2 V1 p 0 5 D Additional channels V 0 05 to 1 2V4P 1 Phase to neutral voltage Main channels Van Vbn Vcn 0 05 to 1 2 V yp x0 5 LI Additional channels V an Vbn V cn 0 05 to 1 2 V yp 1 Residual voltage 0 015 to 3 V np 1 Neutral point voltage 0 015 to 3 Vntp 1 Positive sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp 2 Negative sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp x2 Frequency Main channels f 25 to 65 Hz 0 01 Hz D Additional channels f 45 to 55 Hz fn 50 Hz 0 05 Hz 55 to 65 Hz fn 60 Hz Active power total or per 0 008 Sn to 999 MW 1 D
397. unbalance 46 Thermal overload for cables 49RMS Thermal overload for machines 49RMS Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS Capacitor bank unbalance 51C Restricted ground fault 64REF Li Two winding transformer differential 87T Machine differential 87M Directional phase overcurrent 67 Directional ground fault 67N 67NC D Directional active overpower 32P Directional reactive overpower 32Q Directional active underpower 37P a Phase undercurrent 37 D Excessive starting time locked rotor 48 51LR Starts per hour 66 Field loss underimpedance 40 Pole slip 78 PS Voltage restrained overcurrent 50V 51V Underimpedance 21B Inadvertent energization 50 27 Third harmonic undervoltage 27TN 64G2 100 stator ground fault 64G Overexcitation V Hz 24 Positive sequence undercurrent 27D Remnant undervoltage 27R Undervoltage L L or L n 27 Overvoltage L L or L n 59 Neutral voltage displacement 59N Negative sequence overvoltage 47 D Overfrequency 81H D Underfrequency 81L Rate of change of frequency 81R m standard D according to instrument transformers connected Phase Rotation Direction c The rotation direction of the three phases may be a b c or a c b the phase order in the trigonometric counterclockwise direction DE50336 The phase rotation direction should be set for correct calculation of the symmetrical b Phase rotation direction a b c DE50521 c Phase rotation
398. unction is available in the optional MCS025 module The Close enable logic data must connect to a logic input on the Sepam All other data and measurements are transmitted to the Sepam base unit through the CCA785 connection cord Block Diagram phase difference frequency difference voltage difference i sync check Dead AND Dead2 gt close enable Deadi gt Dead2 p ls no voltage Dead XOR Dead Dead AND Live2 no V sync1 no Vi sync2 Anticipation It is possible to anticipate the function by a time Ta compensating for the frequency difference and the circuit breaker closing time in order to synchronize the voltages at the time of closing Voltage Checking When one of the two voltages is absent closing may be authorized according to one of five voltage checking modes m Viusynci absent and Viusync2 present Dead1 AND Live2 m Vusvnc present and Vitsync2 absent Live AND Dead2 m One voltage is present and the other is absent Dead1 XOR Dead2 m One or both of the two voltages are absent Dead1 OR Dead2 m Both voltages are absent Dead1 AND Dead2 The presence of each of the voltages is detected by comparing the voltage to the high set point us high set point The absence of either of the voltages is detected by comparing the voltage to the low set point Viis low set point Schneider 71 amp Electric 63230 216 230B1 Protection Functions 72 63230 216 230B1
399. unction protects generators against phase to ground insulation faults by detecting any reduction of the third harmonic residual voltage This function protects 10 to 20 of the stator winding on the neutral point end Complete protection of the stator winding is ensured by combining this function with function 59N or 51N which protects 85 to 95 of the winding on the terminal end 76 63230 216 230B1 Third Harmonic Undervoltage ANSI Code 27TN 64G2 Due to their geometric characteristics generators produce third order harmonic oltages VH3 in addition to the fundamental voltage The amplitude of the VH3 oltage may vary from 0 to 10 of VN as a function of m network and generator characteristics m the load on the generator It is generally higher under full load than under no load conditions In the absence of a fault the VH3 voltage must be at least 0 2 of VN for protection function 27TN VH3 Voltage with No Fault During normal operation the VH3 voltage is measured at each end of the windings p ESI AAA WAAAY V3nt V3rx DE51614 Neutral point Terminals H3 Voltage with a Fault on the Neutral Point End hen a single phase fault occurs in the stator winding near the machine neutral point the neutral point impedance is short circuited This causes a drop in the H3 oltage on the neutral point end WY Ma DE51615 4A Neutral point Terminals H3 Voltage with a Fault on the Ter
400. urves defined according to the following formulas where x a b c L m 15 half curve depending on the Is set point 2 Idx is where 0 lt Itx lt V2IN and x a b c m 2 d half curve 2 We gt 0 005 IN where V2In lt Itxandx a b c in Tripping zone 6 high set point 100 High set point 5 5 5 eJ Tripping zone 4 percentage based set point 3 re BR 2 half curve 15 1 half curve Detection of an external fault or machine starting gt t IN Differential High Set Point To avoid any delay for major asymmetrical faults a differential high set point without restraint is used The characteristic of this set point is Idx 5 5IN and x wherex a b c Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE52288 Protection Functions la Block Diagram Machine Differential ANSI Code 87M Tripping Restraints The following are applications for machine differential restraint 1 Restraint for external faults or machine starting During starting or an external fault the through current is much higher than 1 5 IN As long as the CTs do not saturate the differential current is low This transient state is detected by the following characteristic Idx I 2 32 An external fault can be followed by a short but high differential current that is why a 200 ms restraint is used to ensure protection stability
401. using the SFT2841 software according to the uses listed in the table below The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation All logic inputs whether assigned to predefined functions or not can be used for the customization functions according to specific application needs m inthe control matrix SFT2841 software to connect an input to a logic output a LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display m inthe logic equation editor SFT2841 software as logic equation variables m inLogipam SFT2885 software as input variables for the program in ladder language Logic Output Assignment Table O1 Block closing O2 by default Closing O3 by default Watchdog O5 Zone selective Interlocking blocking send 1 0102 by default Zone selective Interlocking blocking send 2 0103 by default Genset shutdown Free De excitation Free Load shedding Free AT closing of NO circuit breaker Free AT closing of tie breaker Free AT opening of tie breaker Free Tripping of capacitor step 1 to 4 Free Tripping of capacitor step 1 to 4 Free Note The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned Assignment Table for Logic Inputs Common to all Applications Cl
402. ustable timer hold definite time or IDMT can be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults Tripping Curve Timer Hold Definite time DT Definite time Standard inverse time SIT Definite time Very inverse time VIT or LTI Definite time Extremely inverse time EIT Definite time Ultra inverse time UIT Definite time RI curve Definite time IEC inverse time SIT A Definite time or IDMT IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B Definite time or IDMT IEC extremely inverse time EIT C Definite time or IDMT IEEE moderately inverse IEC D Definite time or IDMT IEEE very inverse IEC E Definite time or IDMT IEEE extremely inverse IEC F Definite time or IDMT IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT Customized Definite time Block Diagram Irx CSH ZSCT CT Ir Ir gt 0 8 Isr instantaneous output 0 8 Is ZSCT ACE990 Ir Ir gt Isr Van Vbn x Vcn Ir Ir cos pr 80 lt 0 li directi T 0 bus line irection S delayed output _ me Ir cos or 80 gt 0 choice Vr pick up signal and external VT Vr Vr Vsr to zone selective reverse interlocking direction instantaneous output Ir Ir gt Isr reverse zone 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 230B1 143
403. ut and set up in the SFT2841 software in order for rackouts to be counted The number of disconnects is saved in case auxiliary power fails It can be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software Readout The measurements can be accessed by one of the following m Sepam display via the D icon m aPC with SFT2841 software loaded m a communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 to 65535 Units None Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 second typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Functions Contents Setting Ranges 60 Overspeed 66 Underspeed 67 Underimpedance 68 Overexcitation V Hz 69 Sync Check 71 Undervoltage L L or L N 73 Positive Sequence Undervoltage amp Phase Rotation Direction Check 74 Remnant Undervoltage 75 Third Harmonic Undervoltage 76 Directional Active Overpower 80 Directional Reactive Overpower 81 Phase Undercurrent 82 Directional Active Underpower 83 Temperature Monitoring 84 Loss of Field 85 Negative Sequence Current Unbalance 88 Negative Sequence Overvoltage 91 Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor 92 Thermal Overload for Cables 94 Thermal Overload for Capacitors 99 Thermal Overload for Machines 108 Breaker Failure 119 Inadvertent Energization 121 Phase Overcurrent 123 Ground Fault 125 Voltage Restrained Overcurrent 128 Capacitor Bank Unbalance 130 Overvoltage L L or L N 131 Neutral Voltage Displacement 132 100 Stat
404. valid if the resistance and inductance per phase of the capacitor bank connecting cable cable between the Sepam CT and the capacitor bank allow for the following conditions m fora wye connected bank Lo lt 0 05 x d whereR is the resistance per phase in ohms Q Co L is the inductance per phase in Henrys H R 0 027 x m is the angular frequency in radians s Co C is the total capacitance per phase in Farads F m for a delta connected bank Lo lt 0 017 x d whereR is the resistance per phase in ohms Q Co L is the inductance per phase in Henrys H is the angular frequency in radians s deich s C is the a capacitance between phases in Farads F Schneider 63230 216 230B1 49 amp Electric DE10412 Metering Functions Machine Operation Assistance Capacitor Unbalance Current Operation This function measures the unbalance current of double wye connected capacitor bank steps Unbalanced current is a characteristic of capacitor module damage The measurement is carried out via the additional phase and zero sequence current channels m l a capacitor step 1 unbalance current measurement l b capacitor step 2 unbalance current measurement l c capacitor step 3 unbalance current measurement l r capacitor step 4 unbalance current measurement Readout The measurements may be accessed through m the Sepam display key m aPCwith SFT2841 software m a communication link
405. ve force leads the network voltage the electrical power supplied to the network increases slightly At a constant level of mechanical power do Baba dt Jo The machine slows as long as the electrical power supplied is not equal to the mechanical power because the derivative of the velocity is negative Electrically speaking the electromotive force reduces its lead and consequently the angle o if decreases slightly with respect to its value at point A the electromotive force reduces its lead on the network voltage the electrical power supplied to the network decreases slightly At a constant level of mechanical power do Pa a P gt 0 dt Jo The machine accelerates as long as the electrical power supplied is not equal to the mechanical power because the derivative of the velocity is positive Electrically speaking the electromotive force increases its lead and consequently the angle 63230 216 230B1 149 Protection Functions m point B unstable operation n if dincreases slightly with respect to its value at point B the electromotive force leads the network voltage the electrical power supplied to the network decreases slightly At a constant level of mechanical power do Pr x P a qe rm The machine accelerates because the derivative of the velocity is positive Electrically speaking the electromotive force increases its lead and consequently the angle 8 D if decreases slightly with respect t
406. ween the phase currents and phase to neutral voltages The and signs and IND inductive and CAP capacitive indications give the direction of power flow and the type of load Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the amp key m aPC with SFT2841 software m communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 1 at 1 IND CAP Resolution 0 01 Accuracy 1 0 01 typical Display Format 3 significant digits Refresh Interval 1 second typical 1 At In V p pf gt 0 8 under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 230B1 2s amp Electric Metering Functions 30 63230 216 230B1 Active and Reactive Energy Accumulated Active and Reactive Energy Operation Accumulated active and reactive energy values are calculated according to voltages and phase currents la Ib and Ic which are derived from measuring the fundamental component The results of the calculations provide the user with the value of accumulated energy in forward or reverse direction The accumulated energy values are saved in case of power loss Readout Access to the measurements is by one of the following m the Sepam display via the key m a PC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Active energy Reactive energy Metering Capacity 0 to 2 1 108 MW 0 to 2 1 108 MVAR h Units MW h Mvar h Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 MVAR h Accura
407. wing sensors are selected m for winding 1 100 A 1A 5P20 m for winding 2 4 kA 1A 5P30 Setting the Percentage Based Curve and the Maximum Threshold This transformer features a tap changer The continuous differential current due to the voltage variation of the tap changer is Idchanger SC x 100 where x is the maximum variation of the tap changer In this example x 0 15 The differential current due to the change in the transformation ratio is 0 15 of o 1 015 X 100 17 6 Type 5P sensors with a maximum measurement error tolerance of 10 are used The measurement accuracy of the relay is 1 for Ids and Id It The minimum setting is therefore Ids IdChanger IdMeasure IdRelay margin Idchanger Assuming a margin of approximately 5 the minimum setting is therefore Ids 17 6 10 1 5 34 Ids and the Id It slope are set to 34 The ratio between the closing current and the rated current is 9 6 As this ratio is greater than 8 V2 the conventional harmonic restraint is selected The second slope on the percentage based curve is set to 70 starting at 6 In in order to ensure sufficient stability of the protection fault in the event of external faults The high set point is set to a value higher than that of the closing current with the following margin A liNr IN The conventional harmonic restraint is set with m a second harmonic set point equal to 20 with cross blocking m afifth harmonic set
408. with two groups of settings 2 According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input output modules 3 With optional MET1482 temperature input modules 4 With optional MCS025 sync check module 6 63230 216 230B1 ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Introduction Selection Table Substation Transformer Motor Generator Bus o m i Phase current la Ib Ic RMS CI L Measured residual current Ir calculated Ir D D D D D D D D a D D Demand current la Ib Ic D D E D Peak demand current lamax Ibmax Icmax D D D D D D D D D D a D D Measured residual current l r LI D LI D D Voltage Vab Vbc Vac Van Vbn Ven a Residual voltage Vr D D D D D D D D D D D D Positive sequence voltage V1 rotation direction D D D L D D E D D D D D Negative sequence voltage V2 D D D D L D D D D D D Frequency f Li D D D D Active power P Pa Pb Pc Reactive power Q Qa Qb Qc Apparent power S Sa Sb Sc Peak demand power Pmax Qmax L Power factor pf D D D D D D D D D Calculated active and reactive energy Wh VARh m D LI D D Active and reactive energy by pulse counting 2 n n n n
409. y 1 2 Resolution 1A Time Constant T Setting range 1 min to 600 min Resolution 1 min Characteristic Times Operation time accuracy 2 or 1 s Inputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 m D Protection blocking P49RMS_1_113 m D Outputs Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix Delayed output P49RMS 13 m D Alarm PA49RMS 1 10 m D Block closing P49RMS 1 11 m D D Protection blocked P49RMS_1_16 m D Hot state P49RMS_1_18 m Block thermal overload P49RMS_1 32 m D 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE50840 Protection Functions tA Real thermal withstand 49RMS cable tripping curve br Ale et gf ES max I Cable thermal i withstand uccisi ee k I NS ru warn t 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Thermal Overload for Cables ANSI Code 49RMS Example Consider a copper cable 350MCM with a permissible current la 485 A and a 1 second thermal withstand Ith_1 s 22 4 KA The thermal time constant of a cable depends on its installation method Typical time constant values are between 10 and 60 minutes For buried cables the time constant is between 20 and 60 minutes for non buried cables it is between 10 and 40 minutes For the cable in question the selected values are T 30 minutes and IB 350 A Check compatibility between the 49RMS curve and the ca

3 - Schneider Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents